Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trademarks
Canon and LASER CLASS are registered trademarks and RAPID Fusing
System is a trademark of Canon, Inc.
Copyright
Copyright © 2001 by Canon, Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this
publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a
retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language
in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical,
chemical, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of
Canon, Inc.
As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Canon has determined
the Energy Star guidelines for ®energy efficiency.
that the Canon LASER CLASS 3170 and 3175 meet
Super G3 is a phrase used to describe the new
generation of fax machines that use ITU-T V.34
standard 33.6Kbps* modems. Super G3 High Speed
Fax machines allow transmission time of
approximately 3 seconds* per page which results in
reduced telephone line charges.
* Approximately 3 seconds per page fax transmission
time based on CCITT/ITU-T No.1 Chart, (JBIG,
Standard Mode) at 33.6Kbps modem speed. The
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) currently
supports 28.8Kbps modem speeds or lower,
depending on telephone line conditions.
ii
Preface
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Users in the U.S.A.
PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR CANON
FACSIMILE EQUIPMENT
A. Location
Supply a suitable table, cabinet, or desk. See Appendix A for the
unit’s dimensions and weight.
B. Order Information
1. Only a single telephone line (touch-tone or rotary) is to be used.
2. Order an RJ11-C modular wall jack (USOC code), which should
be installed by the phone company. If the RJ11-C wall jack is not
present, telephone/fax operation is not possible.
3. Order a normal business line from your telephone company’s
business representative. The line should be a regular voice grade
line or the equivalent. Use one line per unit.
DDD (Direct Distance Dial) line
-if not-
IDDD (International Direct Distance Dial) line if you communi-
cate overseas
Canon recommends an individual line following industry standards, e.g.
the 2500 (Touch Tone) or 500 (Rotary/Pulse Dial) telephones. A dedi-
cated extension off a PBX unit without “Call Waiting” can be used with
your facsimile unit. Key telephone systems are not recommended
because they send non- standard signals to individual telephones for
ringing and special codes, which may cause a fax error.
C. Power Requirements
The facsimile unit should be connected to a standard 120 voltAC, three-
wire grounded outlet only. Do not connect this unit to an outlet or
power line shared with other appliances that cause electrical noise.
Air conditioners, electric typewriters, copiers, and machines of this sort
generate electrical noise which often interferes with communications
equipment and the sending and receiving of documents.
Preface
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONNECTION OF THE EQUIPMENT
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the rear
panel of this equipment is a label that contains, among other informa-
tion, the FCC Registration Number and Ringer Equivalence Number
(REN) for this equipment. If requested, this information must be given
to the telephone company. This equipment may not be used on coin
service provided by the telephone company. Connection to party lines is
subject to state tariffs.
The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be
connected to the telephone line. Excessive REN’s on the telephone line
may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In
most, but all areas, the sum of the REN’s should not exceed five(5.0). To
be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line, as
determined by the total REN’s contact the telephone company to deter-
mine the maximum REN for the calling area.
An FCC compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with
this equipment. This equipment is designed to be connected to the
telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack
which is Part 68 compliant.
(Note: RENs are associated with loop-start and ground-start ports. Do
not use for E&M or digital ports.)
Even if the dual-line option is installed, the REN is applicable to each
port.
This equipment if it uses an optional telephone receiver is hearing aid
compatible.
IN CASE OF EQUIPMENT MALFUNCTION
Should any malfunction occur which cannot be corrected by the proce-
dures described in this User’s Guide, disconnect the equipment from the
telephone line and unplug the power cord. The telephone line should
not be reconnected or the switch turned on until the problem is com-
pletely resolved. Users should contact their local authorized Canon
Facsimile Service Dealer for servicing of equipment.
iv
Preface
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RIGHTS OF THE TELEPHONE COMPANY
Should the equipment cause harm to the telephone network, the
telephone company may temporarily disconnect service. The telephone
company also retains the right to make changes in facilities and services
which may affect the operation of this equipment. When such changes
are necessary, the telephone company is required to give adequate prior
notice to the user. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a
compliant with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
WARNING!
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for
any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any
message via a telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly
contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on
the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an
identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending
the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such
business, other entity, or individual.
In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should
complete the procedure to register your name, unit number, time, and
date on page 3-12.
Preface
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING FOR THE LASER CLASS® 3170/3175
Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless
otherwise specified in the manual. If such changes or modifications
should be made, you could be required to stop operation of the
equipment.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for
a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged
to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
–
–
–
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that
to which the receiver is connected.
–
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Use of shielded cable is required to comply with Class B limits in Subpart
B of Part 15 of FCC Rules.
WARNING FOR THE ETHERNET BOARD EB-52 FX (IN-
STALLED)
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for
a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when equipment is operated in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in
which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own
expense.
* Use of shielded cable is required to comply with Class A limits in
Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules.
vi
Preface
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless
otherwise specified in the manual. If such changes or modifications
should be made, you could be required to stop operation of the
equipment.
Preface
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING FOR THE LASER CLASS® 3170MS
Facsimile Transceiver, Model H12168
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interferences,
and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If
this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
–
–
–
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that
to which the receiver is connected.
–
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Use of shielded cable is required to comply with Class B limits in Subpart
B of Part 15 of FCC Rules.
Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless
otherwise specified in the manual. If such changes or modifications
should be made, you could be required to stop operation of the
equipment.
Canon U.S.A. Inc.
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A.
TEL No.(516)328-5600
viii
Preface
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING FOR THE ETHERNET BOARD EB-52 FX (IN-
STALLED)
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for
a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when equipment is operated in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in
which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own
expense.
* Use of shielded cable is required to comply with Class A limits in
Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules.
Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless
otherwise specified in the manual. If such changes or modifications
should be made, you could be required to stop operation of the
equipment.
Preface
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Users in Canada
PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR CANON
FACSIMILE EQUIPMENT
A. Location
Supply a suitable table, cabinet, or desk. See Appendix A: Specifica-
tions for details about unit's weight and dimensions.
B. Order Information
1. Provide only a single line or touch-tone or rotary telephone set
terminated with a standard 4-pin modular phone plug. (Touch-
tone is recommended if available in your area.)
2. Order an RJ11-C modular wall jack (USOC code), which should
be installed by the phone company. If the RJ11-C wall jack is not
present, telephone/fax operation is not possible.
3. Order a normal business line from your telephone company’s
business representative. The line should be a regular voice grade
line or the equivalent. Use one line per unit.
DDD (Direct Distance Dial) line
-if not-
IDDD (International Direct Distance dial) line if you communi-
cate overseas
Canon recommends an individual line following industry standards
such as the 2500 (touch tone) or 500 (rotary/pulse dial) telephones. A
dedicated extension off a PBX without Camp On signals is also permitted
with a fax unit. Key telephone systems are not recommended because
they send non-standard signals to individual telephones for ringing, or
send special codes which may cause a fax error.
C. Power Requirements
The power outlet should be a three-prong grounded receptacle (single
or duplex). It should be independent from copiers, heaters, air condi-
tioners or any electrical equipment that is thermostatically controlled.
The rated value is 120 volts and 15 amperes. The RJ11-C modular jack
should be relatively close to the power outlet to facilitate installation.
x
Preface
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTICE
The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certifica-
tion means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications
networks protective, operational and safety requirements. The Depart-
ment does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user’s
satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permitted
to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company.
The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of
connection. In some cases, the company’s inside wiring associated with
a single-line individual service may be extended by means of a certified
connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The customer should be
aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent
deterioration of service in some situations.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device
provides an indication of the maximum number of terminal allowed to
be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface
may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the require-
ment that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Number of all the devices
does not exceed 5.
The REN of this equipment is 0.3.
Even if the dual-line option is installed, the REN is applicable to each
port.
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Cana-
dian maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or
alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunc-
tions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the
user to disconnect the equipment.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground
connections of the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic
water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution
may be particularly important in rural areas.
Preface
xi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but
should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electri-
cian, as appropriate.
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian
Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du
Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
WARNING FOR THE ETHERNET BOARD EB-52 FX (IN-
STALLED)
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian
Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du
Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
xii
Preface
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION
1. Read these safety instructions and refer to them later if you have any
questions.
®
2. Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the LASER CLASS
3170 Series.
®
3. Place the LASER CLASS 3170 Series on a level surface. To avoid
®
serious damage from falling, never place the LASER CLASS 3170
Series on an unstable cart, stand, or table.
®
4. Do not use the LASER CLASS 3170 Series near water.
5. Slots and openings on the cabinet and on the back or bottom are
provided for ventilation. To ensure reliable operation of the LASER
or cove®r these openings. Do not block the openings by placing the
CLASS 3170 Series and to protect it from overheating, never block
unit on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface, or near a radiator or
®
heat register. Do not place the LASER CLASS 3170 Series in a closet
or built-in installation unless proper ventilation is provided.
®
6. Operate the LASER CLASS 3170 Series only from the type of power
source indicated on the unit’s label. If you are not sure of the type of
power available, consult your dealer or local power company.
ing-type plug provi®ded with a third (grounding) pin. This plug will
7. The LASER CLASS 3170 Series is equipped with a 3-prong, ground-
only fit into a grounding-type outlet. This is a safety feature. If you
are unable to insert the plug into your outlet, contact an electrician to
replace your outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the ground-
ing-type plug by breaking off the third prong or using a 3-to-2
adapter.
8. Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord, and do not locate
®
the LASER CLASS 3170 Series where the cord will be walked on.
Preface
xiii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
make sure that the total of the ampere ratings on the®products
9. If you use an extension cord with the LASER CLASS 3170 Series,
plugged into the extension cord does not exceed the extension cord
ampere rating. Also, make sure that the total ampere rating of all
products plugged into the wall outlet does not exceed the current
amperage of the circuit breaker.
10. Do not push objects of any kind into the slots or openings on the
cabinet as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out
parts, which could result in a risk of fire or electric shock.
eat or drink around the fax. If you spill liquid or i®f any substance
11. To avoid spillage in or around the LASER CLASS 3170 Series do not
Series and call your Authorized Canon Dealer immediatel®y.
falls into the unit, immediately unplug the LASER CLASS 3170
®
12. Unplug the LASER CLASS 3170 Series from the wall outlet before
cleaning.
13. Except as explained elsewhere in this manual, do not attempt to
®
service the LASER CLASS 3170 Series yourself. Opening and
removing interior covers may expose you to dangerous voltage
points or other risks. Refer all servicing to your local Authorized
Canon Service Dealer.
xiv
Preface
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14. Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to
qualified service personnel under the following conditions:
❏
❏
❏
When the power cord or plug is damaged or frayed.
If liquid has been spilled into the unit.
®
If the LASER CLASS 3170 Series has been exposed to rain or
water.
®
❏
If the LASER CLASS 3170 Series does not operate normally
when you have followed the instructions in the User’s Guide.
Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating
instructions in the User’s Guide. Improper adjustment of other
controls may result in damage and may require extensive work by
a qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation.
®
❏
❏
If the LASER CLASS 3170 Series has been dropped or the
cabinet has been damaged.
performance, indicat®ing a need for service.
If the LASER CLASS 3170 Series exhibits a distinct change in
You must register your fax number, your name or company name, and
®
the date-and time in the LASER CLASS 3170 Series before you use it.
This is required by the FCC rules governing the use of fax equipment.
(➞3-12)
THE OPTIONAL HANDSET EMITS LOW LEVEL
ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES. IF YOU USE A CARDIAC
PACEMAKER AND FEEL ABNORMALITIES, PLEASE MOVE AWAY
FROM THIS PRODUCT AND CONSULT YOUR DOCTOR.
Preface
xv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Laser Safety
This fax complies with 21 CFR Chapter 1 Subchapter J as a Class 1 laser
product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services
(DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation
Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. This means that the fax does
not produce hazardous radiation.
Since radiation emitted inside the fax is completely confined within
protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape
from the machine during any phase of user operation.
CDRH Regulations
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food
and Drug Administration implemented regulations for laser products on
August 2, 1976. These regulations apply to laser products manufactured
from August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in
the United States.
USE OF CONTROLS, ADJUSTMENTS, OR PERFORMANCE OF
PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED IN THIS USER’S
GUIDE MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.
The label is attached to the laser scanner unit inside the fax and is not in
a user access area.
xvi
Preface
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Welcome ! ....................................................................................................... 1-1
Main Features .......................................................................................... 1-2
Options..................................................................................................... 1-5
Customer Support .................................................................................. 1-6
Setting Up ...................................................................................................... 2-1
How to Use This Guide ......................................................................... 2-3
Where to Set Up the Fax ........................................................................ 2-4
Space Around the Fax ............................................................................ 2-6
Power Requirements .............................................................................. 2-7
General Precautions ............................................................................... 2-8
Moving the Fax Unit ............................................................................ 2-10
Unpacking: Have You Got Everything? .............................................2-11
For the LASER CLASS® 3175 Only .......................................... 2-14
For the LASER CLASS 3170 Series ......................................... 2-13
For the LASER CLASS® 3170MS Only ..................................... 2-14
Options Available........®................................................................ 2-16
Supply........................................................................................... 2-16
Parts of the Fax...................................................................................... 2-17
Front View ........................................................................................ 2-17
Rear View .......................................................................................... 2-18
Handset (option) .............................................................................. 2-18
Removing the Shipping Material ....................................................... 2-19
Removing the Shipping Tapes ....................................................... 2-19
Removing the Packing Materials Inside the Fax Unit ................ 2-19
Removing the Packing Materials from Paper Cassette 1 ........... 2-21
Removing the Protective Plastic Sheet ......................................... 2-22
Assembling the Fax .............................................................................. 2-23
Installing the Toner Cartridge........................................................ 2-23
Attaching the Document Output Tray and
the Upper Output Tray ................................................................... 2-26
Attaching the Document Feeder Tray........................................... 2-27
Installing Paper Cassette 2
®
(For the LASER CLASS 3175 Only) ............................................. 2-28
Loading Paper in Paper Cassettes 1 and 2 ................................... 2-31
Connecting the Handset (option) .................................................. 2-38
Connecting the Telephone Line ..................................................... 2-39
Connecting an Extension Phone .................................................... 2-40
Turning on the Power ..................................................................... 2-41
Using the MP Tray ................................................................................ 2-43
Contents
xvii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading the MP Tray ....................................................................... 2-43
Turning on and off USE MP TRAY and
Setting the Paper Size in the USE MP TRAY Menu .................... 2-48
Selecting Paper Delivery ..................................................................... 2-50
Setting Face-down Paper Delivery for Upper and
Lower Output Trays ........................................................................ 2-50
Using the Face-up Tray ................................................................... 2-53
Using the Optional Dual-Line ............................................................ 2-54
Connecting Two Telephone Lines ................................................. 2-54
How the Two Telephone Lines Operate ....................................... 2-56
Registering the Telephone Numbers for the Lines ..................... 2-57
Chapter 3
Getting Started .............................................................................................. 3-1
Operation Buttons (One-touch panels closed) ................................... 3-2
Operation Buttons (One-touch panels open) ..................................... 3-4
Using the Menus and Buttons .............................................................. 3-5
General Guidelines for Registering Information .......................... 3-5
Using the Menus ................................................................................ 3-5
To Open a Menu and Select an Item .......................................... 3-6
To Return to the Previous Level.................................................. 3-6
To Return to Standby Immediately ............................................ 3-6
Entering Names for Registration..................................................... 3-7
To Correct a Mistake ..................................................................... 3-8
Menu Button Summary Table .......................................................... 3-9
Checking and Setting the Telephone Line ........................................ 3-10
Registering Required Sender Information ........................................ 3-12
What is Sender Information? ......................................................... 3-12
Registering the Sender Information (TX TERMINAL ID) .............. 3-13
Registering Sender Names .................................................................. 3-18
Registering a Sender Name ............................................................ 3-18
Changing or Erasing a Sender Name ........................................... 3-20
Using the Energy Saver Mode
®
(For the LASER CLASS 3170/3175 Only) ....................................... 3-21
Turning the Energy Saver Feature ON ......................................... 3-21
Returning to the Full Power Mode ............................................... 3-23
Chapter 4
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing ....................................................... 4-1
Read This before Entering Telephone Numbers ................................ 4-2
Entering Pauses for Dialing ............................................................. 4-2
Adjusting the Length of a Pause ..................................................... 4-3
What is Speed Dialing? .......................................................................... 4-5
One-touch Speed Dialing............................................................. 4-5
Coded Speed Dialing.................................................................... 4-5
Group Dialing................................................................................ 4-5
Setting Up One-touch Speed Dialing .................................................. 4-6
Setting Up Coded Speed Dialing ....................................................... 4-15
xviii
Contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up Group Dialing ................................................................... 4-24
Using Speed Dialing ............................................................................ 4-29
Using One-touch Speed Dialing .................................................... 4-29
Using Coded Speed Dialing ........................................................... 4-31
Using Group Dialing ....................................................................... 4-33
Using Directory Dialing ...................................................................... 4-35
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Using the Fax as a Copier ............................................................................ 5-1
Preparing the Document ....................................................................... 5-2
Setting a Document on the Fax............................................................. 5-3
Performing the Document Settings...................................................... 5-4
Making Copies ........................................................................................ 5-6
Sending Documents ..................................................................................... 6-1
Setting a Document for Sending .......................................................... 6-2
Preparing the Document .................................................................. 6-2
Setting the Document on the Fax .................................................... 6-3
Adjusting the Scanning Settings...................................................... 6-4
Selecting a Sender Name ....................................................................... 6-6
Using Regular Dialing ........................................................................... 6-7
Canceling Sending a Document ........................................................... 6-8
To Cancel Sending on a Single-Line ........................................... 6-8
To Cancel Sending on a Dual-Line ............................................. 6-9
Dialing Long Distance with Regular Dialing ................................... 6-10
Overview of Sending Methods........................................................... 6-12
Memory Sending ............................................................................. 6-12
Direct Sending .................................................................................. 6-15
Manual Sending ............................................................................... 6-17
Re-dialing When the Line is Busy ...................................................... 6-19
What is Automatic Redialing? ....................................................... 6-19
Setting Up Redialing ....................................................................... 6-20
Auto Redial Setup Summary .................................................... 6-21
Sequential Broadcasting to More Than One Location..................... 6-22
Sending Documents at a Preset Time ................................................ 6-24
Sending a Document with a Subaddress/Password....................... 6-27
Subaddress/Password Sending with Speed Dialing ................. 6-27
Subaddress/Password Sending with the Operation
Panel Buttons.................................................................................... 6-28
Chapter 7
Receiving Documents .................................................................................. 7-1
Receiving Documents Automatically .................................................. 7-2
Contents
xix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Automatic Receive Mode.............................................. 7-2
Messages Displayed When Receiving a Document...................... 7-2
Turning on and Adjusting the Auto Switch Time ......................... 7-5
Receiving Documents Manually with the Optional Handset .......... 7-7
Receiving a Document Manually at the Fax .................................. 7-7
Receiving a Document Manually with
an Extension Telephone .................................................................... 7-8
Changing the Remote Receive ID.................................................... 7-9
Canceling Receiving a Document .......................................................7-11
To Cancel Receiving on a Single-Line .......................................7-11
To Cancel Receiving on a Dual-Line ........................................ 7-12
Transferring Documents ...................................................................... 7-13
Before You Set Up Document Transfer ......................................... 7-13
Setting Up the Fax for Document Transfer .................................. 7-14
Turning the Transfer Mode ON and OFF ..................................... 7-17
Turning Transfer Mode ON ....................................................... 7-17
Turning Transfer Mode OFF ...................................................... 7-18
Changing the Transfer Settings...................................................... 7-18
Canceling the Transfer Settings ..................................................... 7-20
Chapter 8
Using the Memory Features........................................................................ 8-1
When the Fax Displays RECEIVED IN MEMORY ............................ 8-2
Displaying the Transaction History ..................................................... 8-3
Printing a Memory List.......................................................................... 8-5
Printing a Document in the Memory................................................... 8-6
Sending a Document in Memory to a Different Destination ........... 8-7
Erasing a Document from the Memory............................................... 8-9
Deleting a Document with the Delete File Button ........................ 8-9
Deleting a Document with the Memory Reference Button ....... 8-10
Setting Up and Using a Memory Box .................................................8-11
Before You Create Memory Boxes ................................................. 8-12
When You Create a Memory Box .................................................. 8-12
Access Settings ............................................................................ 8-13
Main Settings ............................................................................... 8-13
Feature Settings ........................................................................... 8-14
Creating a Memory Box .................................................................. 8-14
Changing the Memory Box Settings ............................................. 8-22
Canceling a Memory Box ............................................................... 8-23
Sending a Document Stored in the Memory Box........................ 8-24
Printing a Document Received in a Memory Box....................... 8-25
What Happens to Memory after a Power Failure............................ 8-27
How Your Registered Data Is Protected ....................................... 8-27
About the Backup Battery .............................................................. 8-27
Chapter 9
Using a Relay Network................................................................................ 9-1
xx
Contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What is Relay Broadcasting?................................................................. 9-2
Setting Up and Using a Standard Relay Unit ..................................... 9-3
Setting Your Fax as a Relay Unit ..................................................... 9-4
Changing the Relay Broadcast Settings .......................................... 9-7
Deleting the Relay Group ................................................................. 9-9
Sending a Document to a Relay Unit for Relay Broadcasting ....... 9-10
Sending a Document to a Relay Unit with Speed Dialing......... 9-12
Sending with the Relay Broadcast Button.................................... 9-12
Chapter 10 Using Confidential Mailboxes ................................................................. 10-1
Setting Up and Using the Standard Mailbox Features.................... 10-2
Creating a Mailbox .......................................................................... 10-2
Changing Mailbox Settings ............................................................ 10-6
Canceling a Mailbox ........................................................................ 10-7
Receiving a Confidential Document ............................................. 10-8
Sending a Confidential Document ................................................... 10-10
Sending a Confidential Document with Speed Dialing ........... 10-10
Sending a Confidential Document with
the Confidential Mailbox Button ..................................................10-11
Chapter 11 Setting Up and Using Polling ...................................................................11-1
What is Polling? .....................................................................................11-2
Before You Use Polling Receiving ..................................................11-2
Polling Other Fax Machines to Receive a Document .......................11-3
Polling to Receive at a Preset Time ................................................11-5
Changing the Preset Polling Settings...........................................11-12
Canceling Preset Polling ................................................................11-13
Setting Up Polling Sending ................................................................11-15
Before You Can Be Polled to Send ................................................11-15
Setting Up a Polling Box ................................................................11-15
Scanning a Document into the Memory for Polling Sending ..11-20
Changing the Polling Box Setup...................................................11-21
Canceling a Polling Box .................................................................11-23
Chapter 12 Other Special Features ............................................................................... 12-1
Using the Telephone............................................................................. 12-2
Tone Dialing on a Pulse Line .............................................................. 12-3
Setting and Using the Program Button ............................................. 12-5
Setting Up and Using the Optional Stamp Feature ......................... 12-8
Setting Up the Stamp Feature ........................................................ 12-8
Turning the Stamp Feature ON/OFF ......................................... 12-10
How the Fax Operates with Default Settings ................................. 12-12
Chapter 13 Restricting Use of the Fax ......................................................................... 13-1
Contents
xxi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting and Using the System Settings Password............................ 13-2
Setting the System Settings Password .......................................... 13-2
Changing or Canceling the System Settings Password.............. 13-4
Restricting Fax Operation ................................................................... 13-6
Setting Operation Restrictions ....................................................... 13-6
Operating the Fax with Restrictions ON .....................................13-11
Sending a Document with Restrictions ON ...........................13-11
Making a Copy with Restrictions ON.................................... 13-12
Printing a Report with Restrictions ON ................................ 13-13
Using the Telephone with Restrictions ON........................... 13-13
Turning Restrictions OFF and ON .............................................. 13-14
Receiving Documents from Registered Senders Only .................. 13-16
Using Memory Lock........................................................................... 13-17
Setting a Time and Password for Memory Lock ....................... 13-17
Turning the Memory Lock ON .................................................... 13-20
Turning the Memory Lock OFF and Printing Documents ...... 13-20
Setting Up and Using PIN Codes..................................................... 13-21
Setting a PIN Code ........................................................................ 13-21
Dialing with a PIN Code after the Number............................... 13-24
Dialing with a PIN Code before the Number ............................ 13-25
Setting PIN Code Access for Speed Dialing .............................. 13-26
Using Speed Dialing with PIN Code Access ............................. 13-27
Forced PIN Code Access ............................................................... 13-28
Chapter 14 Printing Reports and Lists ........................................................................ 14-1
Printing the Speed Dialing Lists......................................................... 14-2
Printing the User Data List.................................................................. 14-5
Printing the List of Sender Names ..................................................... 14-6
Reports ................................................................................................... 14-8
Printing the Activity Management Report................................... 14-9
Setting and Using Activity Reports..............................................14-11
Memory Lists ...................................................................................... 14-17
Chapter 15 Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions....................................... 15-1
Removing Document Feed Jams ........................................................ 15-2
Removing Printer Feed Jams .............................................................. 15-4
Locating a Paper Jam ...................................................................... 15-5
1. Face-up tray area..................................................................... 15-6
2. Output trays area .................................................................... 15-6
3. Imaging area ............................................................................ 15-8
4. MP tray area............................................................................15-11
5. Paper Cassette 1 area ............................................................ 15-12
6. Paper Cassette 2 area ............................................................ 15-13
Storing Recording Paper ................................................................... 15-15
xxii
Contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Paper .................................................................... 15-15
Storing the Paper Supply.............................................................. 15-16
Changing the Toner Cartridge .......................................................... 15-17
Storing Toner Cartridges ................................................................... 15-22
Handling Cartridges ..................................................................... 15-22
Storing Cartridges ......................................................................... 15-23
Disposing of Used Toner Cartridges........................................... 15-23
Periodic Cleaning ............................................................................... 15-24
Cleaning the Fax Unit ................................................................... 15-24
Cleaning the Transfer Guide Area............................................... 15-25
Cleaning the Scanning Area ......................................................... 15-27
Refilling the Stamp Ink Compartment (option) ............................. 15-33
Error Code Table (listed by number) ............................................... 15-35
List of LCD Display Messages (Alphabetic List) ........................... 15-38
Questions and Answers ..................................................................... 15-42
Documents Are Not Being Sent Correctly. ................................. 15-42
Documents Are Not Being Received Correctly. ........................ 15-45
Documents Are Not Being Copied.............................................. 15-46
Having Other Problems. ............................................................... 15-46
Recording the User Reminder Sheets .............................................. 15-48
Chapter 16 Summary of Important Settings .............................................................. 16-1
Opening the Data Registration Menu ............................................... 16-2
Summary of User Data Settings ......................................................... 16-3
User Settings.......................................................................................... 16-4
Report Settings ...................................................................................... 16-7
TX (Send) Settings .............................................................................. 16-10
RX (Receive) Settings ......................................................................... 16-13
Fax’s Printer Set .................................................................................. 16-16
File Settings ......................................................................................... 16-20
System Settings ................................................................................... 16-27
Dual Line Options .............................................................................. 16-32
Relationship between BATCH TX, QUICK ON-LINE TX, and
Timer Settings ..................................................................................... 16-34
Appendix A Specifications ............................................................................................... A-1
General .................................................................................................... A-1
Operation ................................................................................................ A-3
Dial Features .......................................................................................... A-3
Networking Features ............................................................................ A-4
Copier Features ...................................................................................... A-4
Telephone Features ................................................................................ A-5
Power ...................................................................................................... A-5
Operating Environment........................................................................ A-5
Weight ..................................................................................................... A-5
Contents
xxiii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dimensions ............................................................................................. A-6
Appendix B Documents You Can Scan ........................................................................... B-1
Document Media to Avoid ............................................................... B-1
Specifications for Paper Documents You Can Scan ...................... B-1
Document Thickness ......................................................................... B-1
Document Size ................................................................................... B-2
Scanning Area on the Document ..................................................... B-2
Printing Area ...................................................................................... B-3
Glossary ................................................................................................................................. G-1
Index......................................................................................................................................... I-1
xxiv
Contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1
Welcome !
This new facsimile unit with its features and options, and®greater flexibil-
Thank you for purchasing the new Canon LASER CLASS 3170 Series.
ity enabled by full support of ITU-T subaddress/password sending and
receiving, will help you expand your work capacity and efficiency.
This Facsimile User’s Guide shows you how to get the most out of your
new facsimile unit. Whether you are sending a quick memo to the home
office on the other side of town or automatically receiving from a branch
overseas or across the country, this book shows you how to do it all
quickly and easily.
Take a few minutes to browse through this User’s Guide so you know
what it contains. You do not have to read it all at once from cover to
cover.
We have done our best to give you an accurate, easy-to-use User’s Guide,
but if you still have some questions about how to use your facsimile unit,
feel free to contact your local authorized Canon dealer sales or service
representatives. They will be glad to answer your questions.
®
Model LASER CLASS 3170 is used for illustration purposes in this
manual. When there is any difference among three models, it is clearly
®
indicated in the text, e.g., “LASER CLASS 3170MS only.”
Chapter 1
Welcome ! 1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Main Features
Improved speed
Your fax unit is equipped with the ITU-T standard
V.34 mode which enables transmission speeds up to
33,600 bps, more than double the rate of older G3 fax
models.
Ultra High Quality (UHQ) image
Canon’s ultra-high quality image processing produces
excellent reproductions in documents you send and
copy.
Quality Images !
Full support of ITU-T subaddresses and passwords
You can employ ITU-T subaddresses and passwords
to communicate not only with other Canon faxes, but
fax machines of other manufacturers as well.
Subaddresses
ITU-T
Passwords
Laser beam printer
Quiet, clean laser technology guarantees quality
reproduction.
Cut sheets OK !
You don’t need
special recording
paper !
Large paper capacity
A large paper capacity means less time spent loading
paper in the paper cassettes. The MP (Multi-Purpose)
tray holds a stack of up to 100 sheets. Paper Cassette 1
holds 500 sheets, for a total of 600 sheets. Paper
Cassette 2, available as an option for the LASER
100 sheets
CLASS® 3175, holds another 500 sheets for a total of
CLASS 3170/3170MS and standard for the LASER
1100 sh®eets. All cassettes and the MP tray can be
adjusted to fit a variety of standard paper sizes, and
are easy to access and re-fill.
500 sheets
1-2 Welcome !
Chapter 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
One-touch Dial
Automatic dialing
Includes One-touch and Coded Speed Dialing,
Directory Dialing, as well as Group dialing which
allows you to send the same document to several
destinations at the touch of a button.
72
128
Coded Speed Dial
Variety of send and receive features
Includes multiple broadcasting, polling, relay sending
and receiving, and confidential mailbox sending and
receiving.
Relay sending
Confidential sending
Sequential broadcasting
Polling
ECM send and receive
ECM (error correction mode) reduces errors during
sending and receiving on noisy or poor quality
telephone lines.
Receiving in memory when you run out of paper or
toner
Incoming
document
Receiving
in memory
If you run out of paper or toner while you are
receiving a document, the fax unit continues to
receive by putting the remainder of the document in
the fax memory so you can print it out after you refill
the paper cassette or replace the toner cartridge. A
memory backup function also safeguards the contents
of the memory for approximately 12 hours after a
power failure.
Memory
Delayed sending
Scan a document into the memory and set for sending
at a later time so you can take advantage of holiday or
late night telephone rates.
Automatic sending
Recording
documents
into memory
Dual access
Sending
Even while you are sending or receiving a document,
you can continue to use the fax to register information
with the fax or record documents into the memory.
Receiving
Chapter 1
Welcome ! 1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Quick-on-line TX
Sending starts
immediately
Before the fax is finished scanning a long document, it
will start dialing and sending the pages that are
already scanned. By the time the last page is scanned,
the document transmission is well under way.
Easy to use
A larger display and operation panel with larger
buttons makes the fax easier to use.
Economical and quiet
Canon’s RAPID Fusing System™ realizes quiet opera-
tion while you save money. If the fax machine remains
idle for a specified length of time, the fax machine
automatically shuts itself down and enters the low
energy sleep mode, and will remain in this low energy
mode until the fax machine receives a document
transmission or until you press the Energy Saver button.
Better security with PIN Codes
For PBXs (private branch exchanges) that require PIN
(Personal Identification Number) codes to acquire an
outside line, you can now turn on the PIN code
feature with a user software switch included with the
user data settings. For better security, the PIN codes
are not displayed on the LCD display during dialing
(only a “C” appears), and they do not appear in
printed activity reports.
PIN code
PBX
Expanded transaction features
You can create up to 50 private memory boxes and set
them up to receive documents. If the other party’s fax
can use ITU-T subaddresses and passwords, you can
set up and use memory boxes even if the other party’s
fax unit is not a Canon fax.
750 Private memory boxes
1-4 Welcome !
Chapter 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
JBIG, Improved image data compression
JBIG is a new ITU-T standard image data compression
method. JBIG's compression method allows data to be
compressed more efficiently* than MMR, a conven-
tional compression method. JBIG is especially effec-
tive when transmitting halftone image documents.
Because the smaller data size requires less transmis-
sion time, JBIG saves you time and money.
JBIG
*Actual compression ratio may vary with image.
Super G3 is a phrase used to describe the new
generation of fax machines that use ITU-T V.34
standard 33.6Kbps** modems. Super G3 High Speed
Fax machines allow transmission time of
approximately 3 seconds** per page which results in
reduced telephone line charges.
** Approximately 3 seconds per page fax transmission
time based on CCITT/ITU-T No.1 Chart, (JBIG,
Standard Mode) at 33.6Kbps modem speed. The
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) currently
supports 28.8Kbps modem speeds or lower,
depending on telephone line conditions.
Options
For details about purchasing these options, contact your local authorized
Canon dealer.
Dual-line Upgrade Kit II
Simultaneous sending/receiving
on dual telephone line connection
After installation of the optional Dual-line Upgrade
Kit II, you can connect two telephone lines to the fax
unit. Either line can be used independently or simul-
taneously for separate transactions. For details contact
your local authorized Canon dealer.
LINE 1
LINE 1
Fax Memory
4MB memory module is available to expand the fax memory capacity of
®
the LASER CLASS 3170 Series. For details, see Appendix A-2.
Chapter 1
Welcome ! 1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printer Board I
®
This option enables your LASER CLASS 3170/3175 to operate as a
®
printer. Printer Board I is a standard feature for LASER CLASS 3170MS.
Document Distribution System*
shared fax and network scanner in your ®network environment.
This option enables your LASER CLASS 3170 Series to operate as a
However, please note that this option and the Dual-line Upgrade Kit II
cannot be installed on the same fax unit.
Printer Options
®
The Canon Envelope Feeder, the Duplex Unit, the Canon Adobe
TM
®
PostScript 3 Module I and the Ethernet Board EB-52 FX are available
®
as printer options for the LASER CLASS 3170MS, and for the LASER
®
CLASS 3170/3175 with Printer Board I installed. Also, 4MB, 8MB, and
16 MB RAM DIMM modules are available to expand the printer memory
refer to the Printer User’s Guid®e.
capacity for the LASER CLASS 3170 Series. For details on these options,
Customer Support
®
Your Canon LASER CLASS 3170 Series is designed with the latest
technology to provide trouble-free operation. The warranty card pro-
vided with this facsimile machine describes Canon’s limited warranty
for its products. Be sure to read this warranty information.
If you encounter a problem, try to solve it by referring to the information
in Chapter 15 Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions. If you cannot
Series needs servicing, contact your local authorized Canon d®ealer.
solve the problem, or if you think your Canon LASER CLASS 3170
1-6 Welcome !
Chapter 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
Setting Up
This chapter shows you how to set up the fax unit.
Even if your fax unit has been set up for you, take a few minutes to
glance through this chapter to become familiar with how to use this
User’s Guide. You may also want to check the fax installation to confirm
that it has been done correctly.
❏ How to Use This Guide............................................................................ 2-3
❏ Where to Set Up the Fax .......................................................................... 2-4
❏ Space Around the Fax .............................................................................. 2-6
❏ Power Requirements ................................................................................ 2-7
❏ General Precautions.................................................................................. 2-8
❏ Moving the Fax Unit............................................................................... 2-10
❏ Unpacking: Have You Got Everything? ...............................................2-11
❏ Parts of the Fax ........................................................................................ 2-17
• Front View .......................................................................................... 2-17
• Rear View ........................................................................................... 2-18
• Handset (option) ............................................................................... 2-18
❏ Removing the Shipping Material ......................................................... 2-19
• Removing the Shipping Tapes......................................................... 2-19
• Removing the Packing Materials Inside the Fax Unit.................. 2-19
• Removing the Packing Materials from Paper Cassette 1............. 2-21
• Removing the Protective Plastic Sheet ........................................... 2-22
❏ Assembling the Fax ................................................................................ 2-23
• Installing the Toner Cartridge ......................................................... 2-23
• Attaching the Document Output Tray and
the Upper Output Tray ..................................................................... 2-26
• Attaching the Document Feeder Tray ............................................ 2-27
• Installing Paper Cassette 2
®
(For the LASER CLASS 3175 Only)............................................... 2-28
• Loading Paper in Paper Cassettes 1 and 2..................................... 2-31
• Connecting the Handset (option).................................................... 2-38
• Connecting the Telephone Line....................................................... 2-39
• Connecting an Extension Phone ..................................................... 2-40
• Turning on the Power ....................................................................... 2-41
Chapter 2
Setting Up 2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❏ Using the MP Tray .................................................................................. 2-43
• Loading the MP Tray ........................................................................ 2-43
• Turning on and off USE MP TRAY and
Setting the Paper Size in the USE MP TRAY Menu...................... 2-48
❏ Selecting Paper Delivery ........................................................................ 2-50
• Setting Face-down Paper Delivery for Upper and
Lower Output Trays.......................................................................... 2-50
• Using the Face-up Tray..................................................................... 2-53
❏ Using the Optional Dual-Line............................................................... 2-54
• Connecting Two Telephone Lines ................................................... 2-54
• How the Two Telephone Lines Operate......................................... 2-56
• Registering the Telephone Numbers for the Lines ....................... 2-57
2-2 Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Use This Guide
Before you use this guide, read this list of symbols, terms, and abbrevia-
tions, and make sure you know what they mean. A complete glossary of
terms is included at the end of this User’s Guide.
(➞2-12) A number preceded by an arrow and enclosed in
parentheses references a page number in this User’s
Guide which contains more information about the
topic of the previous sentence.
default A factory setting that remains in effect unless you
change it.
document A document is the original sheet(s) of paper you send,
receive, or copy on the facsimile.
menu A menu is a list of options or features from which
you select an item to set up or change. A menu has a
number and title which appear in the two-line dis-
play.
search buttons The search buttons (
) change the LCD display.
Press to display the next item or choice in a menu,
or press to display the previous item or choice.
transaction number When you send or receive a document, your fax au-
tomatically assigns the document a unique transac-
tion number. A transaction number is a four-digit
decimal number that will help you keep track of
documents you send and receive.
TX/RX NO. On the LCD display, TX/RX NO. is the abbreviation
used for transaction number.
RX Denotes receiving.
TX Denotes transmitting or sending.
A note describes helpful hints, restrictions, or how to avoid difficulties.
Chapter 2
Setting Up 2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTIONS SHOW YOU HOW TO AVOID CONDITIONS OR
INCORRECT OPERATIONS THAT COULD CAUSE DAMAGE TO
YOUR HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE OR CAUSE PERSONAL IN-
JURY.
This icon denotes feeding a document.
Where to Set Up the Fax
❏
❏
❏
Avoid direct sunlight. If you have to place the fax near a
window, install heavy curtains or blinds to protect the fax
from direct sunlight.
Choose a flat, stable surface free of vibration.
Avoid a location subject to extreme temperature fluctua-
tion. Use in a location within a temperature range of 50°F
to 90.5°F (10°C to 32.5°C).
90.5°F
50°F
❏
Do not set up the fax near a television, radio, or heavy
equipment like copy machines, air conditioners, comput-
ers, or large printers that can generate strong electromag-
netic fields. Large equipment can generate electronic noise
that can interfere with the operation of the fax.
2-4 Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❏
❏
❏
❏
Choose a location that is clean and free from dust and
moisture.
Do not use or store the fax outdoors.
Place the fax unit near a telephone line. You must have an
RJ11-C wall jack installed. If you need assistance, contact
your authorized Canon dealer or service representative,
or your local telephone company.
LINE
To avoid damage to the fax unit from overheating, do not
block the exhaust vent. Install the fax unit approximately
4 in. (10 cm) away from walls or other equipment.
Chapter 2
Setting Up 2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Space Around the Fax
To ensure proper ventilation and easy operation, set up the fax in an area
that meets the minimum requirements for clearance as illustrated below.
TO AVOID DAMAGE TO THE FAX UNIT FROM OVERHEATING,
DO NOT BLOCK THE EXHAUST VENT. INSTALL THE FAX UNIT
APPROXIMATELY 4 IN. (10CM) AWAY FROM WALLS OR OTHER
EQUIPMENT.
PAPER CASSETTE 2
(Standard with the
LASER CLASS®
20” (508 mm)
3175, optional for the
LASER CLASS®
28.1” (713 mm)
3170/3170MS.)
32.6” (828 mm)
HANDSET (option)
19.8” (501 mm)
22.5” (571 mm)
2-6 Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Requirements
❏
❏
❏
Place the fax near a standard 120 V AC power outlet. This
fax unit is intended for domestic use. Do not attempt to
use it outside the country where you purchased it.
Do not plug the power cord into an extension cord
connector or power strip shared with other plugs.
Do not plug the fax into a power outlet shared with an air
conditioner, personal computer, electric typewriter, copier,
or other equipment that generates electrical noise.
❏
❏
Check the plug frequently and make sure that it is firmly
plugged into the socket.
Do not plug the power cord into an uninterruptable
power supply (UPS).
Chapter 2
Setting Up 2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
General Precautions
❏
TO AVOID SERIOUS INJURY, NEVER DISASSEMBLE
THE FAX. EXPOSED POWER POINTS INSIDE THE
FAX CAN CAUSE ELECTRICAL SHOCK IF YOU
TOUCH THEM.
❏
❏
After you unplug the fax unit, always wait at least 5
seconds before you plug it in again. Always unplug before
you move the fax.
During electrical storms, disconnect the plug from the
power outlet. The fax can hold documents in the memory
for up to 12 hours.
❏
❏
Before you attach or remove the plug from the power
outlet, make sure your hands are dry.
Do not stack boxes or furniture around the power outlet.
Keep the area open so you can reach the outlet quickly. If
you notice anything unusual (smoke, strange odors,
noises) around the fax, turn the fax off immediately and
unplug it. Call for service.
2-8 Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❏
Before you transport the fax, remove the cartridge. To
protect the cartridge from bright light, cover it with its
original protective bag or a cloth.
❏
❏
Keep liquids, cleaners, and other solvents away from the
fax unit. Keep metal pins, paper clips, staples and other
objects away from the fax. If something falls into the fax
unit, remove the plug from the power outlet, and call for
service.
Do not set the fax unit, other equipment, or furniture on
the power cord. Never knot the power cord or wrap it
around another object.
❏
To avoid paper jams, never unplug the power cord, open
the printer cover or remove a paper cassette during
printing.
OFF
Chapter 2
Setting Up 2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Moving the Fax Unit
The fax unit is heavy. Be sure to follow these general guidelines when
lifting the fax to move it or to install Paper Cassette 2, etc.
❏
❏
Moving the fax unit requires two people.
When you lift the fax, hold it by the handles on the right
and left sides. Never try to lift the fax by gripping paper
cassettes by the front and back sides.
❏
Grip firmly the handles by the parts close to the back of
the fax unit as shown in the figure below, because the fax
unit is heavier at the back.
❏
❏
When you lift the fax, be sure not to tilt it forward because
the paper cassette may slide out of the fax unit.
Be sure to remove Paper Cassette 2, if installed, before
moving the fax and lift them separately.
2-10 Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unpacking: Have You Got Everything?
As you unpack the fax, save the carton and packing material in case you
want to move or ship the fax unit in the future. Ask someone to help you
remove all items from the box.
LIFTING THE FAX UNIT REQUIRES TWO PEOPLE. TO REMOVE
THE FAX UNIT FROM THE CARTON BOX, FOLLOW THE
GENERAL GUIDELINES AND ILLUSTRATION ON PAGE 2-10.
Remove the adhesive tapes on the top of the carton box.
1.
2.
Take out the document feeder tray, the accessory tray with the
document output tray, documentation, the upper output tray,
power cord and telephone line, and the FX6 Toner Cartridge in its
protective bag.
DOCUMENT
OUTPUT TRAY
DOCUMENTATION
DESTINATION LABELS
TRAY LABELS
DOCUMENT
FEEDER TRAY
CD-ROM (LASER CLASS® 3170MS only)
TELEPHONE LINE
POWER CORD
UPPER OUTPUT TRAY
ACCESSORYTRAY
(cardboard)
FX6 TONER
CARTRIDGE
Chapter 2
Setting Up 2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remove the four stoppers on the side of the box by squeezing the
center grip.
3.
4.
Lift and remove the upper carton. Remove the four styrene foam
blocks positioned on top of the fax unit. Then lift the fax unit by
gripping the handles on the right and left sides. (➞2-10)
FAX UNIT
2-12 Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Take out Paper Cassette 2 from its carton box.
5.
®
Paper Cassette 2 is optional for the LASER CLASS 3170/3170MS.
For the LASER CLASS® 3170 Series
Check each item against this list as you remove it from the box.
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
1 Fax machine
1 Document feeder tray
1 Document output tray
1 Upper output tray
1 Paper Cassette 1 (letter-, legal-, A4-size, 500-sheet capacity)
1 Power cord
1 Telephone line
2 Sheets of destination labels
1 Sheet of tray labels
1 Facsimile User’s Guide
1 Warranty registration
1 Limited warranty note
1 Installation completion card
1 FX6 Toner Cartridge
Chapter 2
Setting Up 2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For the LASER CLASS® 3175 Only
❏
1 Paper Cassette 2 (letter-, legal-, A4-, executive-, B5-size, 500-sheet
capacity)
For the LASER CLASS® 3170MS Only
❏
❏
❏
1 Printer User’s Guide
1 CD-ROM (Printer driver)
1 Sheet of End User Licence Agreement (PCL Board)
®
LASER CLASS 3170/3170MS
Paper Cassette 2
®
LASER CLASS 3175
Paper Cassette 2 is a standard feature for
®
®
the LASER CLASS 3175 and optional for
the LASER CLASS 3170/3170MS.
2-14 Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For the LASER CLASS® 3170 Series
UPPER OUTPUT
TRAY
DOCUMENT
OUTPUT
TRAY
DOCUMENT
FEEDER TRAY
FAX UNIT
(with Paper Cassette 1 installed)
FACSIMILE
USER'S GUIDE
DESTINATION
LABELS × 2
TELEPHONE
LINE
TRAY
LABELS × 1
FX6 TONER CARTRIDGE
POWER
CORD
For the LASER CLASS® 3175 Only
PAPER CASSETTE 2
For the LASER CLASS® 3170MS Only
PRINTER USER'S GUIDE
CD-ROM (Printer driver)
Chapter 2
Setting Up 2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Options Available
For the LASER CLASS® 3170 Series
❏
❏
❏
❏
HANDSET KIT L7
G3 FAX OPTION MEMORY VII (4 MB)
Verification Stamp Unit 1
Dual-line Upgrade Kit II
For the LASER CLASS® 3170/3170MS
❏
Paper Cassette 2 (PF-52) (letter-, legal-, A4-, executive-, B5-size, 500-
sheet capacity)
For the LASER CLASS® 3170/3175
❏
Printer Board I
For the LASER CLASS® 3170MS, or the LASER CLASS® 3170/
3175 with Printer Board I installed
(These are printer options. For details, refer to the Printer User’s Guide.)
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
RAM DIMM Module (4 MB)
RAM DIMM Module (8 MB)
RAM DIMM Module (16 MB)
Ethernet Board EB-52 FX
TM
Envelo®pe Feeder E®F-52
Adobe PostScript 3 Module I
Duplex Unit DU-52
Document Distribution System
Supply
❏
Canon FX6 Toner Cartridge
2-16 Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parts of the Fax
Take a few moments to look over the fax and become familiar with its
parts. (The illustrations below are those of the LASER CLASS 3170 with
the following options installed: handset kit, Dual-line Upgrade Kit,
Printer Board, and Paper Cassette 2.)
Front View
DOCUMENT FEEDER TRAY
DOCUMENT EXTENSION
Holds documents for scanning.
TRAY
Open to support long documents
during scanning.
DOCUMENT GUIDES
Adjust to the width of the
document.
DOCUMENT OUTPUT TRAY
Holds sent or copied documents.
ADF COVER
UPPER OUTPUT TRAY
Holds printed documents after they
are ejected from the fax.
Provides access to remove paper
jams and to clean the scanning
area.
LCD DISPLAY
Displays menu items and
messages.
PRINTER COVER
Covers the toner cartridge.
HANDSET (option)
Detachable handset.
LOWER OUTPUT TRAY
Holds printed documents after they
are ejected from the fax.
OPERATION PANEL
Use the operation panel buttons
to operate the LASER CLASS®
3170 Series.
PAPER GUIDES
Adjust to the width of
the paper.
MP TRAY
SPEAKER VOLUME
SWITCH
Adjusts the speaker’s volume.
Adjustable to letter, A4, and legal
paper sizes. Holds about 100
sheets of paper.
PAPER VOLUME
STATUS BARS
PAPER CASSETTE 1
Adjustable to letter, A4 and legal paper
sizes. Holds about 500 sheets of paper.
PAPER CASSETTE 2
Adjustable to letter, A4, legal, B5 and executive
paper sizes. Holds about 500 sheets of paper.
(Paper Cassette 2 is a standard feature for the
LASER CLASS® 3175, and optional for the LASER
CLASS® 3170/3170MS.)
IN USE/MEMORY LAMP
Blinks green when the fax is transmitting or
receiving documents.
Lights green when there are documents
stored in memory.
ERROR LAMP
Blinks red when a problem occurs.
Chapter 2
Setting Up 2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear View
EXTENSION PHONE JACK
Connect the optional handset jack or an
extension phone jack here.
FACE-UP TRAY
Holds printed documents
after they are ejected
from the fax.
TEST PRINT BUTTON
This button should only be used
by authorized Canon dealers.
Please do not press this button.
TELEPHONE LINE JACK (L)
POWER SOCKET
Connect the power
cord here.
Connect the telephone line here.
LIFTING HANDLE
Grip the fax here and on
the opposite side to lift the
fax unit.
PARALLEL INTERFACE
PORT
Connect a parallel interface cable.
(This port is a standard feature for
the LASER CLASS® 3170MS, and
available for the LASER CLASS®
3170/3175 after installation of the
optional PCL6 Printer Board.)
TELEPHONE LINE JACK (L2)
Connect an additional telephone
line here after installation of the
optional Dual-line Upgrade Kit for
the LASER CLASS® 3170 Series.
Handset (option)
RINGER VOLUME SWITCH
Adjust the volume of the ringer. Use a pen or
other pointed object to adjust the switch to
HIGH, LOW, or OFF.
OFF
LOW
HIGH
2-18 Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Shipping Material
All shipping materials must be removed. Shipping materials are at-
tached inside the fax unit and inside the paper cassette to protect delicate
parts from vibration during shipping.
Removing the Shipping Tapes
Remove all the shipping tapes from the unit.
Removing the Packing Materials Inside the Fax Unit
Gently lift the ADF cover and remove the styrene foam sheet from
1.
inside the feeder area.
Chapter 2
Setting Up 2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Close the ADF cover.
2.
3.
Open the printer cover and the MP tray.
Remove the tapes and packing materials.
4.
2-20 Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Close the printer cover and the MP tray.
5.
• Save all the packing materials. You may want to insert them again if
you have to transport the fax unit.
• When removing the packing materials from inside the printer area, be
careful not to touch the transfer charging roller. Otherwise, the print
quality may deteriorate.
Removing the Packing Materials from Paper Cassette 1
Pull out the Paper Cassette 1 and remove it from the fax unit.
1.
Set Paper Cassette 1 down on a flat, stable surface.
2.
3.
If tapes are attached to the paper cassette, remove them. Then
remove the white spacers under the paper guide clips by first
pressing down on the bottom metal plate with one hand and then
sliding the white spacers inwards with the other hand.
1
2
Insert Paper Cassette 1 in the fax unit. (➞ 2-37)
4.
Chapter 2
Setting Up 2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Protective Plastic Sheet
The LCD on the operation panel is covered with a plastic sheet to protect
it during shipping. This protective material should be removed before
you use the fax unit.
2-22 Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Assembling the Fax
Follow the instructions in this section to assemble the fax and prepare it
for full operation.
Installing the Toner Cartridge
Install only a Canon FX6 Toner Cartridge in your fax machine.
INSTALLING ANY OTHER TYPE OF CARTRIDGE IN THIS FAX
UNIT COULD DAMAGE THE FAX UNIT AND VOID YOUR WAR-
RANTY. LEAVE THE TONER CARTRIDGE IN ITS PROTECTIVE
BAG UNTIL YOU ARE READY TO INSTALL THE CARTRIDGE.
HANDLE THE TONER CARTRIDGE CAREFULLY. (➞15-22)
Open the printer cover.
1.
2.
Remove the toner cartridge from its protective bag.
Save the protective bag. You can use it later to cover the cartridge
if you have to remove it from the fax machine.
Chapter 2
Setting Up 2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Save the protective bag and all other shipping material. You will need
this material later when you dispose of the cartridge after it has run out
of toner. (➞15-18)
Hold the cartridge by the ends and rock it gently five or six times
3.
to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge.
Place the new cartridge on a stable, flat, clean surface, and snap
the tab to detach it from the cartridge.
4.
As you steady the cartridge with one hand, remove the seal by
gently pulling the plastic tab with your other hand. Use a firm,
even pull to avoid breaking the seal.
5.
PULL STRAIGHT OUT
• Do not pull the tab upwards or downwards; the tape may break.
• If the tab breaks off from the tape, pull the tape out by pulling on the
end of the tape where the tab was originally attached.
• Wash off any toner from your hands or clothing immediately with cold
water.
2-24 Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To avoid pinching your fingers between the toner cartridge and
fax unit, grip the cartridge as shown below.
6.
7.
KEEP THE DRUM SLOT FREE
OF DUST AND OTHER
FOREIGN OBJECTS.
DO NOT TOUCH THE
PROTECTIVE SHUTTER ON
THE BOTTOM OF CARTRIDGE.
Load the cartridge in the direction indicated by the arrow. Gently
slide the cartridge into the printer area until it is down inside the
fax unit and level.
Shut the printer cover.
8.
❏
The fax unit will not operate if the printer cover is not closed
completely.
CHECK PRINTER COVER
If you see the message above and the Error lamp blinks red
when the fax unit is plugged in (➞2-41), open the cover again
and make sure the toner cartridge is level. Then shut the
printer cover again.
Chapter 2
Setting Up 2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Attaching the Document Output Tray and the Upper Out-
put Tray
Attach the upper output tray to the front of the fax unit.
Slide the end of the upper output tray down into the fax unit at an
incline, lifting the end nearest you.
1.
UPPER
OUTPUT TRAY
• Do not use the fax without first attaching the upper output tray
correctly. A paper jam may occur.
• When removing the upper output tray, lift the end nearest you slightly
and pull the tray forward.
Attach the document output tray to the front of the fax unit, just
2.
above the upper output tray.
DOCUMENT
OUTPUT TRAY
EXTENDED LIP
2-26 Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Make sure the knobs on each side of the tray fit into the holes on the side of
the fax unit. Back of the tray sits on top of the extended lip of the fax unit.
Attaching the Document Feeder Tray
Slide one side in position first and then the other side.
2
1
❏
Attach the supplied tray labels as shown in the illustration below. We
also recommend attaching the tray labels onto the upper and lower
output trays according to the settings you make on the SELECT
OUTPT TRAY menu to classify the outputs. (➞2-52) You can use the
blank labels to meet your specific needs.
Chapter 2
Setting Up 2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing Paper Cassette 2 (For the LASER CLASS® 3175
Only)
®
Paper Cassette 2 is standard for the LASER CLASS 3175, and optional
®
for the LASER CLASS 3170/3170MS.
Remove the tape at the front of Paper Cassette 2.
1.
Pull out the paper cassette.
2.
If tapes are attached to the paper cassette, remove them. Then
remove the spacers under the paper guide clips by first pressing
down on the bottom metal plate with one hand and then sliding
the white spacers inwards with the other hand.
3.
1
2
2-28 Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remove the tapes and packings at the rear of the paper cassette.
4.
5.
2
2
1
If a spacer is attached, remove it from the paper cassette while
pressing the bottom plate.
1
2
Replace the cassette into Paper Cassette 2 and place it in the
location you wish to use the fax after the cassette has been
installed.
6.
You will need to move the fax unit if you want to use it in the same
location it now occupies.
Chapter 2
Setting Up 2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lift up the fax unit and hold it over Paper Cassette 2.
7.
LIFTING THE FAX UNIT REQUIRES TWO PEOPLE. TO MOUNT
THE FAX UNIT ONTO PAPER CASSETTE 2, FOLLOW THE
GENERAL GUIDELINES AND ILLUSTRATION ON PAGE 2-10.
ALWAYS LIFT THE FAX UNIT BY THE LIFTING HANDLES AT THE
BOTTOM, TO AVOID TRAPPING YOUR FINGERS BETWEEN THE
FAX UNIT AND PAPER CASSETTE 2.
WHENEVER YOU MOVE THE FAX, BE SURE TO LIFT THE FAX
UNIT AND PAPER CASSETTE 2 SEPARATELY. DO NOT TRY TO
LIFT THEM TOGETHER.
If the fax unit is heavy to lift, remove Paper Cassette 1 and toner
cartridge before placing it on Paper Cassette 2.
Make sure the front of the fax unit is facing the same direction as
the front of Paper Cassette 2. Slowly lower the fax unit onto the
four positioning poles on the corners of Paper Cassette 2.
8.
2-30 Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading Paper in Paper Cassettes 1 and 2
Before you load paper, follow these general guidelines:
❏
The paper cassettes can be adjusted to hold various sizes of paper.
Paper Cassette 1 holds letter-, legal- or A4-size paper, and Paper
Cassette 2 holds letter-, legal-, A4-, executive- or B5-size paper.
You can load executive- or B5-size paper in Paper Cassette 2 only when
you use it for the printer function. When you use it as a paper supply for
fax, you can load letter-, legal- or A4-size paper only.
❏
❏
❏
For high-quality printings, we recommend using Canon standard 17-
2
24 lb.(64-90g/m ) weight paper.
Use of print media not meeting the paper’s requirements may cause
severe paper jams or result in excessive mechanical wear of the fax.
Do not use the following paper in the paper cassettes:
– Moist paper
– Paper that is wavy, curled or damaged
– Folded, clipped or stapled paper
– Paper containing materials that melt, vaporize, offset, discolor or
emit dangerous fumes at a temperature of 374°F (190°C) or higher
❏
❏
To avoid paper curling, do not open paper packs until you are ready
to load the paper in the fax unit. Store unused paper from opened
packs in a cool, dry location.
Let the paper run out before you refill the paper cassettes. Avoid
mixing new paper with paper remaining in the paper cassettes.
• Do not load different sizes of paper in the paper cassettes at the same
time.
• If a printed page comes out of the fax all curled up, you can correct the
problem by turning over the paper stack in the paper cassettes so that
the bottom sheet in the stack is now at the top.
• If the leading edge of the paper is curled, straighten it out as much as
possible before loading it into the paper cassettes.
• Do not set the paper-size guides so tight that the paper stack bends.
• Do not set the paper-size guides so loose that the paper stack is not
evenly aligned.
• Do not set the paper-size guides so loose that there is room between
the guides and the paper.
Chapter 2
Setting Up 2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pull out the paper cassettes from the fax unit.
1.
2.
Check if the selectors inside the paper cassettes are set for the size
of the paper you are loading.
If the setting is correct, go on to step 3.
-if not-
Set the paper cassettes to fit the sizes of the paper you are loading.
To change the paper size for Paper Cassette 1
Adjust the paper size side guides in the following way:
SIZE SIDE
GUIDES
STOPPER
TAB
STOPPER
2
1
1
2
TAB
WHEN YOU SET TO A4 SIZE.
WHEN YOU SET TO LETTER OR LEGAL SIZE.
❏
❏
To select A4 size, push the tabs jutting out from the edge of
the cassette inwards and slide the stopper downwards to lock
the guides in position.
To select letter and legal size, slide the stopper up and push
the size side guides outwards.
2-32 Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lift the stopper in the center of the paper size rear guide slightly,
and slide it to the mark indicating the desired paper size.
LGL
A4
LTR
WHEN YOU SET TO LETTER SIZE.
To change the paper size for Paper Cassette 2
To adjust the paper size side guides, release them by pinching the
stopper on the left guide and slide them inwards or outwards
according to the paper size you are loading.
1
2
Chapter 2
Setting Up 2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Push up the stopper of the paper size rear guide, and slide it to
the mark indicating the desired paper size.
WHEN YOU SET TO A4 SIZE.
You can load executive- or B5-size paper in Paper Cassette 2 only when
you use it for the printer function. When you use it as a paper supply for
fax, you can load letter-, legal- or A4-size paper only.
Turn the dial on the right-front side of the cassette and adjust it to
the size of paper you are loading.
B
5
C
U
S
T
O
M
L
G
L
• Make sure the mark on the paper size setting dial corresponds with the
size of the installed paper, otherwise a paper jam may occur.
• Do not set the paper size dial on this unit to CUSTOM. This setting is
not supported by this fax.
2-34 Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before you load a stack of paper into the paper cassettes, tap the
leading edge of the paper stack on a flat surface so that the edges
are evenly aligned.
3.
4.
Place the stack of paper in the paper cassettes with the print side
facing down. Insert the stack of paper so that it fits neatly to the
back of the paper cassettes.
When loading 500 sheets into the paper cassettes, divide the stack in two
evenly-sized stacks, then load each stack separately.
Chapter 2
Setting Up 2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press down on the front of the paper stack to make sure the
corners are below the paper size guide clips. Then press the stack
down again to make sure it is below the paper limit marks on the
side of the paper cassettes and the paper size guides hook at the
back of the cassettes.
5.
6.
PAPER LIMIT
MARKS
Press the paper stack down to make sure it has a clearance of
approximately 0.04 in. (1 mm) from the hook of the paper size rear
guide.
2-36 Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reinsert the cassette into the fax unit: Align the cassette with the
rails on the fax unit, then lift slightly to insert the cassette. Slide it
all the way into the fax unit.
7.
Make sure you insert the cassette all the way into the fax unit until it
locks into place.
❏
The paper volume status bars on the paper cassettes indicate the
level of the current paper supply. When you see the paper volume
status bar drop, make sure you have a supply of paper on hand to fill
the cassettes. When you see the SUPPLY REC. PAPER message on
the LCD display, re-fill the cassettes.
PAPER VOLUME
STATUS BAR
Chapter 2
Setting Up 2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the Handset (option)
A telephone handset is available as an option for the fax machine.
®
This handset is for use with Canon LASER CLASS 3170 Series only.
Attach the handset cradle holder to the back of the cradle with the
screws provided.
1.
TOP
BOTTOM
Fit the handset cradle holder over the holes on the fax unit.
Screw the handset cradle holder on the fax unit.
2.
3.
2-38 Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connect the end of the handset connector cord to the extension
4.
5.
phone jack marked with the handset icon (
).
Place the handset on the handset cradle.
Connecting the Telephone Line
Make sure you have an RJ11-C wall jack. If you need assistance,
1.
2.
contact your dealer or telephone company.
Connect one end of the supplied telephone line to the fax jack
marked
.
Chapter 2
Setting Up 2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connect the other end of the telephone line to your wall telephone
jack.
3.
If you have installed the optional Dual-line Upgrade Kit, you can
connect another telephone line to the fax unit. (➞2-54)
Connecting an Extension Phone
To connect an extension phone to the fax, you have to use the extension
phone jack.
Only one jack is provided to be used with the optional handset or an
extension phone. A separate jack is not provided for an extension phone.
Connect the extension phone cord to the extension phone jack
marked with the handset icon (
).
2-40 Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning on the Power
Connect the power cord to the power socket on the rear of the fax
1.
unit.
Connect the other end of the power cord to the power source.
THE FAX MUST BE CONNECTED TO A PROPERLY GROUNDED,
THREE-PRONG 120 V AC OUTLET.
2.
After you connect the power cord to the power source, the fax
LCD display will light. There is no power switch on the fax unit.
It will take a few seconds for the unit to warm up.
PLEASE WAIT
The unit has warmed up and is ready to use when you see the
date and time display.
12/31/1999 FRI 12:20
When the date is displayed on the LCD, the fax is in the standby
mode and ready for normal operation. If the Error lamp starts
blinking red, wait for one of the following messages to appear.
Chapter 2
Setting Up 2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALL CARTRIDGE You have not yet installed the toner
cartridge. Install the FX6 toner
cartridge. (➞2-23)
REPLACE CARTRIDGE The toner cartridge has run out of
toner. Replace the toner cartridge.
CHECK PRINTER COVER The printer cover is not closed com-
pletely. If it does not close easily, do
not force it. Remove the toner car-
tridge, and insert it again. Make sure it
is sitting level inside the fax machine
then close the printer cover again.
SUPPLY REC. PAPER
At least one of the paper cassettes is
empty or not seated correctly inside
the fax machine. Remove each
cassette. Make sure the stacks of paper
are below the tabs and insert the
paper cassettes in again. Push the
paper cassettes all the way in until
they lock in place.
2-42 Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the MP Tray
The MP (multi-purpose) tray can hold letter-, legal- or A4-size paper. The
2
capacity is approximately 100 sheets of cut-sheet paper (80 g/m or 21
lbs.). To use the MP tray as one of the input trays, you need to set USE
MP TRAY to ON in the FAX’S PRINTER SET menu. (➞2-48)
®
To use the MP tray with the LASER CLASS 3170MS or the LASER
®
CLASS 3170/3175 with the Printer Board I installed, follow the guide-
lines below. Otherwise, the paper-size-matching error occurs and the
message “CHECK PAPER SIZE” appears on the display.
❏
Even when you use the MP tray for the fax function, it is necessary to
set the same paper size on the printer menus as on the fax menus.
For details about setting the paper size of the MP tray on the printer
menus, refer to “Printing from the Multi-Purpose Tray” in the Printer
User’s Guide.
❏
If you use the MP tray for the printer function and load paper of
sizes other than letter, legal or A4, it is necessary to set USE MP
TRAY to OFF on the FAX’S PRINTER SET menu. (➞2-49)
The sizes and kinds of print media you can set on the MP tray differ
when you use it as an input tray for the printer function. For details on
the print media specifications for the printer function, refer to the “Print
Media Specifications” section in Appendix 4 of the Printer User’s Guide.
When not in use, the tray can fold up into the fax unit.
Loading the MP Tray
Before you load the paper, follow these general guidelines:
❏
❏
❏
For high-quality printings, we recommend using Canon standard 17-
2
24 lb.(64-90g/m ) weight paper.
Use of print media not meeting the paper’s requirements may cause
severe paper jams or result in excessive mechanical wear of the fax.
Do not use the following paper in the MP tray:
– Moist paper
– Paper that is wavy, curled or damaged
– Folded, clipped or stapled paper
– Paper with cut-outs or perforations (not recommended)
– Paper containing materials that melt, vaporize, offset, discolor or
emit dangerous fumes at a temperature of 374°F (190°C) or higher
Chapter 2
Setting Up 2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Avoid pressing or applying excessive force on the MP tray as this may
cause damage.
• The paper stack must not exceed the paper limit mark.
• Do not load different sizes of paper on the MP tray at the same time.
• Do not add paper to the MP tray if paper is already loaded; incorrect
paper feed or a paper jam may occur. Only add paper when the MP
tray is empty.
• If a printed page comes out of the fax all curled up, you can correct the
problem by turning over the paper stack in the MP tray so that the
bottom sheet in the stack is now at the top.
• If the leading edge of the paper is curled, straighten it out as much as
possible before loading it into the tray.
• Do not set the paper guides so tight that the
paper stack bends.
• Do not set the paper guides so loose that the
paper stack is not evenly aligned.
• Do not set the paper guides so loose that there
is room between the guides and the paper.
• Do not place the paper into the tray at an angle.
• Do not load fanned out paper.
Make sure the edges of the paper stack are
evenly aligned when loading.
2-44 Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pull the MP tray out using the handle on the panel.
Pull out the extension tray using the center grip.
1.
2.
The MP tray holds approximately 100 sheets of paper. Before you
load paper on the MP tray, tap the edges of the stack to make sure
the leading edge and sides of the stack are even.
3.
Chapter 2
Setting Up 2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insert the paper stack as far as it will go into the fax unit, with the
print side facing up and the top of the paper going into the fax
unit first. Then adjust the paper guides to the size of the paper.
4.
PAPER SENSOR
PAPER-FEED
ROLLER
• Make sure that the leading edge of the paper is inserted all the way
into the MP tray so that it is below the paper-feed roller. The paper
sensor for the MP tray is located to the left of the paper feed roller,
when viewed from the front of the fax unit. Please note the following
points when loading small-size paper in the MP tray. (If the paper is
not loaded correctly, the paper will not be detected by the fax and a
message will appear asking you to load paper in the MP tray.)
• Make sure that the paper stack is not higher than the load-limit marks
(
) on the paper guides.
LOAD-LIMIT
MARK
2-46 Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Make sure that the paper guides are set correctly. To print with the MP
tray, you also need to select the paper size in the USE MP TRAY menu.
(➞2-48)
• Make sure that the paper is loaded correctly and that the leading edge
is fully inserted into the fax unit.
• Make sure that the paper sensor is resting on top of the paper. (The
paper sensor must rest on top of the paper, not just touch the edge of
the paper.)
PAPER SENSOR
ACCEPTABLE
NOT ACCEPTABLE
• To avoid damaging the MP tray, close it when not in use. Remove and
store any remaining print media. Slide the extension tray in before
closing the MP tray.
Chapter 2
Setting Up 2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning on and off USE MP TRAY and Setting the Paper
Size in thTeo UusSe tEheMMPPtrTayRaAs oYneMofetnheuinput trays, you need to select ON for
USE MP TRAY in the FAX’S PRINTER SET menu.
®
Also, to use the MP tray for the fax function with the LASER CLASS
installed, it is necessary to set®the same paper size on the printer menus
3170MS or the LASER CLASS 3170/3175 with the Printer Board I
as on the fax menus. For details about setting the paper size of the MP
tray on the printer menus, refer to “Printing from the Multi-Purpose
Tray” in the Printer User’s Guide.
Follow this procedure to turn on and off USE MP TRAY and to select the
paper size in the fax menus.
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
1.
Data Registration.
Data
Registration
REGISTRATION
1. DATA REGISTRATION
Set
Press Set.
2.
3.
4.
DATA REGISTRATION
1. USER SETTINGS
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
DATA REGISTRATION
5. FAX’S PRINTER SET
Set
Press Set.
FAX’S PRINTER SET
1. USE MP TRAY
2-48 Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set
Press Set.
5.
6.
USE MP TRAY
OFF
Press the search buttons to display ON.
USE MP TRAY
ON
If you use the MP tray for the printer function and load paper of sizes
other than letter, legal or A4, it is necessary to set USE MP TRAY to OFF
on the FAX’S PRINTER SET menu.
Set
Press Set.
7.
SET MP TRAY SIZE
LTR
Press the search buttons to select the paper size you are loading
onto the MP tray.
8.
SET MP TRAY SIZE
A4
Set
Press Set.
9.
FAX’S PRINTER SET
2. # OF RX COPIES
Stop
Press Stop to return to standby.
10.
Chapter 2
Setting Up 2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting Paper Delivery
The fax machine has three output trays: an upper output tray, a lower
output tray, and a face-up tray.
The paper delivery method used by the fax is determined by whether the
face-up tray is open or closed, and by the settings you make in the FAX’S
PRINTER SET menu.
Setting Face-down Paper Delivery for Upper and Lower
Output Trays
UPPER OUTPUT
TRAY
LOWER OUTPUT
TRAY
When the face-up tray is open, the fax will automatically select face-up
delivery. To select face-down delivery, make sure the face-up tray is
closed. If the extension of the face-up tray is extended, be sure to push it
back into the tray before closing.
You can also designate an output tray for each function (FAX, COPY,
REPORT, and PRINTER). Follow the procedure described below.
If no setting is made for face-down delivery, and the face-up tray is
closed, the paper is first delivered to the lower output tray. When the
paper full sensor detects the tray is full, the paper delivery switches
automatically to the upper output tray. The lower output tray can hold
approximately 200 sheets, and the upper output tray approximately 100
sheets.
2-50 Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Open the FAX’S PRINTER SET menu.
1.
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
Data Registration.
Data
Registration
REGISTRATION
1. DATA REGISTRATION
Set
Press Set.
DATA REGISTRATION
1. USER SETTINGS
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
DATA REGISTRATION
5. FAX’S PRINTER SET
Set
Press Set.
FAX’S PRINTER SET
1. USE MP TRAY
Open the SELECT OUTPT TRAY menu.
2.
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
FAX’S PRINTER SET
7.SELECT OUTPT TRAY
Set
Press Set.
SELECT OUTPT TRAY
OFF
Press the search buttons to select ON.
SELECT OUTPT TRAY
ON
Chapter 2
Setting Up 2-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set
Set
Press Set.
Press Set.
SELECT OUTPT TRAY
1.FAX
FAX
LOWER OUTPUT TRAY
Press the search buttons to select either the lower or upper output
tray when receiving documents by fax.
3.
4.
FAX
UPPER OUTPUT TRAY
Set
Press Set.
SELECT OUTPT TRAY
2. COPY
Select a tray for each function in the same way.
®
Example 1: For the LASER CLASS 3170/3175
FAX
UPPER OUTPUT TRAY
COPY
UPPER OUTPUT TRAY
REPORT LOWER OUTPUT TRAY
®
Example 2: For the LASER CLASS 3170MS, or for the LASER
®
CLASS 3170/3175 with the Printer Board I installed
FAX
UPPER OUTPUT TRAY
UPPER OUTPUT TRAY
COPY
REPORT UPPER OUTPUT TRAY
PRINTER LOWER OUTPUT TRAY
the LASER CLASS 3175, it is recommended to designate one®tray for
•If you have installed the Printer Board I to the LASER CLASS 3170 or
the fax function an®d the other tray for the printer function.
•Use the supplied tray labels to indicate the type of output designated
for delivery to the upper and lower output trays. (➞2-27)
2-52 Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set
Press Set.
Stop
Press Stop to return to standby.
5.
•If the full paper sensor detects that the tray is full when the output tray
settings are input, the fax stops printing. If the fax is receiving
documents, they are stored in memory and the messages RECEIVED IN
MEMORY and OUTPUT TRAY FULL appear alternately on the display.
•Once you have picked up the printed paper from the output trays, do
not replace them onto the trays. It may cause paper jam.
Using the Face-up Tray
To select face-up delivery, pull down the face-up tray. The fax machine
will automatically switch to face-up delivery. The face-up tray is
particularly useful for heavier paper.
To open the face-up tray, take hold of its tab and pull down the tray.
Then grasp the end of the face-up tray and push it with your thumb to
unlock the extension tray and pull it out until it is fully extended.
TAB
1
2
EXTENSION TRAY
Chapter 2
Setting Up 2-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Optional Dual-Line
The optional Dual-line Upgrade Kit, allows you to connect one more
telephone line to the fax unit at the same time. This section describes
how to connect the telephone lines to the Dual-line Upgrade Kit and set
up the fax unit.
Connecting Two Telephone Lines
The Dual-line Upgrade Kit must be installed inside the fax unit by a
qualified service technician. For details, contact a local authorized Canon
dealer.
Note the following features regarding the installation of the Dual-line
Upgrade Kit:
❏
When either the Dual-line Upgrade Kit or the PCL6 Printer Board is
installed in the fax unit, the energy saver feature cannot be used.
(➞3-21)
❏
With the Dual-line Upgrade Kit installed, if you have installed the
optional handset you will not be able to use it for voice telephone
communication on Line 2.
Make sure you have two RJ11-C wall jacks. If you need assistance,
1.
2.
contact your dealer or telephone company.
Locate the telephone line jacks on the right side ( ) and the back
side (
) of the fax unit. The jack marked
is for Line 1 and the
jack marked
is for Line 2.
2-54 Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connect one end of Line 1 to the
jack and connect one end of
3.
Line 2 to the
jack.
Telephone jack marked
for Line 1 connection
Telephone jack marked
for Line 2 connection
Connect the other end of the two telephone lines to the wall
telephone jacks.
4.
Chapter 2
Setting Up 2-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How the Two Telephone Lines Operate
The fax unit uses the two telephone lines in different ways.
❏
Line 1, connected to the telephone jack (on the right side of the fax
unit) marked
the fax unit.
, can be used for all communications provided by
❏
Line 2, connected to the telephone jack (on the rear of the fax unit)
marked
, cannot be used for the following features:
See
Disabled Feature
Description
Page
MANUAL SENDING
Sending documents manually
(6-17)
MANUAL RECEIVING Receiving documents manually
(7-7)
TALK
Voice telephone communication (12-2)
(16-14)
MAN/AUTO SWITCH
Sets the ring time before the fax
switches automatically to the
document receive mode while in
the manual receive mode
REMOTE RX
Changing the remote receive ID
(7-9,
16-14)
❏
❏
❏
You can select either telephone line for priority reception, and you
can also select which line is to be used for priority sending when
both lines are open.
When Line 1 is busy receiving a document transmission, even if Line
2 is open you cannot send or receive another document transmission
manually.
Even if another party calls you on Line 2, you will not be able to
receive the telephone call for voice communication.
2-56 Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Registering the Telephone Numbers for the Lines
The telephone numbers that you register with the procedure below will
appear in the display of the other party's fax unit during document
transmissions and appear in printed reports and lists.
Follow this procedure to register telephone numbers for both lines
connected to the Dual-line Upgrade Kit.
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
1.
Data Registration.
REGISTRATION
Data
Registration
1.DATA REGISTRATION
Set
Press Set.
2.
3.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
DATA REGISTRATION
8.DUAL LINE OPTIONS
After the Dual-line Upgrade Kit is installed, this item is added to the
DATA REGISTRATION menu.
Set
Set
Press Set.
4.
DUAL LINE OPTIONS
1.2nd LINE TEL #
Press Set.
5.
2nd LINE TEL #
TEL =
Chapter 2
Setting Up 2-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABC
DEF
Use these buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the telephone
number for Line 2.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
Data entry buttons
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
0-9
Enters a number.
OPER
0
Space
Delete
Enters a space (spaces are optional).
Tone
Deletes the rightmost digit of the number you are
entering so you can enter a new digit.
Clear
Clears the entire entry if you want to start again.
You can register a number of up to 20 digits.
Set
After you enter the telephone number for Line 2, press Set.
6.
2nd LINE TEL #
DATA ENTRY OK
DUAL LINE OPTIONS
2.2nd LINE TYPE
Set
Press Set.
7.
8.
2nd LINE TYPE
TOUCH TONE
Use the search buttons to alternate the settings and display the
setting that you need.
2nd LINE TYPE
TOUCH TONE
2nd LINE TYPE
ROTARY PULSE
The fax unit is set to operate through a tone line without making
any adjustments.
2-58 Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set
Set
Press Set.
Press Set.
9.
DUAL LINE OPTIONS
3.TX LINE PRIORITY
10.
TX LINE PRIORITY
LINE1 TX PRIORITY
The fax unit is set to operate with the first setting (LINE1 TX
PRIORITY) without making any adjustments.
Press the search buttons until you see the setting you need.
11.
12.
LINE1 TX PRIORITY When both lines are open, transmission is
sent on Line 1. If Line 1 is busy and Line 2
is open, transmission is sent on Line 2.
LINE2 TX PRIORITY When both lines are open, transmission is
sent on Line 2. If Line 2 is busy and Line 1
is open, transmission is sent on Line 1.
LINE1 TX PROHIBIT Even if both lines are open, transmission
is sent on Line 2. Line 1 is only available
for receiving.
LINE2 TX PROHIBIT Even if both lines are open, transmission
is sent on Line 1. Line 2 is only available
for receiving.
Set
Press Set then press Stop to return to standby.
Stop
Chapter 2
Setting Up 2-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-60 Setting Up
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3
Getting Started
This chapter describes some important settings that you should perform
before you use the fax.
Regarding the settings needed to use the fax as a printer, refer to the
®
Printer User’s Guide. To use the LASER CLASS 3170/3175 as a printer,
the PCL6 Printer Board needs to be installed.
Before you use the fax you should set the correct date and time, register
the fax unit telephone number, and register the unit name (your personal
name or a company name). If these tasks have been done for you, then
you may want to enter your own sender name. (➞3-18)
First, we will describe the operation panel buttons and give a brief
introduction to the basic procedures for browsing through the menus
and finding the items you want. Then we will guide you step by step
through the basic procedures that must be performed before you use the
fax for the first time.
❏ Operation Buttons (One-touch panels closed)...................................... 3-2
❏ Operation Buttons (One-touch panels open) ........................................ 3-4
❏ Using the Menus and Buttons................................................................. 3-5
• General Guidelines for Registering Information ............................ 3-5
• Using the Menus ................................................................................. 3-5
• Entering Names for Registration ...................................................... 3-7
• Menu Button Summary Table............................................................ 3-9
❏ Checking and Setting the Telephone Line ........................................... 3-10
❏ Registering Required Sender Information .......................................... 3-12
• What is Sender Information? ........................................................... 3-12
❏ Registering the Sender Information (TX TERMINAL ID) ................ 3-13
❏ Registering Sender Names .................................................................... 3-18
• Registering a Sender Name ............................................................. 3-18
• Changing or Erasing a Sender Name ............................................. 3-20
❏ Using the Energy Saver Mode
®
(For the LASER CLASS 3170/3175 Only) .......................................... 3-21
• Turning the Energy Saver Feature ON ........................................... 3-21
• Returning to the Full Power Mode ................................................. 3-23
Chapter 3
Getting Started 3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation Buttons (One-touch panels closed
)
LCD Display
Displays messages and prompts during operation. Displays
selections, text, numbers and names when registering
information.
Change
Energy
Cartridge
Saver
Rec. Paper
Change Cartridge
Lights when toner in the toner cartridge runs low. Replace the
toner cartridge.
On Line
Go
Job
Alarm
Menu
PRT. Message
Rec. Paper
Lights when the paper cassettes run out of paper. Re-fill the
cassettes with paper.
Shift
Item
Value Enter/Cancel
Printer Operation Panel
Used for printer function.
For details, refer to the Printer User’s Guide.
Ultra Fine
Super Fine
Fine
Darker
Direct TX
Standard
Lighter
Text
Text / Photo
Manual RX
Resolution
Sets the resolution for documents you send.
Standard
Contrast
Resolution
Contrast Document Type
Adjusts the lightness/darkness of documents you send or copy.
Document Type
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
10
15
20
25
Adjusts quality for documents with only text or with both photos
and text.
One-Touch Speed Dialing Buttons
Dial numbers registered under One-touch Speed Dialing
buttons.
11
16
21
12
17
22
13
18
23
14
19
24
One-Touch Speed Dialing Panels
The first panel displays buttons 1-25. Open the first panel to
access buttons 26-50. Open the second panel to access
buttons 51-72. Open the third panel to access the registration
buttons.
Program Transaction Delete File
Set
Program
Registers multi-step setting normally done by pressing buttons
on the operation panel so you can do them at the press of
single button.
Pause Coded Dial Redial
Hook
Clear
Directory
Copy
Transaction
Displays information about previous sending and receiving
transactions.
P
ABC
JKL
DEF
MNO
WXY
Delete File
Deletes documents waiting in memory for sending.
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
Stop
Pause
Start/Scan
Enters pauses between digits or after the entire phone number
when dialing or registering facsimile numbers.
PRS
TUV
OPER
Numeric Keypad
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter phone
numbers when dialing. These buttons also enter text, numbers,
and symbols when registering names and numbers.
SYMBOLS
In Use/
Memory
Error
Tone
Tone
Connects to information services that accept tone dialing only,
even if you are using a rotary pulse.
3-2 Getting Started
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Energy Saver
Switches the fax out of the energy saver mode.
PRT. Message
Switches the LCD display between the fax messages and the
printer messages.
Manual RX
Switches the fax between the auto and manual receive mode.
Direct TX
Sets the fax in the direct sending mode so you can send a document ahead of other
documents stored in the fax memory. Direct sending scans a document and sends it
immediately without storing the document in the memory.
Set
Selects a menu item during data registration.
Directory
Allows you to search for fax/telephone numbers by the name
under which they are registered for speed dialing and then use
the number for dialing.
Search buttons for directory dialing.
Coded Dial
A press on the button followed by a three-digit code dials the telephone number
registered for Coded Speed Dialing under that three-digit code.
Redial
Redials the previous number dialed manually with the buttons on the numeric keypad.
Hook
Allows you to dial, even with the handset still in the handset rest.
Copy
Copies a document.
Clear
Clears an entire entry during information registration.
Error
Blinks red when paper jam occurs or the fax is running
out of paper or toner. The problem is described by a
message in the LCD display above.
Stop
Cancels sending, receiving, data registration, and other
operations and returns the fax to the standby mode.
In Use/Memory
Blinks green when the fax is using the telephone line.
Lights green when there are documents in the memory.
Start/Scan
Starts sending, receiving, copying and other operations.
Chapter 3
Getting Started 3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation Buttons (One-touch panels open)
+
Press + to enter a plus sign in a fax number.
Data
Delayed
Confidential
Mailbox
Relay
Polling
Registration Transmission
Broadcast
Pin Code
Displays the PIN code message so you can enter
the PIN code for dialing through a PBX.
Memory
Memory
Memory Box
Stamp(Option)
Pin Code
Reception
Transfer
Reference
Report
TTI Selector
Enters a registered sender's name to appear at the
top of the document you are sending.
Subaddress
Allows you to enter an ITU-T subaddress so you
can send a document with a subaddress.
Space
Password
Allows you to enter an ITU-T password so you can
send a document with a password.
TTI Selector Subaddress
Password
Delete
Search buttons
Scrolls the display so you can see other options
and selections in the menus during data
registration.
f e Cursor buttons
Moves the cursor left or right during data
registration.
Space
Enters a space between letters and numbers on
the LCD display when you are registering
information.
Delete
During a step when you are registering or entering
a number, press this button to delete the number.
(This button deletes number entries only.)
Data Registration
Starts data registration for speed dialing, sender information, and
other important settings for sending and receiving.
Memory Reception
Switches the fax in and out of the memory lock mode. In the
memory lock mode, the fax stores all documents it receives in
the memory.
Delayed Transmission
Sets a time for delayed sending.
Transfer
Switches the fax in and out of transfer mode. In the transfer mode
the fax unit sends all documents it receives to another fax
machine at your home or another office.
Polling
Sets a document for polling sending, and also used for polling
receiving.
Memory Reference
Performs operations with documents currently stored in the
memory, including printing a list of documents, printing a
document, sending a document to another destination, or
deleting a document.
Confidential Mailbox
Sets a document for sending to a confidential mailbox so you can
print documents received in the mailbox.
Relay Broadcast
Sets a document to be sent to another fax for relay sending.
Report
Prints reports about information registered in the fax.
Memory Box
Stamp(Option)
Sets a document to be stored in a memory box, or opens a
memory box so you can print documents received in the memory
box.
Switches the fax in and out of the stamp mode. In the stamp
mode, the fax marks all documents scanned for sending in
memory mode or direct sending mode. If you want to use the
stamp feature, call your authorized Canon dealer and request
installation of this option.
3-4 Getting Started
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Menus and Buttons
This section provides a brief overview on how to use the menu buttons
to open menus, make selections, and register data.
General Guidelines for Registering Information
Always keep these points in mind while you are using the menus:
❏
If you pause and do not press a button for 60 seconds, the fax returns
to the standby mode automatically. You must then start the proce-
dure again from the beginning.
❏
If your fax is set to manual receiving and the fax rings while you are
registering information, pick up the handset. If you hear a slow beep
tone, the other party is trying to send you a document. Press Stop
and press Start/Scan to receive the document.
Using the Menus
The fax employs a menu system you can use to register important
information or to set up important features. Here we describe how to
display and operate these menus. The content and purpose of each menu
is described in another chapter. (➞16-3)
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels so you can
1.
see the operation panel buttons.
Data
Registration
Press Data Registration.
2.
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
Set
Press Set.
3.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
Chapter 3
Getting Started 3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the search buttons to display the name of the next or previ-
ous menu title.
4.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
DATA REGISTRATION
7.SYSTEM SETTINGS
Note that displaying menu names with the search buttons is rotational. If
you press with the last menu name displayed, the display rotates to
the first menu name. If you press with the first menu displayed, the
display rotates to the last selection.
To Open a Menu and Select an Item
Press the search buttons until the name of the menu you want to open is
displayed, then press Set.
Set
Press the search buttons to browse through the menu items then press
Set to go to the next level.
To Return to the Previous Level
Data
Registration
Press Data Registration to return to the previous level so you can continue
browsing. If you continue to press Data Registration you will return to the
standby mode.
To Return to Standby Immediately
Stop
Press Stop to return to standby.
If you do not press a button for 60 seconds, the fax will automatically
return to standby.
3-6 Getting Started
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entering WNhaemn yeosu cfoomreRtoeagstiespttrhaattiroeqnuires entering a name for data registra-
tion, follow the procedure below.
In a display that requires a name entry, the letter or number in the upper
right corner of the LCD display tells you the entry mode.
UNIT NAME
_
:A
Press to change the entry mode.
1.
2.
*
Display Entry mode What it does
:A
:1
Text
Allows you to enter upper and lower case
letters. You can also press # to enter a
symbol.
Number
Allows you to enter numbers. You can
also press # to enter a symbol.
The numeric keypad buttons are clearly labeled with one number
and some letters.
ABC
DEF
Press the appropriate button to enter the letter or number.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
Keep pressing the button until the upper or lower case letter you
want appears.
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
If you go past the letter you want, you will have to keep pressing
the button until it appears again.
0
Tone
Each button contains the upper and lower case letters for its group of
letters. (For example: ABCabc)
Chapter 3
Getting Started 3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the next letter you want to enter is under another button, just
press that button to move the cursor right and enter the first letter
of that group with a single button press.
3.
-if not-
If the next letter you want to enter is under the same button you
just pressed, press e to move the cursor to the right one space.
Then keep pressing the button again until the letter you want
appears.
❏
You can also enter symbols. Just press # until you see the
symbol you want.
❏
To enter a space, press Space.
To Correct a Mistake
Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor left or right to position it
under the incorrect letter. Then enter the correct letter.
-if not-
Clear
Press Clear to delete the entire entry so you can start again.
C
3-8 Getting Started
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu Button Summary Table
When you come to a step where you must enter a number or name for
data registration—in this section or in any part of this Facsimile User’s
Guide—refer to the table below.
To see some of the buttons described below, you may have to open all
three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels.
Buttons for registering information
The search buttons display the next or previous menu
item.
Press to display the next item of the menu. If you press
when the last item is displayed, the display rotates to
the first item on the menu.
Press to display the previous item of the menu. If you
press when the first item is displayed, the display
rotates to the last item on the menu.
Set
Press Set to select the current item and display the next
level of the menu.
Switches the entry modes.
*
:A Text entry mode. You can enter letters.
:1 Number entry mode. You can enter numbers.
ABC
WXY
to
More than one letter is assigned to a button. Press to enter
2
9
*
the text entry mode then press the button for the letter you
want to enter. If the letter you want to enter is not displayed
first, keep pressing the button until it appears. If the next
letter is under another button, just press that button to enter
the first letter of the group and then keep pressing the
button until the letter you want appears.
-if not-
If the next letter is under the same button, press e to
move the cursor right one space then press the button
again to enter the first letter of the group. Keep pressing
the button until the letter you want appears.
f e
The cursor buttons move the cursor left or right.
#
Press # to enter a symbol. You can enter symbols in the
text or number entry mode. Keep pressing # until the
symbol you want is displayed. You can enter these
symbols:
- . # ! " , ; : ^ `_ = / | ' ? $ @ % & + ( ) [ ] { } < >
*
Chapter 3
Getting Started 3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Buttons for registering information (cont'd)
Space
Enters a space between letters or numbers. You may enter
spaces in telephone numbers—they do not affect dialing.
Pressing Space also deletes the character at the cursor
position.
Delete
Clear
Deletes the number from the right digit.
Clears the entire entry if you want to erase it and start
again.
Stop
After you are finished making settings or registering
information, press Stop to return to the standby mode.
Checking and Setting the Telephone Line
If you are not sure what type of telephone line you have, check with your
local telephone company. To operate the fax you must know if the fax is
connected to a tone or rotary pulse line. The fax can be set to operate
with either type of telephone line. The fax unit is set to operate through a
tone line without making adjustments.
Use this procedure to switch the fax setup between tone and pulse
dialing.
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
1.
Data Registration.
REGISTRATION
Data
Registration
1.DATA REGISTRATION
Set
Set
Press Set.
2.
3.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
Press Set again.
USER SETTINGS
1.DATE & TIME
3-10 Getting Started
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
4.
5.
6.
USER SETTINGS
10.TEL LINE TYPE
Set
Press Set.
TEL LINE TYPE
TOUCH TONE
Display and check the current line setting. Use the search buttons
to alternate the settings.
TEL LINE TYPE
TOUCH TONE
TEL LINE TYPE
ROTARY PULSE
Set
Display the setting you need, then press Set.
Press Stop to return to standby.
7.
8.
Stop
Chapter 3
Getting Started 3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Registering Required Sender Information
According to recent amendments to the FCC rules governing the use of
facsimile equipment in the United States, the following sender informa-
tion must be printed on every facsimile transmission:
❏
❏
❏
Your fax number
Your personal name or company name
Time and date of transmission
Your fax is already set to print this information at the top of every docu-
ment you send, but you must register your fax unit’s telephone number,
your personal name or company name, the current date, and the current
time with the features provided in the USER SETTINGS menu. (➞16-4)
What is Sender Information?
After your fax is received, the other party will know immediately where
it came from because your sender information will be printed at the top
of every page you send.
12/31/1999 11:18 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE,INC.
→ ADAM BOOK,CPA
001
DATE AND TIME
This is the date and time
of the transmission.
TELEPHONE NUMBER
This is your fax telephone
number. You can set TX
TERMINAL ID feature to
set the prefix for this
number as FAX or TEL.
(➞16-5)
December 28, 1999
Dear Member,
UNIT NAME OR
By now you have all had a chance to become familiar with your new
Canon fax units and are ready to set up a reliable, economical
communications network that offers many exciting features.
SENDER'S NAME
This is the UNIT NAME or
a sender name you select
with the TTI Selector
button when you scan the
document for sending.
We can save money by scanning documents in the memory and then
setting the delayed timer to send all the documents at the same
time later at night to take advantage of late night rates.
Many of us are separated by long distances and reside in
different time zones. We can set up the polling feature to poll
and receive documents from each other when we are not in the
office. For sensitive material about clients and confidential
bids, we can set up and use the confidential mailbox features. We
will also be able to keep down costs by limiting use of the fax
to operators who know the correct department codes and passwords.
DESTINATION
If you dialed with a speed
dialing button, the other
party's name appears
here.
Relay sending is another money saver. We can designate one relay
fax in your area, send one transmission from the home office on
the East coast and then have the document relayed to you locally.
PAGE NUMBER
The page number of the
document.
We hope you will have these features set up in the very near
future so we can enjory more efficient, secure, and ecomical
facsimile communications.
3-12 Getting Started
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For documents that you receive, you can turn on the RX FOOTER feature
which displays the date, time received, transaction number, and page
number in the lower right corner of the document.(➞16-15)
12/31/1999 FRI 03:57 [TX/RX NO 5015]
001
Registering the Sender Information
(TX TERMINAL ID)
Follow this procedure to set the current date and time, register the
number of your own fax unit, and register your name or company name.
Open the USER SETTINGS menu.
1.
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
Data Registration.
REGISTRATION
Data
Registration
1.DATA REGISTRATION
Set
Press Set.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
Set
Press Set.
USER SETTINGS
1.DATE & TIME
Set
Open the DATE & TIME menu. Press Set.
2.
DATE & TIME
12/31/99
11:30
Chapter 3
Getting Started 3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Register the date and time.
3.
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the month, day,
and year.
1
2
JKL
3
MNO
GHI
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
DATE & TIME
01/02/00
11:30
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the current time.
Tone
❏
Use the 24-hour format to enter the time (e.g. 1:00 p.m. as
13:00).
❏
❏
❏
To set the year to 2000 or later, enter 00, 01, 02, ..., etc.
Just enter the new number over the old number.
You can also use the cursor buttons to move the cursor
without changing a number entry.
❏
To restore the previous entry, press Clear.
DATE & TIME
01/02/00
08:45
Set
Press Set.
DATE & TIME
DATA ENTRY OK
USER SETTINGS
2.UNIT TELEPHONE #
Enter the unit telephone number. The unit telephone number is
the telephone number for your own fax.
4.
Set
Press Set.
UNIT TELEPHONE #
TEL =
3-14 Getting Started
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABC
DEF
Use these buttons on the numeric keypad to enter your own fax
number.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
Data entry buttons
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
0-9
Enters a number.
OPER
0
Space
Delete
Enters a space (spaces are optional).
Tone
Deletes the rightmost digit of the number you are
entering so you can enter a new digit.
Clear
+
Clears the entire entry if you want to start again.
Enters a plus sign (+).
You can register a number of up to 20 digits.
UNIT TELEPHONE #
TEL =
123 4567
Set
Press Set.
UNIT TELEPHONE #
DATA ENTRY OK
Enter the unit name.
5.
USER SETTINGS
3.UNIT NAME
Set
Press Set.
UNIT NAME
_
:A
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a name of up to
24 characters.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
You can enter letters in upper or lower case and enter numbers. In
the upper right corner of the display you will see the letter A. This
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
means you are in the text entry mode. Press the asterisk ( ) button
9
SYMBOLS
*
7
8
OPER
on the numeric keypad to switch the entry mode.
0
Tone
Display
Press keypad buttons to enter:
:A
:1
Text
Number
Chapter 3
Getting Started 3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Above each button on the numeric keypad, there is a group of
letters. These are the letters you can enter with the button below.
Each button contains the upper and lower case letters for its group of
letters. (For example: ABCabc)
Press the button of the letter you want to enter. If the letter you
want is not displayed first, keep pressing the button until the
letter you want appears.
If you go past the letter you want, just keep pressing the button until you
see it again.
To enter a space:
Space
Press Space to enter a space.
To enter a number:
Press to enter the number entry mode (:1).
*
ABC
DEF
Press the appropriate button on the numeric keypad to enter a
1
2
JKL
3
MNO
number.
GHI
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
To enter a symbol:
These standard symbols are available for entry:
- . # ! " , ; : ^ `_ = / | ' ? $ @ % & + ( ) [ ] { } < >
*
Press # until you see the symbol you want.
3-16 Getting Started
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To delete:
Clear
If you make a mistake and want to delete the entire entry so you
C
can start again, press Clear.
To make a correction:
Press the left or right cursor button to move the cursor under the
letter or number you want to change.
ABC
DEF
Press a button to enter a letter or number.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
UNIT NAME
:A
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
CANON DIV. #20
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
Set
When you are finished entering the unit name, press Set.
UNIT NAME
:A
DATA ENTRY OK
This completes registering all of the required sender information
for your fax.
Stop
Press Stop to return to standby.
6.
Chapter 3
Getting Started 3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Registering Sender Names
Registering alternative sender names is optional but you may want to
register sender names if many people are using the fax. If each user
registers his or her personal name as a sender name, they can enter their
sender name to replace the UNIT NAME printed at the top of documents
they send. (➞3-12)
To enter the sender name, press TTI Selector when you scan the document
for sending. (➞6-6)
Registering a Sender Name
Follow this procedure to register sender names.
Open the USER SETTINGS menu. (➞3-13)
1.
2.
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
USER SETTINGS
4.SENDER’S NAME
Set
Press Set.
3.
4.
SENDER’S NAME
01 :
Press the search buttons to display the number where you want to
register your name.
-if not-
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the number.
❏
❏
Up to 19 numbers are available. One number can accept a
single name entry.
If a name is already registered, you will see that name to the
right of the number.
3-18 Getting Started
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❏
Keep pressing the search buttons until you see a number with
no entry.
SENDER’S NAME
05 :
Set
Press Set.
5.
6.
SENDER’S NAME
05 : _
:A
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a name of up to
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
24 characters. (➞3-7)
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
SENDER’S NAME
05 : K.SMITH
:A
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
Set
When you are finished entering the name, press Set.
7.
SENDER’S NAME
DATA ENTRY OK
:A
SENDER’S NAME
06 :
Repeat the procedure to enter another name, or press Stop to
return to standby.
Chapter 3
Getting Started 3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing or Erasing a Sender Name
Repeat steps 1 to 3 of the procedure you used to register the
1.
2.
sender name. (➞3-18)
Press the search buttons to display the name you want to edit or
delete.
SENDER’S NAME
10 : J. SMITH
Set
Press Set.
3.
4.
SENDER’S NAME
10 : J.SMITH
:A
ABC
DEF
To change the sender name, use the buttons on the numeric
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
keypad. (➞3-7)
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
-if not-
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
To delete the sender name, press Clear.
0
Tone
Set
When you are finished making changes, press Set.
5.
6.
Stop
Press Stop to return to standby.
3-20 Getting Started
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Energy Saver Mode (For the
LASER CLASS® 3170/3175 Only)
You can set the fax machine to enter a low-energy sleep mode after it
remains idle for a specified length of time. This ensures that the fax
machine consumes less power when it is not being used.
If you install either the optional Dual-line Upgrade Kit or the PCL6
Printer Board, this function will not work.
Turning the Energy Saver Feature ON
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
1.
Data Registration.
Data
Registration
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
Set
Press Set.
2.
3.
4.
5.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
DATA REGISTRATION
7.SYSTEM SETTINGS
Set
Press Set.
SYSTEM SETTINGS
1.PASSWORD
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
SYSTEM SETTINGS
10.ENERGY SAVER
Chapter 3
Getting Started 3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set
Press Set.
6.
7.
8.
9.
ENERGY SAVER
OFF
Press a search button to display ON.
ENERGY SAVER
ON
Set
Press Set.
ENERGY SVR TIME
03MIN.
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a number for the
time (minutes) you want the fax machine to remain idle before it
automatically enters the low-energy sleep mode. You can set a
time from 03 to 30 minutes.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
ENERGY SVR TIME
30MIN.
0
Tone
Set
Press Set.
10.
11.
SYSTEM SETTINGS
11.PHONE NO. CHECK
Stop
Press Stop to return to standby.
After the fax machine enters the energy saver mode, only the
energy saver indicator on the operation panel remains on and the
LCD display shows:
ENERGY SAVER
3-22 Getting Started
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Returning to the Full Power Mode
The display tells you the fax has entered the energy saver mode with this
message:
ENERGY SAVER
Energy
Saver
The indicator under the energy saver button to the right of the LCD
display will also light red.
To restore the full power mode, press the Energy Saver button. While the
fax machine is powering up, PLEASE WAIT is displayed for a few
moments.
PLEASE WAIT
'
While the fax unit is powering up, you can perform any operation.
The following actions will automatically restore the full power mode:
❏
❏
❏
Receiving a document.
Printing an Activity Management report pre-set for printing.
Answering a call.
You can awaken the fax from the low-energy sleep mode by:
❏
❏
Pressing the Energy Saver button.
Setting a document on the fax for sending or copying.
Chapter 3
Getting Started 3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The fax does not enter the energy saver mode in the following cases:
❏
❏
When documents are stored in the memory.
When a paper or document jam has occurred, when the paper
cassettes have run out of paper, or when the toner cartridge has run
out of toner.
❏
❏
When a document has been fed into the automatic document feeder
(ADF).
When you install either the optional Dual-line Upgrade Kit or PCL6
Printer Board.
You cannot press the Energy Saver button to put the fax in the energy
saver mode. The fax enters the energy saver mode only after the speci-
fied time has elapsed.
3-24 Getting Started
Chapter 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing
This chapter introduces some basic dialing features then shows you how
to set up the speed dialing buttons.
Speed dialing includes One-touch Speed Dialing, Coded Speed Dialing,
and Group Dialing. Directory dialing, also described in this chapter,
allows you to locate a number for dialing by searching names and
numbers registered on the fax for speed dialing.
After you set up your speed dialing buttons, we recommend that you
occasionally print a list of all telephone numbers registered in the fax and
store it for reference. (➞14-2)
❏ Read This before Entering Telephone Numbers .................................. 4-2
• Entering Pauses for Dialing ............................................................... 4-2
• Adjusting the Length of a Pause ....................................................... 4-3
❏ What is Speed Dialing? ............................................................................ 4-5
❏ Setting Up One-touch Speed Dialing ..................................................... 4-6
❏ Setting Up Coded Speed Dialing.......................................................... 4-15
❏ Setting Up Group Dialing ...................................................................... 4-24
❏ Using Speed Dialing ............................................................................... 4-29
• Using One-touch Speed Dialing...................................................... 4-29
• Using Coded Speed Dialing ............................................................ 4-31
• Using Group Dialing ........................................................................ 4-33
❏ Using Directory Dialing ......................................................................... 4-35
Chapter 4
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing 4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Read This before Entering Telephone Numbers
Read this section before you register numbers for speed dialing, espe-
cially if your site has special dialing requirements like dialing through a
PBX.
Entering IPf yaouursfeaxsisfcoornnDecitaedlitno ga switchboard or PBX (private branch ex-
change), you may have to dial a number to connect to an outside line. The
outside number must also be registered with the fax number. The switch-
ing system may also require that you insert a pause after the outside
number. For further assistance, contact your local authorized Canon dealer
sales or service representative or your local telephone company.
Follow this procedure to enter a pause during regular dialing or when
registering a number for a speed dialing button.
ABC
DEF
When you come to a step that asks you to enter a number for
dialing, use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the
number.
1.
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
TELEPHONE NUMBER
TEL = 03_
0
Tone
Pause
To enter a pause between two numbers, press Pause. After you
2.
3.
P
enter the next number, the “P” changes to a small “p”.
TELEPHONE NUMBER
TEL = 03P_
Pause
Set
To enter a pause at the end of a number, press Pause then press
Set. The pause at the end of a number appears as an upper case
“P”.
P
TELEPHONE NUMBER
TEL = 03p123 4567P
4-2 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing
Chapter 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keep in mind these important points about pauses:
❏
❏
A pause entered within a number (p) is 2 seconds long.
You can add consecutive pauses (pp) with the Pause button.
Each additional pause adds 2 seconds to the pause time.
❏
You can change the length of a pause entered within a
number.(➞ below)
❏
❏
A pause at the end of a number (P) is 10 seconds long.
You may have to insert one or more pauses at the end of a
number to dial an overseas number.
❏
You cannot insert a pause when you dial using the numeric
keypad after pressing Hook or after picking up the handset.
Adjusting the Length of a Pause
Follow this procedure to adjust the length of a pause entered within a
number.
This procedure is effective only for adjusting the length pauses entered
within telephone numbers. The 10-second pause entered at the end of a
number cannot be adjusted.
Open the TX SETTINGS menu.
1.
2.
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
Data Registration.
Data
Registration
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
Set
Press Set.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
Chapter 4
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing 4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
DATA REGISTRATION
3.TX SETTINGS
Set
Press Set.
3.
TX SETTINGS
1.ECM TX
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
TX SETTINGS
2.MID PAUSE SET
Set
Press Set.
4.
5.
MID PAUSE SET
02SEC
ABC
DEF
Set
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a new time. You
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
can enter a number from 01 to 15 seconds. Then press Set.
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
Stop
Press Stop to return to standby.
6.
4-4 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing
Chapter 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What is Speed Dialing?
Speed dialing allows you streamline and customize dialing procedures
by registering a telephone number and other important settings so you
can start a document transmission while pressing only a few buttons.
The three methods of speed dialing include:
One-touch Speed Dialing
One-touch Speed Dialing allows you to start a document transmission by
pressing only one button. You can register up to 72 destinations for One-
touch Speed Dialing. The first group of buttons numbered 1 to 25 are on
the operation panel. Open the first panel to see buttons 26 to 50, then the
second panel to see the last set of buttons 51 to 72.
Coded Speed Dialing
Coded Speed Dialing allows you to start a document transmission by
pressing the Coded Dial button followed by a three-digit code of your
choice. While Coded Speed Dialing requires you to press more buttons, it
allows you to register up to 128 numbers.
Group Dialing
Group Dialing allows you to dial a group of registered One-touch or
Coded Speed Dialing fax numbers. By registering each group for One-
touch (or Coded Speed dialing) buttons, you press only one (or four
buttons) to send the same document to several locations.
Chapter 4
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing 4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up One-touch Speed Dialing
One-touch Speed Dialing allows you to dial a number and send a
document at the press of one button. You can register up to 72 fax
numbers, one for every One-touch Speed Dialing button on the operation
panel. In addition to the telephone number and name of the other party,
you can set the timer for the transmission as well as enter other impor-
tant settings.
Follow this procedure to register a telephone number for One-touch
Speed Dialing.
Open the One-touch Speed Dialing menu.
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
Data Registration.
1.
Data
Registration
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
REGISTRATION
2.TEL REGISTRATION
Set
Set
Press Set.
TEL REGISTRATION
1.1-TOUCH SPD DIAL
Press Set.
1-TOUCH SPD DIAL
01 =
4-6 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing
Chapter 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specify the One-touch Speed Dialing button that you want to
register.
2.
Press the search buttons to scroll the display. Press the down
search button to scroll to the next number or press the up search
button to scroll to the previous number.
-if not-
Close the appropriate One-touch Speed Dialing panel and press
the One-touch Speed Dialing button that you want to register.
If a number is already registered for a button, you will see that number
displayed. If a button is registered for Group Dialing, you will see
GROUP DIAL.
1-TOUCH SPD DIAL
10 =
Set
Set
With the number of the button you want to register displayed on
the LCD, press Set.
1-TOUCH SPD DIAL
1.TELEPHONE NUMBER
Press Set.
3.
TELEPHONE NUMBER
TEL =_
ABC
DEF
Enter the telephone number.
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
❏
❏
❏
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the fax
number.
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
To enter a space, press Space. Spaces are optional and ignored
during dialing.
0
Tone
After you have entered the number if you see that one of the
digits is incorrect, press the left cursor key (f) to move the
cursor to the digit you want to correct and press Delete. Then
enter the correct number.
Chapter 4
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing 4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❏
If you make a mistake, press Clear to erase the number and
start again.
TELEPHONE NUMBER
TEL =123 4567_
Set
Press Set.
4.
5.
TELEPHONE NUMBER
DATA ENTRY OK
1-TOUCH SPD DIAL
2.NAME
Enter a name.
Set
Press Set.
NAME
:A
_
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a name for the
1
2
3
number up to 16 characters long. (➞3-7)
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
NAME
:A
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
CANON U.S.A. NY
0
Tone
Set
Press Set.
6.
NAME
:A
DATA ENTRY OK
1-TOUCH SPD DIAL
3.OPTIONAL SETTING
This completes the minimum settings for registering a One-touch
Speed Dialing button.
4-8 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing
Chapter 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To stop here and register another button
Press Data Registration.
Data
Registration
Repeat the procedure from step 2.
Stop
To end the procedure and return to standby
Press Stop.
To perform the optional settings
Open the OPTIONAL SETTING menu.
7.
Set
Press Set.
OPTIONAL SETTING
OFF
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
OPTIONAL SETTING
ON
Set
Press Set.
OPTIONAL SETTING
1.SET TIME
Set the time for the transmission.
8.
❏
If you set the timer for the One-touch Speed Dialing button,
every document you send with this button will be sent at the
same time every day.
❏
❏
You can set up to 5 different times in a 24-hour period for
sending.
You can use this feature together with BATCH TX. If BATCH
TX is ON, the documents will be grouped and sent together at
the preset time. The fax unit will make only one phone call,
saving you time and money. (➞16-34)
Set
Press Set.
SET TIME
1:
:
Chapter 4
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing 4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set
Press Set again.
SET TIME
_ :
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the time. Enter
the time in the 24-hour format (e.g. 1:00 p.m. as 13:00).
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
SET TIME
00:30
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
If you want to clear the time you have set, do the procedure from the
beginning and press Clear at this step, then press Set.
Set
Set
Press Set.
SET TIME
2:
:
Press Set.
SET TIME
_ :
Set
Enter another time and press Set. You can register up to 5 sending
times.
To continue registration for the current button, press Data
Data
Registration
Registration. Then go to step 9.
OPTIONAL SETTING
2.TX TYPE
-if not-
Stop
To end registration and return to standby, press Stop.
4-10 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing
Chapter 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Perform the transmission type settings.
Press Set. Then press the search buttons to display the transmis-
sion type items.
9.
Set
TX TYPE
REGULAR TX
TX TYPE
POLLING RX
For details about using ITU-T subaddresses and passwords, see the
description of setting up and using a memory box. (➞8-12)
The TX TYPE menu includes these items:
REGULAR TX
Designates the transaction as a normal
transmission with no special features.
You can cancel the currently set TX TYPE
by selecting REGULAR TX.
CONFIDENTIAL TX
Designates the transaction as a transmis-
sion to a confidential mailbox. Press Set
then enter the subaddress and password
for the confidential mailbox.(➞10-10)
1.PASSWORD
The ITU-T password for the other
party’s confidential mailbox.
2.SUBADDRESS
The ITU-T subaddress for the other
party’s confidential mailbox.
ORIG RELAY TX
Designates the transaction as a relay
transmission with your fax as the
originator. Press Set then enter the
subaddress and password for the relay
broadcast.(➞9-10)
1.PASSWORD
The ITU-T password for the relay
broadcast.
2.SUBADDRESS
The ITU-T subaddress for the relay
broadcast.
Chapter 4
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing 4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PSWD/SUBADDRESS Allows you to enter an ITU-T password
or subaddress for the transmission.
(➞6-28)
1.PASSWORD
The ITU-T password for the transmis-
sion.
2.SUBADDRESS
The ITU-T subaddress for the transmis-
sion.
POLLING RX
Allows you to set a One-touch Speed
Dialing button to poll another fax every
time you use it to dial. Press Set then
enter the ITU-T subaddress and
password.(➞11-3)
1.PASSWORD
The ITU-T password for the other
party’s polling box.
2.SUBADDRESS
The ITU-T subaddress for the other
party’s polling box.
Display the TX TYPE you wish to register, then press Set. Next, set
the ITU-T password and subaddress for the feature you selected.
You can cancel the currently set TX TYPE by selecting REGULAR
TX.
Only one feature can be set for TX TYPE. The next time you open the TX
TYPE menu to change the setting, you will see the currently set item
displayed first.
OPTIONAL SETTING
3.LONG DISTANCE
If you experience transmission errors during long distance
sending, change the long distance setting.
10.
OPTIONAL SETTING
3.LONG DISTANCE
Set
Press Set.
LONG DISTANCE
DOMESTIC
4-12 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing
Chapter 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the search buttons until you see the display you want.
LONG DISTANCE
LONG DISTANCE (1)
Select LONG DISTANCE (1) and try to send the document again.
If this setting does not solve the problem, try settings (2) and (3).
Set
Press Set.
OPTIONAL SETTING
4.TX SPEED
Change the transmission speed if it takes a long time for your
document transmissions to begin.
11.
Set
Press Set.
TX SPEED
33600bps
If your document transmissions are slow in starting, this may mean that
the telephone lines in your area are in poor condition. Select a lower
speed. You can select 33600, 14400, 9600, or 4800 bps.
Press the search buttons to display the speed you want to select.
Then press Set.
Set
OPTIONAL SETTING
5.ECM
Chapter 4
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing 4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn ECM off or on.
Press Set.
12.
Set
ECM
ON
Press the search buttons to display OFF or ON.
ECM (error correction mode) reduces system and line errors during
sending or receiving with another fax that supports ECM. Otherwise,
this setting is ignored. If transmission speed appears to be extremely
slow, you may be able to speed up transmission time by turning ECM
off.
Set
Press Set.
1-TOUCH SPD DIAL
11 =
This completes all settings for telephone registration of a One-
touch Speed Dialing button.
If you want to set up other buttons, repeat from step 2.
-if not-
Stop
Press Stop to return to standby.
After you register a number for One-touch Speed Dialing, make
sure you write the name of the other party on a destination label
and stick it on the One-touch Speed Dialing panel above the
number of the One-touch Speed Dialing button where the number
is registered.
13.
4-14 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing
Chapter 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up Coded Speed Dialing
Coded Speed Dialing allows you to dial a number and send a document
by pressing four buttons. First you press Coded Dial and then enter a
three-digit code. You can register up to 128 fax numbers for this speed
dialing method. In addition to the telephone number and name of the
other party, you can set the timer for the transmission and as well as
enter other important settings identical to those for One-touch Speed
Dialing.
Follow this procedure to register a telephone number for Coded Speed
Dialing.
Open the Coded Speed Dialing menu.
1.
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
Data Registration.
Data
Registration
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
REGISTRATION
2.TEL REGISTRATION
Set
Press Set.
TEL REGISTRATION
1.1-TOUCH SPD DIAL
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
TEL REGISTRATION
2.CODED SPD DIAL
Chapter 4
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing 4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set
Press Set.
CODED SPD DIAL
000 =
*
Specify the Coded Speed Dialing code that you want to register.
2.
Coded Dial
Press Coded Dial. Then use the buttons on the numeric keypad to
enter a three-digit code (000-127).
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
-if not-
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
Press the search buttons to scroll the display. Press the down
search button to scroll to the next number or press the up search
button to scroll to the previous number.
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
If a telephone number is already registered for a three-digit code, you
will see that number displayed. If a button is registered for Group
Dialing, you will see GROUP DIAL displayed.
CODED SPD DIAL
012 =
*
Set
With the code you want to register displayed on the LCD, press
Set.
CODED SPD DIAL
1.TELEPHONE NUMBER
Set
Press Set again.
TELEPHONE NUMBER
TEL= _
4-16 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing
Chapter 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABC
DEF
Enter the telephone number.
3.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
❏
❏
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the number.
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
To enter a space, press Space. Spaces are optional and ignored
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
during dialing.
0
❏
❏
After you have entered the number if you see that one of the
digits is incorrect, press the left cursor key (f) to move the
cursor to the digit you want to correct and press Delete. Then
enter the correct number.
Tone
If you make a mistake, press Clear to erase the number and
start again.
TELEPHONE NUMBER
TEL =123 4567_
Set
Press Set.
TELEPHONE NUMBER
DATA ENTRY OK
CODED SPD DIAL
2.NAME
Enter a name.
4.
Set
Press Set.
NAME
:A
_
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a name for the
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
number up to 16 characters long. (➞3-7)
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
NAME
:A
CANON CANADA
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
Chapter 4
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing 4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set
Press Set.
NAME
:A
DATA ENTRY OK
CODED SPD DIAL
3.OPTIONAL SETTING
This completes the minimum settings for registering a three-digit
Coded Speed Dialing code.
To stop here and register another code
Press Data Registration.
Data
Registration
Repeat the procedure from step 2.
Stop
Set
To end the procedure and return to standby
Press Stop.
To perform the optional setting
Press Set to continue.
5.
6.
OPTIONAL SETTING
OFF
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
OPTIONAL SETTING
ON
Set
Press Set.
OPTIONAL SETTING
1.SET TIME
Set the time for the transmission.
❏
If you set the timer for the Coded Speed Dialing code, every
document you send with this code will be sent at the same
time every day.
❏
❏
You can set up to 5 different times in a 24-hour period for
sending.
You can use this feature together with BATCH TX. If BATCH
TX is ON, the documents will be grouped and sent together at
the preset time. The fax unit will make only one phone call,
saving you time and money.(➞16-34)
4-18 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing
Chapter 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set
Set
Press Set.
SET TIME
1:
:
Press Set again.
SET TIME
_ :
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the time. Enter
the time in the 24-hour format (e.g. 1:00 p.m. as 13:00).
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
SET TIME
00:30
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
If you want to clear the time you have set, do the procedure from the
beginning and press Clear at this step, then press Set.
Set
Set
Press Set.
SET TIME
2:
:
Press Set.
SET TIME
_ :
Set
ABC
DEF
Enter another time and press Set. You can register up to 5 sending
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
times.
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
Chapter 4
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing 4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data
Registration
To continue registration for the current button, press Data
Registration. Then go to step 7.
OPTIONAL SETTING
2.TX TYPE
-if not-
Stop
Set
To end registration and return to standby, press Stop.
Perform the transmission type settings.
Press Set. Then press the search buttons to display the transmis-
sion type items.
7.
TX TYPE
REGULAR TX
TX TYPE
POLLING RX
For details about using ITU-T subaddresses and passwords, see the
description of setting up and using a memory box. (➞8-11)
The TX TYPE menu includes these items:
REGULAR TX
Designates the transaction as a normal
transmission with no special features. You
can cancel the currently set TX TYPE by
selecting REGULAR TX.
CONFIDENTIAL TX
Designates the transaction as a transmis-
sion to a confidential mailbox. Press Set
then enter the subaddress and password
for the confidential mailbox. (➞10-10)
1.PASSWORD
The ITU-T password for the other party’s
confidential mailbox.
2.SUBADDRESS
The ITU-T subaddress for the other
party’s confidential mailbox.
4-20 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing
Chapter 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ORIG RELAY TX
Designates the transaction as a relay
transmission with your fax as the origina-
tor. Press Set then enter the subaddress
and password for the relay broadcast.
(➞9-10)
1.PASSWORD
The ITU-T password for the relay broad-
cast.
2.SUBADDRESS
The ITU-T subaddress for the relay
broadcast.
PSWD/SUBADDRESS Allows you to enter an ITU-T password
or subaddress for the transmission.
(➞6-28)
1.PASSWORD
The ITU-T password for the transmission.
The ITU-T subaddress for the transmission.
2.SUBADDRESS
POLLING RX
Allows you to set a Coded Speed Dialing
button to poll another fax every time you
use it to dial. Press Set then enter the ITU-
T subaddress and password. (➞11-3)
1.PASSWORD
The ITU-T password for the other party’s
polling box.
2.SUBADDRESS
The ITU-T subaddress for the other
party’s polling box.
Display the TX TYPE you wish to register then press Set. Next, set
the ITU-T password and subaddress for the feature you just
selected.
You can cancel the currently set TX TYPE by selecting REGULAR
TX.
Only one feature can be set for TX TYPE. The next time you open the TX
TYPE menu to change the setting you will see the currently set item
displayed first.
OPTIONAL SETTING
3.LONG DISTANCE
Chapter 4
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing 4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you experience transmission errors during long distance
sending, change the long distance setting.
8.
OPTIONAL SETTING
3.LONG DISTANCE
Set
Press Set.
LONG DISTANCE
DOMESTIC
Press the search buttons until you see the display you want.
LONG DISTANCE
LONG DISTANCE (1)
Select LONG DISTANCE (1) and try to send the document again.
If this setting does not solve the problem, try settings (2) and (3).
Set
Press Set.
OPTIONAL SETTING
4.TX SPEED
Change the transmission speed if it takes a long time for your
document transmissions to begin.
9.
Set
Press Set.
TX SPEED
33600bps
If your document transmissions are slow in starting, this may mean that
the telephone lines in your area are in poor condition. Select a lower
speed. You can select 33600, 14400, 9600, or 4800 bps.
4-22 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing
Chapter 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the search buttons to display the speed you want to select.
Then press Set.
Set
OPTIONAL SETTING
5.ECM
Turn ECM off or on.
10.
Set
Press Set.
ECM
ON
Press the search buttons to display OFF or ON.
ECM (error correction mode) reduces the effect of system and line errors
on documents that occur during sending or receiving with another fax
that supports ECM. Otherwise, this setting is ignored. If transmission
speed appears to be extremely slow, you may be able to speed up
transmission time by turning ECM off.
Set
Press Set.
CODED SPD DIAL
013 =
*
This completes all settings for telephone registration of Coded
Speed Dialing codes.
If you want to set up other codes, repeat from step 2.
-if not-
Stop
Press Stop to return to standby.
Chapter 4
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing 4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up Group Dialing
Group Dialing allows you to register several telephone numbers for One-
touch Speed Dialing or for Coded Speed Dialing so you can dial a large
group of numbers by pressing a One-touch Speed Dialing button, or by
pressing Coded Dial, followed by a three-digit code. Telephone numbers
already registered for One-touch or Coded Speed Dialing can be
registered as members of the group.
Follow this procedure to register a group of telephone numbers for
Group Dialing.
Open the Group Dialing menu.
1.
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
Data Registration.
Data
Registration
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
REGISTRATION
2.TEL REGISTRATION
Set
Press Set.
TEL REGISTRATION
1.1-TOUCH SPD DIAL
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
TEL REGISTRATION
3.GROUP DIAL
Set
Press Set.
GROUP DIAL
01 =
4-24 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing
Chapter 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Register the group of numbers for a One-touch Speed Dialing
button or for a Coded Speed Dialing code.
2.
To register the group for a One-touch Speed Dialing button
Press the search buttons to scroll the number display. Press the
down search button to scroll to the next number or press the up
search button to scroll to the previous number.
-if not-
1
Close the appropriate One-touch Speed Dialing panel and press
the One-touch Speed Dialing button you want to register.
72
If a number is already in use, you will see 1-TOUCH SPD DIAL,
CODED SPD DIAL or GROUP DIAL is displayed.
With an empty button number displayed, press Set.
Coded Dial
To register the group for Coded Speed Dialing
Press Coded Dial.
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the three-digit
code you want to use for group dialing (000-127).
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
GROUP DIAL
020=
*
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
Set
Press Set.
GROUP DIAL
1.TELEPHONE NUMBER
Chapter 4
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing 4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Register all the numbers for the group.
3.
Set
Press Set.
TEL =
To register a One-touch Speed Dialing button
Close the appropriate One-touch Speed Dialing panel.
Press the One-touch Speed Dialing button with the telephone
number you want to include in the group.
1
72
To register a Coded Speed Dialing button
ABC
DEF
Coded Dial
1
2
3
MNO
Press Coded Dial then use the numeric keypad to enter the three-
digit code where the telephone number you want to include in the
group is registered.
GHI
JKL
4
PRS
5
6
WXY
TUV
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
You can enter up to 199 numbers.
Tone
Set
When you are finished entering telephone numbers, press Set.
GROUP DIAL
2.NAME
Enter a name for the group.
4.
Set
Press Set.
NAME
:A
_
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a name for the
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
number up to 16 characters long. (➞3-7)
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
NAME
:A
CANON GROUP A
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
4-26 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing
Chapter 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set
Press Set.
NAME
:A
DATA ENTRY OK
GROUP DIAL
3.SET TIME
Set the time for the group transmission.
5.
❏
This setting is optional. If you do not set the timer, the trans-
mission will begin after you press the One-touch Speed
Dialing button, or press Coded Dial followed by a three-digit
code, for the group.
❏
If you set the timer for the Group Dialing code, every docu-
ment you send with this code will be sent at the same time
every day.
❏
❏
You can set up to 5 different times in a 24-hour period for
sending.
You can use this feature together with BATCH TX. If BATCH
TX is ON, the documents will be grouped and sent together at
the preset time. The fax unit will make only one phone call,
saving you time and money. (➞16-34)
Set
Set
Press Set.
SET TIME
1:
:
ABC
DEF
Press Set again then use the buttons on the numeric keypad to
enter the time. Enter the time in the 24-hour format (e.g. 1:00 p.m.
as 13:00).
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
SET TIME
00:30
0
Tone
Set
Press Set.
SET TIME
2:
:
Chapter 4
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing 4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set
Press Set, enter another time, and press Set. You can register up to
6.
5 sending times.
-if not-
To continue registering another group, press Data Registration.
Data
Registration
-if not-
Stop
To end registration and return to standby, press Stop.
4-28 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing
Chapter 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Speed Dialing
Follow the procedures in this section to use speed dialing. The three
speed dialing methods are One-touch Speed Dialing, Coded Speed
Dialing, and Group Dialing. If you forget where a number is registered,
you can find it and dial it with directory dialing. (➞4-35)
Using One-touch Speed Dialing
Follow this procedure to start a transmission and send a docu-
ment at the press of a One-touch Speed Dialing button.
To use this feature, you must first register a telephone number for One-
touch Speed Dialing. (➞4-6)
Set the document on the fax. (➞6-3)
1.
Set the document resolution, contrast, and document type. (➞6-4)
You can also select a sender’s name with the TTI Selector. (➞6-6)
DOCUMENT READY
Press the One-touch Speed Dialing button where the telephone
number you want to dial is registered.
2.
1
72
If you do not see the number of the button you want, open the
first or second One-touch Speed Dialing panel to see more but-
tons. After 5 seconds, the fax starts to send the document.
TEL =
123 4567
01 CANON USA
TRANSMIT
0025
SCANNING DOC. P.001
You will see a series of brief, alternating messages that tell you the
fax is dialing, calling, then transmitting the document. The
number being dialed, name of the other party, and the transaction
number of the document are also displayed.
Chapter 4
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing 4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some important points you should keep in mind when
you use One-touch Speed Dialing:
❏
To start scanning immediately, press Start/Scan. Otherwise the
fax will wait 5 seconds before it starts scanning. This timeout
feature can be turned off. (➞16-11)
❏
❏
To locate and press the correct button, you may have to open
the One-touch Speed Dialing panels.
The fax will not dial the number registered for the One-touch
Speed Dialing button until you set the document on the fax
for sending. If you press the button before you load the
document, the fax will prompt you:
SET DOCUMENT
❏
If you press a One-touch Speed Dialing button where no
number has been registered, the fax tells you:
NO TEL#
12
❏
❏
If you want to cancel the transmission after you press a One-
touch Speed Dialing button, press Stop. (➞6-8)
When you come to a step in any procedure where you have to
dial a number, you can press a One-touch Speed Dialing
button to dial.
When you register a number for One-touch Speed Dialing, Coded Speed
Dialing and Group Dialing, you can, as an option, set the time you want
your document to go out (up to 5 different times in a day). If you are
using a speed dial button that was set by someone else, and you would
like your document to go out at the preset time, verify if the preset time
feature is being used for that button. (➞4-9, 4-18, 4-27, 16-34)
4-30 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing
Chapter 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using CoFdoellodwSthpiseperodceDduiraeltionsgtart a transmission and send a document at the
press of the Coded Dial button followed by a three-digit code.
To use this feature, you must first register a telephone number for Coded
Speed Dialing. (➞4-15)
Set the document on the fax. (➞6-3)
1.
Set the document resolution, contrast, and document type. (➞6-4)
You can also select a sender’s name with the TTI Selector. (➞6-6)
DOCUMENT READY
Coded Dial
Press Coded Dial once.
2.
3.
TEL =
*
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the three-digit
code of the telephone number you want to dial (000-127).
After 5 seconds, the fax starts to send the document.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
TEL =
123 4567
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
001 CANON ONTARIO
*
0
TRANSMIT
0026
Tone
SCANNING DOC. P.001
You will see a series of brief, alternating messages that tell you the
fax is dialing, calling, then transmitting the document. The
number being dialed, name of the other party, and the transaction
number of the document are also displayed.
Chapter 4
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing 4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some important points you should keep in mind when
you use Coded Speed Dialing:
❏
To start scanning immediately, press Start/Scan. Otherwise the
fax will wait 5 seconds before it starts scanning. This timeout
feature can be turned off. (➞16-11)
❏
The fax will not dial the Coded Speed Dialing number until
you set the document on the fax for scanning. If you press the
buttons before you load the document, the fax will prompt
you:
SET DOCUMENT
❏
If you press Coded Dial and a three-digit code where no
numbers are registered, the fax tells you:
NO TEL #
013
*
❏
❏
If you want to cancel the transmission after you press the
buttons for Coded Speed Dialing, press Stop.
When you come to a step in any procedure where you have to
dial a number, you can press the buttons for Coded Speed
Dialing to dial.
When you register a number for One-touch Speed Dialing, Coded Speed
Dialing and Group Dialing, you can, as an option, set the time you want
your document to go out (up to 5 different times in a day). If you are
using a speed dial button that was set by someone else, and you would
like your document to go out at the preset time, verify if the preset time
feature is being used for that button. (➞4-9, 4-18, 4-27, 16-34)
4-32 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing
Chapter 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Group Dialing
Follow this procedure to start a transmission and send a document to
several destinations with a One-touch or Coded Speed dialing number
registered for group dialing.
To use this feature, you must first register a group of telephone numbers
for One-touch or Coded Speed Dialing. (➞4-24)
Set the document on the fax. (➞6-3)
1.
2.
Set the document resolution, contrast, and document type. (➞6-4)
You can also select a sender’s name with the TTI Selector. (➞6-6)
DOCUMENT READY
1
Press the One-touch Speed Dialing button, or press Coded Dial
followed by the three-digit code, where the group of telephone
numbers you want to dial is registered.
72
or
Coded Dial
0
1
0
2
0
7
The fax starts to send the document.
TEL =GROUP DIAL
01 CANON USA
TRANSMIT
0025
SCANNING DOC. P.001
You will see a series of brief, alternating messages that tell you the
fax is dialing, calling, then transmitting the document. The
number being dialed, name of the other party, and the transaction
number of the document are also displayed.
Chapter 4
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing 4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some important points you should keep in mind when
you use Group Dialing:
❏
To start scanning immediately, press Start/Scan. Otherwise the
fax will wait 5 seconds before it starts scanning. This timeout
feature can be turned off. (➞16-11)
❏
The fax will not dial the numbers for the Group Dialing
number until you set the document on the fax. If you press the
One-touch Speed Dialing button or press Coded Dial followed
by a three-digit code, before you load the document, the fax
will prompt you:
SET DOCUMENT
❏
If you press a One-touch Speed Dialing button, or press Coded
Dial followed by a three-digit code, where no number has been
registered, the fax will display:
NO TEL#
12
If you want to cancel the transmission after you press a One-touch
or Coded Speed Dialing button, press Stop.
When you register a number for One-touch Speed Dialing, Coded Speed
Dialing and Group Dialing, you can, as an option, set the time you want
your document to go out (up to 5 different times in a day). If you are
using a speed dial button that was set by someone else, and you would
like your document to go out at the preset time, verify if the preset time
feature is being used for that button. (➞4-9, 4-18, 4-27, 16-34)
4-34 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing
Chapter 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Directory Dialing
Follow this procedure to look up the other party’s name and retrieve the
number for dialing. This feature is convenient when you know the other
party’s name but cannot recall the One-touch Speed Dialing button ,the
code for Coded Speed Dialing, or Group Dialing where the number is
registered.
Set the document on the fax. (➞6-3)
1.
2.
3.
Set the document resolution, contrast, and document type. (➞6-4)
You can also select a sender’s name with the TTI Selector. (➞6-6)
Directory
Press Directory.
DIRECTORY DIAL
1ST LETT OF NAME
:A
ABC
DEF
Press a numeric keypad button to enter the first letter of the name
of the party you are searching for.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
For example, if you press PRS the first name and number regis-
tered for this button letter group is displayed.
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
TEL =
123 4567
0
10 PACIFIC BEACH
Tone
Chapter 4
Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing 4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the directory search buttons on the front of the operation
panel to display the other names and numbers registered for the
button letter group.
4.
TEL =
123 4567
12 SOUTHWEST
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
The names for One-touch Speed Dial are prefixed with two
digits and the names for Coded Speed Dial numbers are
prefixed with an asterisk ( ) and three digits.
*
When you reach the last number and name registered for the
letter group, you will return to the first number and name in
the group.
To see numbers and names registered for other letter groups,
ABC for example, you will have to press the ABC button on
the numeric keypad.
After you press a button, if you see NO TEL# in the display,
this means there are no names that begin with a letter of the
button you just pressed.
After you press the directory search keys, if the display does
not change this means only one name and number is regis-
tered for the button you just pressed.
Start / Scan
With the telephone number you want to dial displayed, press
5.
Start/Scan to start the document transmission.
TRANSMIT
0031
SCANNING DOC. P.001
4-36 Setting Up and Using Speed Dialing
Chapter 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5
Using the Fax as a Copier
This chapter describes all the settings and procedures for using the fax
unit as a copier.
❏ Preparing the Document.......................................................................... 5-2
❏ Setting a Document on the Fax ............................................................... 5-3
❏ Performing the Document Settings ........................................................ 5-4
❏ Making Copies .......................................................................................... 5-6
Chapter 5
Using the Fax as a Copier 5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparing the Document
Follow these simple guidelines to check your document before you set
the document on the fax for copying.
❏
For best results, load only documents of recommended standard size
and weight. Refer to Appendix B. (➞B-1)
❏
The document guides on the document feeder tray can be adjusted
to the width of non-standard size paper. For best results, however, all
sheets in the stack should be of the same width.
❏
Although the document guides on the document feeder tray indicate
11 × 17 in. size and such a document can be set on the document
feeder tray, the effective scanning width is up to B4 size (10 in.).
❏
❏
To avoid document jams, never feed thick documents or documents
backed with carbon paper.
To avoid document jams and possible damage to the fax, avoid
wrinkled or creased paper, carbon paper, curled paper, coated paper,
and onion skin or other very thin paper.
❏
❏
The fax does not scan completely to the edges of the paper and
anything beyond this recommended margin will not be scanned for
copying. See Appendix B and check your document. (➞B-2)
To avoid paper jams or damaging the fax, inspect the document
carefully and make sure it is free of pins, staples, paper clips, and
other metal fasteners.
❏
❏
Make sure all the documents are dry. They should not have wet ink,
glue, or paste on their surfaces.
Before you feed a stack of documents into the fax, make sure all the
pages are the same size and thickness. Do not attempt to feed
documents of mixed sizes and thickness in the same stack.
5-2 Using the Fax as a Copier
Chapter 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting a Document on the Fax
You can set a stack of up to 50 letter- or A4-size pages, or 20 legal- or 11 ×
17 in.- or B4-size pages into the fax for copying. However, the effective
scanning width is up to B4 size (10 in.).
Place the document face up on the document feeder tray of the fax
1.
2.
unit.
If the document is too long for the document feeder tray (e.g. legal
size, 11 × 17 in. size), pull out the document extension tray.
Slide the document guides to fit the width of the document.
3.
Chapter 5
Using the Fax as a Copier 5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Make sure the document is below the load limit marks for A4/
LTR and B4/LGL sizes.
4.
5.
Insert the document fully into the fax until the leading edge of the
document stops in the ADF.
The fax will display some messages.
MEMORY IN USE
36%
DOCUMENT READY
If the fax already displays DOCUMENT READY before you set a
document, a small-sized document, such as a STMT-size document, may
have remained in the ADF from a previous fax or copy job. In such a
case, remove the small-sized document from the ADF and then set your
document.
Performing the Document Settings
Canon’s original Ultra High Quality (UHQ) imaging technology allows
you to make copies that are very close to the quality of the original
document. For best results, adjust the settings for special documents
before copying.
Follow these guidelines to change a setting:
❏
The lighted indicator tells you the current setting.
5-4 Using the Fax as a Copier
Chapter 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❏
❏
Press the appropriate button repeatedly to light the setting you want.
After the document is copied, the settings return to the setting before
copying.
Ultra Fine
Darker
Standard
Lighter
Super Fine
Fine
Text
Text / Photo
Standard
Contrast
Document Type
Resolution
Resolution
Contrast
When copying a document, Ultra Fine is automati-
cally selected for you.
Adjusts the lightness/darkness of the document
pages scanned for copying.
Darker
For documents with light text or
colors.
Standard
Lighter
For standard printed or typewrit-
ten text.
For documents with dark text or
colors.
Document Type
Select for documents with text only or with text
and photos on the same page.
Text
For documents that contain text
without photographs.
Text/Photo
For documents that contain text
and photographs on the same
page. Automatically adjusts the
quality of the image and text on
the same page.
Chapter 5
Using the Fax as a Copier 5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Making Copies
Follow this procedure to use the fax as a copier.
Set the document on the fax. (➞5-3)
1.
2.
Press Copy.
Copy
COPY
01
LTR
CASSETTE 1
Perform the document settings. (➞5-4)
3.
Ultra Fine
Super Fine
Fine
Darker
Standard
Lighter
Text
Standard
Text / Photo
Resolution
Contrast
Document Type
If you want to select another paper cassette or the MP tray, open
all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels, then press the
search buttons.
4.
5.
COPY
01
MP TRAY
LGL
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the number of
copies (01 to 99).
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
COPY
03
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
MP TRAY
LGL
0
Tone
In order to select MP TRAY, USE MP TRAY must be set to ON in the
FAX'S PRINTER SET menu. (➞2-48)
❏
If you make a mistake and want to start again, press Clear.
Start / Scan
Press Start/Scan to start copying.
6.
COPY
❏
If you want to cancel the operation, press Stop.
5-6 Using the Fax as a Copier
Chapter 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
Sending Documents
This chapter describes fundamental procedures for dialing and sending
documents.
We will also show you how to send a document to more than one
location, set a document for delayed sending, and send a document with
a subaddress and password.
❏ Setting a Document for Sending ............................................................. 6-2
• Preparing the Document .................................................................... 6-2
• Setting the Document on the Fax ...................................................... 6-3
• Adjusting the Scanning Settings ....................................................... 6-4
❏ Selecting a Sender Name ......................................................................... 6-6
❏ Using Regular Dialing.............................................................................. 6-7
❏ Canceling Sending a Document.............................................................. 6-8
❏ Dialing Long Distance with Regular Dialing ..................................... 6-10
❏ Overview of Sending Methods ............................................................. 6-12
• Memory Sending ............................................................................... 6-12
• Direct Sending ................................................................................... 6-15
• Manual Sending................................................................................. 6-17
❏ Re-dialing When the Line is Busy ........................................................ 6-19
• What is Automatic Redialing? ......................................................... 6-19
• Setting Up Redialing ......................................................................... 6-20
❏ Sequential Broadcasting to More Than One Location ....................... 6-22
❏ Sending Documents at a Preset Time................................................... 6-24
❏ Sending a Document with a Subaddress/Password ......................... 6-27
• Subaddress/Password Sending with Speed Dialing ................... 6-27
• Subaddress/Password Sending with the Operation
Panel Buttons ..................................................................................... 6-28
Chapter 6
Sending Documents 6-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting a Document for Sending
This section describes how to prepare a document for sending and how
to perform the initial settings before dialing.
Preparing the Document
Follow these simple guidelines to check your document before you set
the document on the fax for scanning.
❏
❏
For best results, load only documents of recommended standard size
and weight. Refer to Appendix B. (➞B-1)
The document guides on the document feeder tray can be adjusted
to the width of non-standard size paper. For best results, all sheets in
the stack should be of the same width.
❏
Although the document guides on the document feeder tray indicate
11 × 17 in. size and such a document can be set on the document
feeder tray, the effective scanning width is up to B4 size (10 in.).
❏
❏
To avoid document jams, never feed thick documents or documents
backed with carbon paper.
For documents that are larger or smaller than these recommended
limits, reduce them or enlarge them on a copy machine and then
send the copy. Refer to Appendix B. (➞B-2)
❏
❏
❏
To avoid document jams and possible damage to the fax, avoid
wrinkled or creased paper, carbon paper, curled paper, coated paper,
and onion skin or other very thin paper.
The fax does not scan completely to the edges of the paper and
anything beyond this recommended margin will not be scanned for
sending. For details, refer to Appendix B. (➞B-2)
To avoid paper jams or damaging the fax, inspect the document
carefully and make sure it is free of pins, staples, paper clips, and
other metal fasteners.
❏
❏
Make sure all the documents are dry. They should not have wet ink,
glue, or paste on their surfaces.
Before you feed a stack of documents into the fax, make sure all the
pages are the same size and thickness. Do not attempt to feed
documents of mixed sizes and thickness.
6-2 Sending Documents
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Document on the Fax
You can set a stack of up to 50 letter- or A4-size pages, or 20 legal- or 11 ×
17 in.- or B4-size pages into the fax for scanning. However, the effective
scanning width is up to B4 size (10 in.).
Place the document face up on the document feeder tray of the fax
1.
2.
unit.
If the document is too long for the document feeder tray (e.g. legal
size, 11 × 17 in. size), pull out the document extension tray.
Slide the document guides to fit the width of the document.
3.
Chapter 6
Sending Documents 6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Make sure the document is below the load limit marks for A4/
LTR and B4/LGL sizes.
4.
5.
Insert the document fully into the fax until the leading edge of the
document stops in the ADF.
The fax will display some messages.
MEMORY IN USE
36%
DOCUMENT READY
If the fax already displays DOCUMENT READY before you set a
document, a small-sized document, such as a STMT-size document, may
have remained in the ADF from a previous fax or copy job. In such a
case, remove the small-sized document from the ADF and then set your
document.
Adjusting the Scanning Settings
Canon’s original Ultra High Quality (UHQ) imaging technology allows
you to send documents that are very close to the quality of the original
document. For best results, adjust the settings for special documents
before sending.
Follow these guidelines to change a setting:
❏
❏
❏
The lighted indicator tells you the current setting.
Press the appropriate button repeatedly to light the setting you want.
For documents that require special settings, you can set the Program
button to perform the settings with a single button press. (➞12-5)
6-4 Sending Documents
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ultra Fine
Super Fine
Fine
Darker
Standard
Lighter
Text
Text / Photo
Standard
Contrast
Document Type
Resolution
Resolution
Adjusts the resolution for documents with fine text
and thin lines. The higher the resolution, the higher
the quality output, but the slower the scanning
speed.
Ultra Fine
Super Fine
Fine
Eight times the Standard resolution.
Four times the Standard resolution.
Twice the Standard resolution.
Standard
For normal printed or typewritten
text.
Contrast
Adjusts the lightness/darkness of the document
pages scanned for sending.
Darker
For documents with light text or
colors.
Standard
For standard printed or typewritten
text.
Lighter
For documents with dark text or
colors.
Document Type
Select for documents with text only or with text and
photos on the same page.
Text
For documents that contain text
without photographs.
Text/Photo For documents that contain text and
photographs on the same page.
Automatically adjusts the quality of
the image and text on the same page.
If the other party does not have the ultra fine feature and you send a
document with Text/Photo set for the document type setting and Ultra
Fine set for the resolution setting, the image the other party receives will
reproduce at the other party's maximum resolution setting.
Chapter 6
Sending Documents 6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting a Sender Name
Follow this procedure to select one of the registered sender names.
❏
❏
Sender names are selected by pressing the TTI Selector button.
This setting is optional. If you do not select a sender name before
sending a document, the registered unit name will be printed at the
top of the document in the sender information area. (➞3-12)
❏
❏
If you select a sender name before you send a document, it will
replace the unit name printed in the sender information area.
(➞3-12)
Up to 19 sender names can be registered. At least one sender name
must be registered so you can use this feature. (➞3-18)
Set the document on the fax and adjust the document guides to
1.
the width of the document. (➞6-3)
Dial the number.
2.
ABC
DEF
Press the buttons on the numeric keypad to dial the number.
-if not-
1
2
JKL
3
MNO
GHI
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
Press a One-touch Speed Dialing button to dial the number.
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
(➞4-29)
-if not-
0
Tone
Press Coded Dial and a three-digit code to dial the number. (➞4-31)
-if not-
Use directory dialing. (➞4-35)
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels.
3.
TTI Selector
Press TTI Selector until the desired name appears in the display.
-if not-
Press TTI Selector. Then press the search button until the desired
name appears in the display.
6-6 Sending Documents
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set
Press Set.
4.
5.
Continue the procedure for the feature you want to use.
Using Regular Dialing
When you come to a step that requires dialing a number, you can dial the
number with the buttons on the numeric keypad just like dialing a
telephone number. This is called regular dialing.
To make dialing easier, register frequently used numbers for speed
dialing. (➞4-1)
Set the document on the fax. (➞6-3)
1.
2.
ABC
DEF
Dial the telephone number.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to dial the telephone
number.
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
Just after you press a button if you see that you have entered the
wrong number, just press Delete to delete the rightmost digit. Then
enter the correct number.
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
Start / Scan
Press Start/Scan.
3.
The fax starts scanning the first page into the memory.
Chapter 6
Sending Documents 6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Canceling Sending a Document
Follow this procedure to cancel a transmission in progress.
To Cancel Sending on a Single-Line
Stop
Press Stop.
1.
If you are using direct sending, an alarm sounds and the transmis-
sion is canceled immediately.
-if not-
If you are using memory sending, a message is displayed.
CANCEL DURING TX/RX?
YES=( )
NO=(#)
*
or
Press to cancel the transmission or press # if you change your
2.
*
mind and do not want to cancel.
After you press to cancel the transmission, an alarm sounds and
*
a report prints unless this feature has been turned off. (➞16-8)
PRINTING REPORT
12/31/1999 11:48 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE,INC.
001
***************************
ERROR TX REPORT
***
***
***************************
TX FUNCTION WAS NOT COMPLETED
TX/RX NO
0006
CONNECTION TEL
CONNECTION ID
ST. TIME
761 1298
JOHN BARRISTER
12/31 11:48
USAGE
PGS. SENT
RESULT
T
00'00
0
NG
STOP
6-8 Sending Documents
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To Cancel Sending on a Dual-Line
If you have installed the Dual-line Upgrade Kit and both lines are in use
at the same time and you want to select a transmission which you want
to cancel, follow this procedure.
Press the search buttons to view the displays for each transaction.
1.
12/31/1999 FRI 23:01
TX/RX NO.
5432
12/31/1999 FRI 23:01
TX/RX NO. 1234
If you are using direct sending, you cannot change the line.
Stop
Press Stop.
2.
If you are using memory sending, a message is displayed.
CANCEL DURING TX/RX?
YES=( )
NO=(#)
*
or
Press to cancel the transmission or press # if you change your
3.
*
mind and do not want to cancel.
After you press to cancel the transmission, an alarm sounds and
*
a report prints unless this feature has been turned off.(➞16-8)
PRINTING REPORT
Chapter 6
Sending Documents 6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dialing Long Distance with Regular Dialing
Follow this procedure to dial a long distance number and send a docu-
ment with regular dialing.
Set the document on the fax. (➞6-3)
1.
Set the document resolution, contrast, and document type. (➞6-4)
• You cannot select a sender’s name after you press Hook or pick up the
handset.
• You cannot insert a pause when you dial using the numeric keypad
after pressing Hook or after picking up the handset.
Hook
Press Hook if you want to use manual sending. After you press
Hook, the In Use lamp blinks green and you will be able to hear
the dial tone.
2.
TEL =
If you know the other party's fax is set to automatic receiving, go
to the next step.
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to dial the long distance
3.
1
2
JKL
3
MNO
number.
GHI
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
If you did not press Hook in step 2, you may have to insert a pause into a
number for long distance dialing. (➞4-2) For details about the location
and length of the pause, contact your local telephone company or local
authorized Canon dealer.
TEL =
011p81
6-10 Sending Documents
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABC
DEF
Dial the remainder of the number then press Start/Scan. After a
4.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
few moments the call will connect.
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
TEL = 011p81 123 4567P
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
Start / Scan
If you did not press Hook in step 2, you may have to insert a pause at the
end of the telephone number. The pause at the end of the number is 10
seconds. For details about the necessary length of the pause, contact your
local telephone company or local authorized Canon dealer.
If you have installed the optional handset, when the other party
answers, you can pick up the handset and talk.
Tell the other party to press the start button on their fax then hang
up their handset. When you hear a high pitched tone, the other
fax is ready to receive.
-if not-
If you hear a high pitched tone as soon as the call connects, the
other party is ready to receive.
Start / Scan
Press Start/Scan on your fax and hang up your handset.
5.
The fax starts to send the document.
If the offhook alarm starts beeping, make sure the handset is
sitting correctly on the handset cradle. The volume of the offhook
alarm can be adjusted. (➞16-6)
To take advantage of the speed dialing features, register frequently
dialed long distance numbers for One-touch or Coded Speed Dialing
buttons. (➞4-6, 4-15)
Chapter 6
Sending Documents 6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview of Sending Methods
This section briefly describes the methods and advantages of the three
main sending methods: memory sending, direct sending, and manual
sending.
Memory Sending
With memory sending, document scanning and sending is fast, allowing
you to get your document back quickly so you do not have to spend so
much time standing around the fax. You can start scanning a document
for sending even while the fax is busy sending another document.
MEMORY
SEND
Set the document on the fax. (➞6-3)
1.
Set the document resolution, contrast, and document type. (➞6-4)
You can also select a sender’s name with the TTI Selector. (➞6-6)
6-12 Sending Documents
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABC
DEF
Dial the other party’s fax number.
2.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to dial the number. (➞6-7)
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
-if not-
Press a One-touch Speed Dialing button to dial the number. (➞4-29)
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
-if not-
0
Tone
Press Coded Dial and a three-digit code to dial the number. (➞4-31)
-if not-
Press Directory and search for the name to dial the number.
(➞4-35)
If you make a mistake during dialing, press Stop to return to
standby and start again.
If you use One-touch or Coded Speed Dialing with the time out feature
on, the fax will pause 5 seconds before it starts scanning the document.
(➞16-11)
Start / Scan
To start scanning right away, press Start/Scan.
3.
If you use One-touch or Coded Speed Dialing, wait for the fax to
start scanning automatically.
The timeout feature can be turned off. (➞16-11)
You can start sending a document while it is being scanned into
the memory. When scanning a multi-page document and the
telephone line is free, the unit will call the other party after the
first page is scanned. Once the connection is made, the fax unit
will begin to transmit the information while the remaining pages
are being scanned. This feature is called Quick-on-line TX and can
be turned off and on. (➞16-11)
When the fax sends a document, messages report the following
information about the transmission.
Transaction number
TRANSACTION NUMBER
TRANSMIT
0031
SCANNING DOC. P.001
A transaction number is assigned to every document sent from
your fax starting with 0001 up to 4999. When the number 4999 is
reached, numbering will begin again from 0001.
Chapter 6
Sending Documents 6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Other party’s fax number and name
12/31/1999 FRI 23:01
DIALING
12/31/1999 FRI 23:01
123 4567
12/31/1999 FRI 23:01
CALLING
12/31/1999 FRI 23:01
TX/RX NO.
0031
12/31/1999 FRI 23:01
CANON CANADA
Displayed only if the other party’s telephone number and name are
registered for the speed dialing button used to dial the number.
ECM transmission mode
12/31/1999 FRI 23:05
ECM TX
P.001
Unless this feature has been turned off, the document is sent in the
ECM (error correction mode) for transmission. (➞16-10)
Successful completion
12/31/1999 FRI 23:05
TRANSMITTING OK
12/31/1999 FRI 23:05
TX/RX NO.
0031
Alternating messages tell you the transmission was successful.
The message will disappear after approximately 10 seconds.
Transmission error
If a transmission error occurs, read the error message in the
display and look it up in the error message table. (➞15-38)
Optional Dual-line transactions
If you have installed the Dual-line Upgrade Kit and both lines are
in use at the same time, press the search buttons to switch the
display so you can view either transaction in progress. (➞2-54)
6-14 Sending Documents
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Direct SeTnhdeifnaxgdials the number, connects the call, and then scans and sends the
document one page at a time. Direct sending is slower than memory
sending, but because this method bypasses memory you can send a
document ahead of other documents stored in the memory.
SEND
❏
❏
Direct sending scans and sends each page one at a time.
With direct sending you can watch each page as it is scanned and
sent.
❏
❏
Although direct sending is slower than memory sending, you can
use direct sending when you need to send an urgent document
ahead of other documents stored in the memory.
You can also use direct sending when the memory is full and there is
no space to hold another document in memory.
Set the document on the fax. (➞6-3)
1.
Set the document resolution, contrast, and document type. (➞6-4)
You can also select a sender’s name with the TTI Selector. (➞6-6)
Chapter 6
Sending Documents 6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Direct TX
Press Direct TX.
2.
3.
The Direct TX lamp lights. The fax is now in the direct sending
mode.
Dial the other party’s fax number.
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to dial the number. (➞6-7)
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
-if not-
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
Press a One-touch Speed Dialing button to dial the number. (➞4-29)
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
-if not-
Press Coded Dial and a three-digit code to dial the number. (➞4-31)
0
Tone
-if not-
Press Directory and search for the name to dial the number.
(➞4-35)
If you make a mistake during dialing, press Stop to return to
standby and start again.
Start / Scan
Press Start/Scan.
4.
The fax dials the other party’s number and sends the fax. Each
page is sent as it is scanned.
A series of messages report the other party’s name, telephone
number, and transaction number in the LCD display. The final
message reports successful transmission.
12/31/1999 FRI 12:05
TRANSMITTING OK
When sending a small-sized document, such as a STMT-size document,
the document may remain in the ADF after sending. This document
might then be sent again with the next sender’s document. Therefore,
when sending a small-sized document, make sure that the document
does not remain in the ADF after sending.
Direct TX
Press Direct TX to turn off the direct sending mode.
5.
6-16 Sending Documents
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual SMenanduianl sgending allows you to talk to the other party before you send the
document. This method is useful if the operator of the other fax must
manually set the other fax to receive before it can receive a document.
❏ The sending speed is 14400 bps or less when sending manually.
❏ The handset is available as an option. (➞2-16)
Set the document on the fax. (➞6-3)
1.
Set the document resolution, contrast, and document type. (➞6-4)
You cannot set sender's name when sending manually.
Hook
Press Hook.
2.
After you press Hook the In Use lamp blinks green and you will be
able to hear the dial tone.
-if not-
Without pressing Hook, just pick up the handset if you have
installed the optional handset.
Chapter 6
Sending Documents 6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dial the other party’s fax number.
3.
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to dial the number. (➞6-7)
1
2
JKL
3
MNO
-if not-
GHI
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
Press a One-touch Speed Dialing button to dial the number. (➞4-29)
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
-if not-
Press Coded Dial and a three-digit code to dial the number. (➞4-31)
0
Tone
-if not-
Press Directory and search for the name to dial the number and
press Set. Then press Start/Scan. (➞4-35)
If you make a mistake during dialing, press Stop to return to
standby and start again.
When you hear the other party answer the call, you can talk.
4.
5.
When you hear the other party answer, pick up the handset so
you can talk if you have not already done so. Then go to step 5.
-if not-
If you hear a high pitched signal, instead of the other party’s
voice, they are ready to receive your document. Go to step 7.
Ask the other party to press the start button on their fax and then
hang up their handset.
After the other party presses the start button on their fax, you will
6.
7.
hear a high pitched signal.
Press Start/Scan on your fax and hang up your handset.
Start / Scan
The fax begins to send the document. If the offhook alarm starts
beeping, make sure the handset is resting properly on the handset
cradle.
6-18 Sending Documents
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Re-dialing When the Line is Busy
If the other party’s line is busy or if there is no answer, the fax waits two
minutes and then dials the same number again. This feature is called
automatic redialing.
What is Automatic Redialing?
After the initial dial attempt, the fax will wait two minutes and try to dial
again. If the second attempt fails, the fax will again wait for two minutes
and make a final attempt to complete the call.
Even if the fax machine is set to redial several times, it will redial only
once if there is no tone or there is a ring back tone during the first
attempt.
Auto redial can be turned off and on. The number of redialing attempts
and the time interval between attempts can be set up with the auto redial
feature. (➞6-20, 16-11)
While the fax is waiting to redial, the following messages are displayed
alternately:
12/31/1999 FRI 09:30
AUTO REDIAL
12/31/1999 FRI 09:30
TX/RX NO.
3888
If both redial attempts are unsuccessful the fax will cancel the transac-
tion, display the following message, and print an Error TX report to
remind you that the transmission was not completed.
12/31/1999 FRI 09:30
BUSY/NO SIGNAL
Chapter 6
Sending Documents 6-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Stop
To cancel redialing
If you are using direct sending, press Stop.
-if not-
Delete File
If you are using memory sending, press Delete File. (➞8-9)
To erase the document from the memory
Use the Delete File button to delete the file from the memory.
(➞8-9)
Delete File
Setting UFpolRloTwehedthniiuasmplirbnoecrgeodfutrime teosstehteufpaxthaettseemrepdtsiatloinrgedfeiaalt.ures:
❏
❏
The length of the time interval the fax waits between dialing
attempts.
Open the TX SETTINGS menu.
1.
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
Data Registration.
Data
Registration
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
Set
Press Set.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
DATA REGISTRATION
3.TX SETTINGS
Set
Press Set.
TX SETTINGS
1.ECM TX
6-20 Sending Documents
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
2.
TX SETTINGS
3.AUTO REDIAL
Set
Press Set.
AUTO REDIAL
ON
If OFF is displayed, press the search buttons until you see ON.
Set
Press Set.
Press the search buttons to display the item you want to set up,
then press Set.
3.
4.
Set
Press Stop to return to standby.
Stop
Auto Redial Setup Summary
The default settings, shown in bold, remain in effect unless you change
them.
1.REDIAL TIMES
Sets the number of times the fax attempts to dial a number
before it cancels the transaction automatically.
Even if the fax machine is set to redial several times, it will
redial only once if there is no tone or there is a ring back tone
during the first attempt.
02TIMES
You can set between 01 to 10 dialing
attempts.
2.REDIAL INTERVAL
Sets the length of time the fax waits
between dialing attempts.
02MIN.
You can set the time interval between 02
to 99 minutes.
Chapter 6
Sending Documents 6-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sequential Broadcasting to More Than One
Location
Follow this procedure to scan a document once and send it to several
locations. With this sending method, called sequential broadcasting, you
can send the same document to a maximum of 210 locations.
If you frequently send the same document to several locations, use
Group Dialing. With Group Dialing you can register up to 199 facsimile
numbers and send the same document to these numbers at the press of
only one or four buttons. (➞4-24)
If you use sequential broadcasting frequently and you want to make sure
that all transactions are completed, assign the REPORT function to the
Program button. Then before you send a document, press Program to have
the fax unit print a Multi-transaction Report to confirm that the
document was sent to all the destinations. (➞12-5, 14-14)
Set the document on the fax. (➞6-3)
1.
Set the document resolution, contrast, and document type. (➞6-4)
You can also select a sender’s name with the TTI Selector. (➞6-6)
Dial the telephone numbers by entering the numbers one right
after the other.
2.
Following are the three methods you can use to enter the numbers
for Sequential Broadcasting:
1
Use the One-touch Speed Dialing buttons to dial up to 72 destina-
tions.
72
TEL =
123 4567
01 CANON INC
Coded Dial
Use the Coded Speed Dialing buttons to dial up to 128 destina-
tions.
0
1
0
2
0
7
TEL =
123 4567
002 CANON INC CA
*
6-22 Sending Documents
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set
ABC
DEF
Use regular dialing with the numeric keypad to dial up to 10
destinations, but make sure that you press Set after each number
you enter with regular dialing.
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
You can also press the Redial button to redial the last number
0
dialed with the numeric keypad.
Tone
You must dial the second number within 5 seconds of dialing the first
number. All subsequent numbers must be dialed within 10 seconds. If
you wait longer than the timeout interval before dialing the next number,
the fax will start scanning the document. The timeout interval can be
turned off. (➞16-11)
Start / Scan
After you have entered all of the numbers, press Start/Scan.
3.
Regardless of the order you used when dialing, the fax will send the
document to the locations you entered in this order: One-touch Speed
Dialing numbers, Coded Speed Dialing numbers, then regular dial
numbers.
To cancel sequential broadcasting
To cancel a sequential broadcast, press Stop.
Stop
After CANCEL DURING TX/RX is displayed, press . All desti-
*
nations are canceled.
Chapter 6
Sending Documents 6-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending Documents at a Preset Time
Follow this procedure to set a time for sending. This feature is called
delayed sending or timer sending. Use timer sending to store a document in
the memory and then have it sent at a later time when telephone rates
are lower.
You can set up to 70 documents for delayed sending.
Set the document on the fax. (➞6-3)
1.
2.
Set the document resolution, contrast, and document type. (➞6-4)
You can also select a sender’s name with the TTI Selector. (➞6-6)
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
Delayed Transmission.
DELAYED TX
SET TIME
17:30
Delayed
Transmission
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the time.
3.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
❏
❏
Enter the time in the 24-hour format (e.g. 1:00 p.m. as 13:00).
Enter all the numbers, including zeros.
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
DELAYED TX
Tone
SET TIME
23:05
6-24 Sending Documents
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set
Press Set.
4.
DELAYED TX
SELECT LOCATIONS
TEL =
ABC
DEF
Dial the other party's fax number.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to dial the number. (➞6-7)
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
-if not-
Close the One-touch Speed Dialing panels and dial the other
party’s fax number by pressing a One-touch Speed Dialing button.
(➞4-29)
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
-if not-
Press Coded Dial and a three-digit code to dial the number. (➞4-31)
-if not-
Press Directory and search for the name to dial the number.
(➞4-35)
If you make a mistake during dialing, press Stop to return to
standby and start again.
TEL=
1 123 4567
09 CALIFORNIA MRKTS
You can press more than one speed dialing button to send the document
to more than one location after the timer goes off. If you want to enter the
numbers with regular dialing for a sequential broadcast, make sure you
press Set after every number.
DELAYED TX
SENDER’S NAME
SENDER’S NAME
CANON DIV. #20
Chapter 6
Sending Documents 6-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you want to skip selecting a sender name, go to step 6.
-if not-
5.
6.
TTI Selector
If you want to select a sender name, press the TTI Selector button
until you see the sender name you want to use.
You can also use the search buttons to scroll up or down the TTI
list.
SENDER’S NAME
19 CANON FAX DIV.
Set
Press Set. The fax scans the document and stores it in the memory.
DELAYED TX
2339
SCANNING DOC. P.001
❏
❏
The fax will hold the document in the memory until the timer
for the document goes off. Then it will send the document to
the destinations you specified.
To cancel a document set for timer sending, use the Delete File
button. (➞8-9)
6-26 Sending Documents
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending a Document with a Subaddress/
Password
You can send documents with ITU-T standard subaddresses and pass-
words. In order for a transaction to succeed, the subaddresses and
passwords on the sending and receiving fax units must match. You can
use two methods to send a document with an ITU-T subaddress and
password:
❏
Press a One-touch or Coded Speed Dialing button registered for
subaddress/password sending.
❏
Enter the subaddress and password with the Subaddress and
Password buttons on the operation panel when you send the
document.
Subaddress/Password Sending with Speed Dialing
If you register the subaddress and/or password for a One-touch or
Coded Speed Dialing button, the subaddress/password are entered for
you automatically after you press the speed dialing buttons. (➞4-6, 4-15)
To use subaddress/password sending with a speed dialing
button, you must first register the subaddress/password for the
telephone number when you register the number for One-touch or
Coded Speed Dialing. (➞4-6, 4-15)
1.
Set the document on the fax. (➞6-3)
2.
Set the document resolution, contrast, and document type. (➞6-4)
You can also select a sender’s name with the TTI Selector. (➞6-6)
Chapter 6
Sending Documents 6-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the One-touch Speed Dialing button registered for
3.
4.
1
subaddress/password sending. (➞4-29)
72
-if not-
Coded Dial
Press the Coded Dial button followed by the three-digit code for the
Coded Speed Dialing number registered for subaddress/pass-
word sending. (➞4-31)
0
1
0
2
0
7
-if not-
Directory
Press Directory and search for the name to dial a number registered
for subaddress/password sending. (➞4-35)
Start / Scan
Press Start/Scan.
TRANSMITTING
0010
SCANNING DOC. P.001
Subaddress/Password Sending with the Operation Panel
Buttons
Note these limitations on entering the subaddress/password with the
Subaddress and Password buttons on the operation panel:
❏
If you frequently need to use a subaddress/password to send a
document to more than one location, register the number,
subaddress, and password for a One-touch or Coded Speed Dialing
button so you can use multiple broadcasting. (➞6-22)
❏
❏
You cannot use the Subaddress or Password buttons for One-touch or
Coded Speed Dialing button that is set for anything other than
REGULAR TX. (➞4-6, 4-15)
The password setting is optional but required if the other party has
set a password on the other fax unit.
Follow this procedure to send a document with a subaddress/password
entered with the Subaddress and Password buttons on the operation
panel.
6-28 Sending Documents
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set the document on the fax. (➞6-3)
1.
2.
Set the document resolution, contrast, and document type. (➞6-4)
You can also select a sender’s name with the TTI Selector. (➞6-6)
ABC
DEF
Dial the telephone number.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the telephone
number, or use the speed dialing buttons to dial.
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
To dial with One-touch Speed dialing, press the One-touch Speed
Dialing button where the number is registered.
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
To dial with a Coded Speed Dialing, press Coded Dial and then use
the numeric keypad to enter the three-digit dialing code.
Tone
Set
Then press Set.
TEL =
123 4567
02 JOHN BARRISTER
Immediately after pressing Set, open all three of the One-touch
Speed Dialing panels and press Subaddress.
3.
SUBADDRESS
Subaddress
You must press Subaddress within 5 seconds of pressing Set. If you wait
longer than the timeout interval before pressing Subaddress, the fax will
start scanning the document. The timeout interval can be turned off.
(➞16-11)
Set
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the ITU-T
4.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
subaddress. Then press Set.
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
TEL =
123 4567
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
02 JOHN BARRISTER
0
Tone
Chapter 6
Sending Documents 6-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Password
If you want to enter a password, press Password.
5.
PASSWORD
You must press Password within 5 seconds of pressing Set. If you wait
longer than the timeout interval before pressing Password, the fax will
start scanning the document. The timeout interval can be turned off.
(➞16-11)
Set
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the ITU-T pass-
6.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
word. Then press Set.
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
TEL =
123 4567
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
02 JOHN BARRISTER
0
Tone
Start / Scan
Press Start/Scan. The fax starts to scan the document.
7.
TRANSMIT
0021
SCANNING DOC. P.001
❏
❏
❏
The fax dials the number and sends the document with the
subaddress and password you just entered.
To cancel the transmission, press Stop and press when you
*
are prompted to confirm the cancellation.
To cancel a transmission set for delayed or timer sending, use
the Delete File button. (➞8-9)
6-30 Sending Documents
Chapter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7
Receiving Documents
This chapter describes the basic receive features.
You can receive document transmission automatically or manually. In the
automatic receive mode the fax will receive a document automatically.
In the manual receive mode, if you have installed the optional handset
kit you can answer the telephone by picking up the handset on the fax
and pressing Start/Scan to start receiving the fax. You can also start
manual receiving from an extension telephone with remote receiving.
In the last section of this chapter, we will show you how to put the fax
unit in the transfer mode and send all documents automatically to a fax
at your home or at another work site.
❏ Receiving Documents Automatically .................................................... 7-2
• Setting the Automatic Receive Mode ............................................... 7-2
• Messages Displayed When Receiving a Document ....................... 7-2
• Turning on and Adjusting the Auto Switch Time........................... 7-5
❏ Receiving Documents Manually with the Optional Handset ............ 7-7
• Receiving a Document Manually at the Fax.................................... 7-7
• Receiving a Document Manually with an Extension Telephone.. 7-8
• Changing the Remote Receive ID ..................................................... 7-9
❏ Canceling Receiving a Document..........................................................7-11
❏ Transferring Documents ........................................................................ 7-13
• Before You Set Up Document Transfer........................................... 7-13
• Setting Up the Fax for Document Transfer .................................... 7-14
• Turning the Transfer Mode ON and OFF ...................................... 7-17
• Changing the Transfer Settings ....................................................... 7-18
• Canceling the Transfer Settings ....................................................... 7-20
Chapter 7
Receiving Documents 7-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Receiving Documents Automatically
After you take your fax out of the box and set it up, it is set to receive
documents automatically. Use automatic receiving for a fax on a dedi-
cated telephone line that you do not need for telephone voice
communication.
Setting the Automatic Receive Mode
Manual RX
Check the indicator above the Manual RX button. When this indicator is
off, the fax is in the automatic receive mode.
When a fax document is sent to you, your fax unit receives the document
automatically. During receiving a series of brief messages report the
progress of the reception by displaying the transaction number, name
and telephone of the caller, and the transmission mode.
•If you install the handset and you don't want the fax to ring when the
other party sends to you, turn the ringer volume switch to OFF.
•If you have installed the optional Dual-line Upgrade Kit, when the fax
unit receives a document on Line 2 it will switch to automatic receiving
regardless of whether the Manual RX lamp is on or off. (➞2-56)
Messages Displayed When Receiving a Document
This is a summary of the messages you will see displayed while your fax
is receiving a document. While you are receiving a document, informa-
tion about the document and other party is displayed.
Receiving a transmission
12/31/1999 FRI 23:31
RECEIVE
7-2 Receiving Documents
Chapter 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transaction number
Every document is assigned a transaction number as soon as it is re-
ceived.
12/31/1999 FRI 12:20
TRANSACTION NUMBER
TX/RX NO.
5001
Documents received are assigned transaction numbers in ascending
order starting with the number 5001 up to 9999. After 9999 is reached,
numbering starts from 5001 again.
Other party’s fax number
The other party’s facsimile number is displayed only if it is registered on
the other party's fax.
12/31/1999 FRI 11:34
123 4567
Other party’s name
According to the type of machine the other party is using to send the
document, you may also see the other party’s name displayed alternately
with the telephone number.
12/31/1999 FRI 11:34
CANON INC. K.SATO
ECM reception mode
12/31/1999 FRI 11:34
ECM RX
P.001
If the other party’s fax supports ECM sending, your fax receives every
document in the error correction mode (ECM). (➞16-14)
Optional Dual-line transactions
If you have installed the Dual-line Upgrade Kit and both lines are in use
at the same time, press the search buttons to switch the display so you
can view either transaction in progress. (➞2-54)
Chapter 7
Receiving Documents 7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Successful reception
You will see these alternating messages displayed after a document is
successfully received.
12/31/1999 FRI 11:34
RECEPTION OK
12/31/1999 FRI 11:34
TX/RX NO.
5011
You can also confirm reception of a document by printing an Activity
Report or an Activity Management Report. (➞14-9)
Receive error messages
Here are few of the most common error messages.
The fax has run out of paper while printing or copying a document:
SUPPLY REC. PAPER
Open the paper cassette and load paper into the paper cassette. As soon
as you re-fill the paper cassette and close it, the remainder of the
document in the memory is printed. (➞2-31)
The toner cartridge has run out of toner while printing or copying a
document:
REPLACE CARTRIDGE
Open the printer cover and replace the toner cartridge. As soon as you
close the cover, the fax returns to standby and the remainder of the
document in the memory starts printing automatically. (➞15-17)
If you see any other error messages, note the message then look it up in
the error message table. (➞15-38)
7-4 Receiving Documents
Chapter 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning on and Adjusting the Auto Switch Time
If you have installed the optional handset or connected an extension
telephone to the fax machine, follow this procedure to set the ring time
before the fax switches automatically to the document receive mode
while in the manual receive mode. This allows more time for you to pick
up the handset and answer the telephone for voice communication
before the fax switches to the receive mode.
Open the RX SETTINGS menu.
1.
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
Data Registration.
Data
Registration
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
Set
Press Set.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
DATA REGISTRATION
4.RX SETTINGS
Set
Press Set.
RX SETTINGS
1.ECM RX
Open the MAN/AUTO SWITCH menu.
2.
Press the search button until you see the display below.
RX SETTINGS
2.MAN/AUTO SWITCH
Chapter 7
Receiving Documents 7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set
Set
1
Press Set.
MAN/AUTO SWITCH
OFF
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
MAN/AUTO SWITCH
ON
Press Set.
F/T RING TIME
15SEC
Set the amount of time the fax waits before automatically switch-
ing to the document receive mode.
3.
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a number for the
time (01 to 99) in seconds.
2
JKL
3
MNO
GHI
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
-if not-
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
Press the search buttons to increase or decrease the number
setting.
0
Tone
Set
Press Set.
Stop
Press Stop to return to standby.
4.
5.
Manual RX
Press Manual RX to put the fax in the manual receive mode
whenever you want to take advantage of the MAN/AUTO
SWITCH feature. (➞16-14)
7-6 Receiving Documents
Chapter 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Receiving Documents Manually with the
Optional Handset
When you use manual receiving, this means you can monitor all incom-
ing calls yourself by picking up the handset every time the fax rings. If
you pick up the handset and determine the call is from another person,
start your conversation. If you hear a slow beep tone, this means the call
is a fax transmission. To receive the document, just press Start/Scan and
then hang up the handset.
The receiving speed is 14400 bps or less when receiving manually.
Receiving a Document Manually at the Fax
Follow this procedure to receive a document manually at the fax.
•Before you can use this feature, you must install the optional handset
kit or a regular telephone. (➞2-38) Make sure the document is not set
on the ADF.
•If you have installed the optional Dual-line Upgrade Kit, when the fax
unit receives a document on Line 2 it will switch to automatic receiving
regardless of whether the Manual RX lamp is on or off. (➞2-56)
Manual RX
Press Manual RX to set the fax in the manual receive mode. The
1.
Manual RX indicator should be on.
Every time you hear the telephone ring, pick up the handset.
2.
If you hear someone on the line, you can talk.
-if not-
If you hear a slow-beep tone, this means another fax is trying to
send you a document.
Chapter 7
Receiving Documents 7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Start / Scan
Press Start/Scan to start receiving the document. Then hang up the
handset by placing it back in the handset cradle. The fax will start
to receive the document.
3.
The fax will make a beeping sound if the handset is not com-
pletely on its handset cradle. This is called the offhook alarm. The
offhook alarm can be turned off. (➞16-6)
Receiving a Document Manually with an Extension
TelephonYeou can connect one extension telephone to the facsimile unit. (➞2-40)
When the telephone rings with the fax in the manual receive mode, you
can use the extension telephone to start receiving the document without
walking over to the fax machine. This is called remote receiving.
Make sure the extension telephone is connected properly. (➞2-40)
1.
2.
Manual RX
Check the operation panel and make sure the fax is in the manual
receive mode. The Manual RX indicator should be on. If it is off,
press Manual RX to turn on the indicator and switch the fax into the
manual receive mode.
When the connected extension phone rings, pick up the handset.
If you hear someone on the line, you can start talking to the other
party.
3.
-if not-
If you hear a slow beep, dial 25 on the extension telephone and
hang up to start receiving the document.
You can change the number for the remote receiving ID (00 to 99) or turn
the feature off. (➞7-9)
7-8 Receiving Documents
Chapter 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the Remote Receive ID
Follow this procedure to change the remote receive ID.
Open the RX SETTINGS menu.
1.
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
Data Registration.
Data
Registration
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
Set
Press Set.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
DATA REGISTRATION
4.RX SETTINGS
Set
Press Set.
RX SETTINGS
1.ECM RX
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
2.
3.
RX SETTINGS
3.REMOTE RX
Set
Press Set.
REMOTE RX
ON
If OFF is displayed, press the search buttons until you see ON.
Chapter 7
Receiving Documents 7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set
Press Set.
4.
REMOTE RX ID
25
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a new number (00
to 99) for the ID.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
-if not-
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
Press the search buttons to increase or decrease the number.
0
Tone
Set
Then press Set.
To turn off remote receiving
Press the search buttons in step 3 until you see the display below.
REMOTE RX
OFF
Set
Press Set.
Press Stop to return to standby.
Stop
5.
7-10 Receiving Documents
Chapter 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Canceling Receiving a Document
To Cancel Receiving on a Single-Line
Follow this procedure to cancel receiving a document.
Visually check the display to confirm that a document is being
1.
received.
12/31/1999 FRI 12:20
RECEIVE
5012
Stop
To cancel the reception, press Stop.
2.
The following message is displayed:
CANCEL DURING TX/RX?
YES=( )
NO=(#)
*
Press to cancel receiving the document or press # to let receiving
3.
or
*
continue. After you press an alarm sounds, document reception
*
is canceled, and the following messages are displayed.
12/31/1999 FRI 12:25
STOP KEY PRESSED
12/31/1999 FRI 12:25
TX/RX NO.
5012
If the receive report feature is on or set to PRINT ERROR ONLY,
an RX REPORT also prints. (➞16-8)
PRINTING REPORT
Chapter 7
Receiving Documents 7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12/31/1999 12:50 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE,INC.
001
*********************
RX REPORT
***
***
*********************
INCOMPLETE RECEPTION
TX/RX NO
5005
CONNECTION TEL
CONNECTION ID
ST. TIME
1
213 978 3314
BELZER,INC.
12/31 12:49
USAGE
PGS.
T
00'20
0
RESULT
NG
STOP
Then the fax returns to standby.
To Cancel Receiving on a Dual-Line
If you have installed the Dual-line Upgrade Kit and both lines are in use
at the same time and you want to select a transmission which you want
to cancel, follow this procedure.
Press the search buttons to view the displays for each transaction.
1.
12/31/1999 FRI 12:20
RECEIVE
12/31/1999 FRI 12:20
RECEIVE
If you are using direct sending, you cannot change the line.
Stop
Press Stop.
2.
CANCEL DURING TX/RX?
YES=( ) NO=(#)
*
7-12 Receiving Documents
Chapter 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press to cancel receiving the document or press # if you change
3.
or
*
your mind and do not want to cancel. After you press an alarm
*
sounds, document reception is canceled, and the following
messages are displayed.
12/31/1999 FRI 12:21
STOP KEY PRESSED
12/31/1999 FRI 12:21
RECEIVE
5012
If the receive report feature is on or set to PRINT ERROR ONLY,
an RX REPORT also prints. (➞16-8)
PRINTING REPORT
Transferring Documents
The transfer mode tells the fax to receive documents and then transfer
them automatically to a fax at your home or at another work site. The
day and time for the fax unit to switch to the transfer mode can be preset.
This feature is especially convenient for receiving important documents
coming from countries overseas several time zones removed from your
own.
Before You Set Up Document Transfer
Note these important points before you create a transfer setup file:
❏
❏
You can create only one transfer setup file.
In order for the fax unit to transfer documents to a destination you
must enter the destination telephone number of the fax unit with a
speed dialing button. This means the destination fax unit must be
registered on the fax for a One-touch Speed Dialing button or a
Coded Speed Dialing code. (➞4-6, 4-15)
❏
You can set the fax to transfer documents only from selected origina-
tors. In order to select an originator, you have to register the tele-
phone number of the originator’s fax unit on your fax unit for a One-
touch Speed Dialing button or a three-digit Coded Speed Dialing
code. (➞4-6, 4-15)
Chapter 7
Receiving Documents 7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting UFpoltlohwethFeapxrocfeodrurDe boeclouwmtoecrneatteTarafilnesfofresrwitching the fax auto-
matically into the transfer mode.
Open the TRANSFER menu.
1.
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
Data Registration.
Data
Registration
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
Set
Set
Set
Press Set.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
DATA REGISTRATION
6.FILE SETTINGS
Press Set.
FILE SETTINGS
1.CONFID. MAILBOX
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
FILE SETTINGS
6.TRANSFER
Press Set.
TRANSFER
1.SETUP FILE
7-14 Receiving Documents
Chapter 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set
Press Set. Then press the search buttons to scroll the display so
2.
you can see each setting.
SETUP FILE
1.FILE NAME
SETUP FILE
6.PRINT RX DOC.
Set
Press Set then follow the summary in the table below to perform
3.
4.
the settings.
Stop
Press Stop to return to standby.
Transfer Setup Summary
The default settings, shown in bold below, remain in effect unless
you change them.
1.FILE NAME
Enter a file name up to 24 characters long.
2.SELECT LOCATIONS Select the numbers of the fax machines where you want
documents transferred.
TEL =
Close the One-touch Speed Dialing panels
and press a One-touch Speed Dialing button
or press the Coded Dial button followed by a
three-digit code for the Coded Speed Dialing
number to enter the number of the fax
machine where you want documents trans-
ferred. The telephone number of the destination
fax must be registered for One-touch or Coded
Speed Dialing on your fax.
3.PASSWORD
0000-9999
Enter a four-digit number (0000-9999) to protect the transfer
file settings. Use of a password is recommended. This operation
password protects the transfer file from unauthorized access
to your settings. You will also need to enter this password
when you put the fax in the document transfer mode.
Chapter 7
Receiving Documents 7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transfer Setup Summary (Cont'd)
4.SELECT ORIG UNIT Allows you to set the fax to receive and relay documents
only from originator fax units that you designate.
OFF
All fax transmissions are received and
transferred.
ON
The fax machine receives and transfers
transmissions only from fax units that you
designate by fax telephone number.
TEL = Press the One-touch Speed Dialing button or
press the Coded Dial button followed by the
three-digit code to designate the originator
fax machines for receive and transfer. The
telephone number of the originator fax must be
registered for One-touch or Coded Speed Dialing
on your fax.
5.TIME SETUP*
Sets the time to move the fax into and out of the transfer
mode. If you do not set the timer, you can still switch the fax
into the transfer mode manually.
1.START TIME
Set a time to move the fax automatically into the transfer
mode.
EVERY DAY
:
Sets the fax to move into the transfer mode
every day. You can set up to 5 starting times
for every day of the week.
SELECT DAYS
1.SUN to 7.SAT Sets the fax to move into the transfer mode
only on selected days of the week.
:
You can set up to 5 starting times for the
selected days.
2.END TIME
Sets the time for the fax to leave the transfer mode and
return to the normal mode.
EVERY DAY
:
Sets the fax to move out of the transfer mode
every day. You can set up to 5 end times for
every day of the week.
SELECT DAYS
1.SUN to 7.SAT Sets the fax to move out of the transfer mode
:
on selected days of the week. You can set up
to 5 end times for the selected days.
*The following settings are valid: You can set EVERY DAY for the start time and then use SELECT DAYS to set end times.
You can also set SELECT DAYS for start times and then use the EVERY DAY setting for the end time. However, you cannot
set both EVERY DAY and SELECT DAYS for the start time or end time.
7-16 Receiving Documents
Chapter 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transfer Setup Summary (Cont'd)
6.PRINT RX DOC.
Sets the fax to print a copy of the transferred document at the
transfer unit.
OFF
Received and transferred documents are not
printed at the transfer unit.
ON
A copy of every document received and
transferred is printed at the transfer unit.
# OF RX COPIES To enter the number of copies (01-99) use the
numeric keypad to enter the number or
press the search buttons to increase or
decrease the number and press Set.
Turning the Transfer Mode ON and OFF
You can use this procedure to move the fax into and out of the transfer
mode if the timer has not been set to switch the fax in and out of the
transfer mode automatically. If the timer has been set to move the fax
into and out of the transfer mode automatically, you can still use this
procedure to put the fax in the transfer mode before the timer switches
the fax into the transfer mode.
Turning Transfer Mode ON
Follow this procedure to turn the transfer mode on manually at any time.
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
1.
2.
Transfer.
Transfer
PASSWORD
_
Set
ABC
DEF
If you have registered a password, use the buttons on the numeric
1
GHI
2
3
MNO
keypad to enter your four-digit password, then press Set.
JKL
4
PRS
5
6
WXY
TUV
TRANSFER
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
The fax is now in the transfer mode and will transfer documents
to the destinations you specified in the transfer setup file.
Chapter 7
Receiving Documents 7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning Transfer Mode OFF
Follow this procedure to turn the transfer mode off manually at any time.
TRANSFER
Transfer
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
1.
2.
Transfer.
PASSWORD
_
Set
ABC
DEF
If you have registered a password, use the numeric keypad to
enter your four-digit password, then press Set.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
12/31/1999 FRI 08:30
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
The fax is now in the standby mode and is ready for normal
operation.
Changing the Transfer Settings
Follow this procedure to change settings in the transfer setup file.
Open the TRANSFER menu. (➞7-14)
1.
2.
3.
TRANSFER
1.SETUP FILE
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
TRANSFER
2.CHANGE DATA
Set
Press Set.
CHANGE DATA
PASSWORD
_
If you have not set the password, you can skip the next step.
7-18 Receiving Documents
Chapter 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit
password protecting the transfer setup file. Then press Set.
4.
5.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
Press the search buttons to display the desired setting.
CHANGE DATA
1.FILE NAME
CHANGE DATA
6.PRINT RX DOC.
Set
With the setting you want to change on the display, press Set.
6.
7.
To change the settings, follow the same procedure you used to set
up the transfer setup file. (➞7-15)
• To delete any settings, press Clear and press Set.
• To change the password, enter the old password first, and press Set.
Then enter the new password.
Stop
Press Stop to return to standby.
8.
Chapter 7
Receiving Documents 7-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Canceling the Transfer Settings
Follow this procedure to delete the transfer setup file and cancel the
transfer settings.
Open the TRANSFER menu. (➞7-14)
1.
2.
3.
TRANSFER
1.SETUP FILE
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
TRANSFER
3.DELETE FILE
Set
Press Set.
DELETE FILE
PASSWORD
_
If you have not set the password, you can skip the next step.
Set
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit
password and press Set.
4.
5.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
DELETE FILE
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
FILE DELETED
0
Tone
Stop
Press Stop to return to standby.
7-20 Receiving Documents
Chapter 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
Using the Memory Features
This chapter shows you how to use the memory features of the fax unit.
Some operations require that a document resides in the memory before it
is sent. For example, if you scan a document and set the timer, it will wait
in the memory until it is time for the fax to send the document.
If you scan a document for polling sending, the document will wait in
the memory until it is requested for sending by a polling request from
another fax. While such documents are residing in memory, you can
view their transaction numbers, list them in a printout, delete them
before they are sent, or re-route them to another destination.
❏ When the Fax Displays RECEIVED IN MEMORY .............................. 8-2
❏ Displaying the Transaction History ....................................................... 8-3
❏ Printing a Memory List ............................................................................ 8-5
❏ Printing a Document in the Memory ..................................................... 8-6
❏ Sending a Document in Memory to a Different Destination .............. 8-7
❏ Erasing a Document from the Memory ................................................. 8-9
• Deleting a Document with the Delete File Button.......................... 8-9
• Deleting a Document with the Memory Reference Button ......... 8-10
❏ Setting Up and Using a Memory Box ...................................................8-11
• Before You Create Memory Boxes................................................... 8-12
• When You Create a Memory Box .................................................... 8-12
• Creating a Memory Box.................................................................... 8-14
• Changing the Memory Box Settings ............................................... 8-22
• Canceling a Memory Box ................................................................. 8-23
• Sending a Document Stored in the Memory Box ......................... 8-24
• Printing a Document Received in a Memory Box ........................ 8-25
❏ What Happens to Memory after a Power Failure .............................. 8-27
• How Your Registered Data Is Protected ........................................ 8-27
• About the Backup Battery ................................................................ 8-27
Chapter 8
Using the Memory Features 8-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the Fax Displays RECEIVED IN MEMORY
If paper or toner runs out while you are receiving a document or the fax
detects that the output tray is full, the fax will automatically store the
unprinted pages of the document in the memory and display these
messages:
RECEIVED IN MEMORY
RECEPTION OK
12/31/1999 FRI 12:30
TX/RX NO.
5033
Check the LCD display and the indicators on the left of the
display.
1.
Rec. Paper
Add paper to the paper cassettes, if the Rec. Paper indicator is on
and if you see this message: (➞2-31)
SUPPLY REC. PAPER
Change
Cartridge
Replace the toner cartridge if the Change Cartridge indicator is on
and if you see this message: (➞15-17)
REPLACE CARTRIDGE
Pick up the printed paper on the output trays if you see this
message:
OUTPUT TRAY FULL
As soon as you close the re-filled paper cassette, close the printer
cover over the newly installed toner cartridge, or pick up the
printed pages on the tray, the pages stored in the memory are
printed.
2.
8-2 Using the Memory Features
Chapter 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❏
❏
As each page is printed, it is deleted from the memory.
If the memory becomes full, you will not be able to receive the
remaining pages. Contact the other party and request to send
the document again.
®
❏
The LASER CLASS 3170/3170MS can store up to approxi-
mately 192 letter-size pages* in the memory. The LASER
pages* ®in the memory. With the optional memory kit, the
CLASS 3175 can store up to approximately 448 letter-size
704 pages in the® memory. For details about the optional
LASER CLASS 3170 Series can receive up to approximately
memory kits, contact your authorized Canon dealer.
❏
A memory backup function is provided to save the contents of
the memory for up to approximately 12 hours during a power
failure.
*Based on CCITT/ITU-T No. 1 Chart, Standard Mode.
Displaying the Transaction History
Follow this procedure to display results of transactions. This feature is
convenient when you want to check the status of a transaction without
printing an activity management report.
Transaction
Press Transaction.
1.
The most recent transmission is displayed first.
14:08 0015 TX OK
CANON CANADA
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels.
2.
Press the up and down arrows to view the list of transactions.
❏
All transmissions are displayed first, then the receptions are
displayed.
Chapter 8
Using the Memory Features 8-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❏
❏
The transaction numbers for documents sent, numbered 0001
to 4999, are displayed then the transaction numbers for
documents received, numbered 5001 to 9999, are displayed.
The transaction numbers are stored in descending order, from
the larger numbers to the smaller numbers.
Note the following notations used to tell you about the status
of the transaction:
Notation Meaning
OK
NG
Document transaction has been completed.
Transaction failed.
HOLDNG Document is being held in the memory for delayed
sending.
TRANSM Document is currently being sent.
- - : - -
No time is displayed for a document currently being
sent or being stored in the memory for pending
transmission.
Stop
Press Stop to return to standby.
3.
8-4 Using the Memory Features
Chapter 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing a Memory List
Follow this procedure to print a list of all documents currently stored in
the memory.
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
1.
Memory Reference.
Memory
Reference
If no documents are currently stored in the memory, you will see
this message:
NO DOC. STORED
If documents are stored in the memory the first item on the
MEMORY REFERENCE menu is displayed.
MEMORY REFERENCE
1.DOC. MEMORY LIST
Set
Press Set to start printing the memory list.
2.
PRINTING REPORT
12/31/1999 13:01 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE,INC.
001
****************************
DOC. MEMORY LIST
***
***
****************************
TX/RX NO
0011
MODE
CONNECTION TEL/ID
PGS.
2
SET TIME
12/31 13:00
ST. TIME
23:30
SENDER NAME
TRANSMIT
[*002]HUNT INVESTMENTS
R.LOUIS
Chapter 8
Using the Memory Features 8-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing a Document in the Memory
Follow this procedure to print a document in the memory.
To select a document for printing, you must know its transaction num-
ber. You may want to print a memory list for reference. (➞8-5)
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
1.
Memory Reference.
Memory
Reference
MEMORY REFERENCE
1.DOC. MEMORY LIST
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
2.
3.
MEMORY REFERENCE
2.PRINT DOCUMENT
Set
Press Set to set up to print.
PRINT DOCUMENT
TX/RX NO.
0002
If you want to know the destination telephone number and time of the
document, press the cursor buttons (f e).
Press the search buttons to display the transaction number of the
document you want to print. Then press Set.
If you have set the operation password, enter the password here.
Set
PRINT 1ST PG ONLY?
YES=( ) NO=(#)
*
Press to print only the first page of a multi-page document, or
*
or
press # to print the entire document.
If you have set the operation password, enter the password here.
TX/RX NO.
PRINTING
0358
P.001/002
Stop
Press Stop to return to standby.
4.
8-6 Using the Memory Features
Chapter 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending a Document in Memory to a Different
Destination
Follow this procedure to select another destination for a document
waiting to be polled.
To select a document for sending, you must know its transaction number.
You may want to print a memory list for reference. (➞8-5)
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
1.
Memory Reference.
Memory
Reference
MEMORY REFERENCE
1.DOC. MEMORY LIST
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
2.
3.
MEMORY REFERENCE
3.RESEND DOCUMENT
Set
Press Set then select the document you want to send.
RESEND DOCUMENT
TX/RX NO.
5010
If you want to know the destination telephone number and time of the
document, press the cursor buttons (f e).
Press the search buttons to display the transaction number of the
4.
document you want to send. Then press Set.
Set
RESEND DOCUMENT
PASSWORD
_
If you have not set the operation password for the document
stored in memory, you can skip the next step.
Chapter 8
Using the Memory Features 8-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set
ABC
DEF
Enter the four-digit password and press Set.
5.
6.
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
RESEND DOCUMENT
SELECT LOCATIONS
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
TEL =
Tone
Dial the fax number.
Set
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to dial the telephone
number and press Set.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
-if not-
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Use One-touch Speed Dialing, Coded Speed Dialing, or Group
Dialing to dial the number.
Tone
Set
Press Set.
RESEND DOCUMENT
SENDER’S NAME
SENDER’S NAME
CANON, INC.
Enter the sender’s name.
7.
TTI Selector
Press TTI Selector and keep pressing it until the sender’s name you
want appears in the display. You can also use the search buttons to
scroll up and down the TTI list.
SENDER’S NAME
06
CANON: J.SMITH
Set
Press Set. The fax sends the document to the number you dialed.
8-8 Using the Memory Features
Chapter 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Erasing a Document from the Memory
Follow this procedure to erase a document from the memory. To delete a
document from the memory, you can use the Delete File button or the
Memory Reference button.
To select a document for deletion, you must know its transaction num-
ber. You may want to print a memory list for reference. (➞8-5)
Deleting a Document with the Delete File Button
Delete File
Press Delete File.
1.
DELETE DOCUMENT
TX/RX NO.
0057
If you want to know the destination telephone number and time of the
document, press the cursor buttons (f e) before pressing Set.
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels.
2.
Press the search buttons to display the transaction number of the
3.
document you want to delete. Then press Set.
Set
DELETE DOCUMENT
PASSWORD
_
If you have not set the operation password for the document
stored in memory, you can skip the next step.
Set
ABC
DEF
Enter the four-digit password and press Set.
4.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
OK TO DELETE?
YES=( )
NO=(#)
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
*
0
Tone
Chapter 8
Using the Memory Features 8-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press to delete the selected document or press # to cancel the
5.
6.
*
deletion. After you press the document is erased.
*
TX/RX NO.
0004
ERASING END
Stop
Press Stop to return to standby.
Deleting a Document with the Memory Reference Button
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
1.
Memory Reference.
Memory
Reference
MEMORY REFERENCE
1.DOC. MEMORY LIST
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
2.
3.
MEMORY REFERENCE
4.DELETE DOCUMENT
Set
Press Set.
DELETE DOCUMENT
TX/RX NO.
0001
If you want to know the destination telephone number and time of the
document, press the cursor buttons (f e) before pressing Set. If the
transaction is displayed with a # mark, the document is being held in the
memory for re-dialing and sending.
Press the search buttons to display the transaction number of the
4.
document that you want to delete. Then press Set.
Set
DELETE DOCUMENT
PASSWORD
_
If you have not set the operation password for the document
stored in memory, you can skip the next step.
8-10 Using the Memory Features
Chapter 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set
ABC
DEF
Enter the four-digit password and press Set.
5.
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
OK TO DELETE?
YES=( )
NO=(#)
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
*
0
Tone
Press to delete the selected document or press # to cancel the
6.
7.
*
deletion. After you press , the document is erased.
*
TX/RX NO.
0004
ERASING END
Stop
Press Stop to return to standby.
Setting Up and Using a Memory Box
In this section we will show you how to set up a memory box and use it
to send and receive documents. A memory box is a location in the
memory you can create to store scanned or received documents for
printing or transmitting to other destinations. The main advantage to
using the memory box for sending and receiving is that you can handle
all transmissions with ITU-T passwords and subaddresses.
The ITU-T subaddress and password serve the same purpose as the bank
account number and a personal identification number on your bank
card. Just as you cannot complete a bank transaction without your
account number and your personal identification number, you cannot
complete a memory box facsimile transaction if the subaddress and
password do not match.
A subaddress or password can be up to 20 digits long and consists of
numbers, , #, or spaces.
*
Chapter 8
Using the Memory Features 8-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before You Create Memory Boxes
Before you set up a memory box, there are a few things you should know
about the other party’s fax machine to ensure efficient transactions.
You have to know how the other party is using the subaddress and
password:
❏
❏
❏
If the other party has set a subaddress and password, you must
register both a subaddress and password for the memory box.
If the other party has set a subaddress only, then you must also
register a matching subaddress.
If the other party has set a password only, inform them that they
must register a subaddress, or a subaddress and password. Both fax
units must register an ITU-T subaddress.
For the most efficient use of the memory box, register the numbers of all
parties who will be receiving your documents or sending you documents
for a One-touch or Coded Speed Dialing number.
When You Create a Memory Box
This is a brief summary of what to do when you create or change settings
for a memory box.
Access settings
Main settings
SET BOX # 00
PASSWORD
1. FILE NAME
2. PASSWORD
3. SUBADDRESS
4. TX PASSWORD
5. RX PASSWORD
Feature settings 6. RECEIVE 7. TRANSMIT 8. POLLING TX
8-12 Using the Memory Features
Chapter 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Access Settings
SET BOX A two-digit code (00-99) you assign to the box to select it
when you need to scan documents into the box or to open it to view or
change the settings. The box number and file name appear in printed
reports for reference.
PASSWORD If you set a password when you create the memory box
(below 2.PASSWORD), you will have to enter the password to view or
change the rest of the settings afterwards.
Main Settings
1.FILE NAME A personal name you can assign to the memory box to
identify it in printed reports.
2.PASSWORD A four-digit password you assign to the memory box to
protect the settings from unauthorized access. You must also use this
password and the box number to print documents stored in the memory
box. Assigning a password is optional, but strongly recommended,
especially if you want to keep the memory box setup and the documents
you receive confidential.
3.SUBADDRESS This is the ITU-T subaddress.
4.TX PASSWORD This is your TX password. TX password is only for
polling sending. Your TX password must match the ITU-T password
with which the other party calls you. If they do not match the other party
will not receive your document.
5.RX PASSWORD This is your RX password. Your RX password must
match the ITU-T password assigned to documents that you receive. If the
passwords do not match, your fax will not receive the document.
TX PASSWORD
ITU-T PASSWORD
Other party’s fax
LASER CLASS®
3170 Series
RX PASSWORD
ITU-T PASSWORD
The main settings apply to all three features below, they being RECEIVE,
TRANSMIT, and POLLING TX.
Chapter 8
Using the Memory Features 8-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Feature Settings
6.RECEIVE Allows you to set up how documents are handled in the
memory box when they are received. You can set the memory box to
check the ID (telephone number) of the originator, and specify that the
received document be held in the memory box and not printed.
7.TRANSMIT Allows you to set up memory box transmission. You
can set the memory box to relay documents immediately or store them in
the memory box. You can set the timer for all documents set for sending
from the memory box.
8.POLLING TX Allows you to set up the memory box as a polling
station to hold scanned or received documents in the memory box and
wait for a polling request from another fax. After the subaddress and
passwords are matched, the stored documents are sent to the polling fax.
Creating FaolMlowemthios prryocBedouxre to create a memory box.
Open the MEMORY BOX menu.
1.
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
Data Registration.
Data
Registration
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
Set
Press Set.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
DATA REGISTRATION
6.FILE SETTINGS
Set
Press Set.
FILE SETTINGS
1.CONFID. MAILBOX
8-14 Using the Memory Features
Chapter 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
FILE SETTINGS
3.MEMORY BOX
Set
Press Set.
MEMORY BOX
1.SETUP FILE
Give the memory box a number.
Press Set.
2.
3.
Set
SETUP FILE
SET BOX #
00
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a two-digit code
for the memory box.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
❏
You can enter a number from 00 to 99 for the memory box
number.
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
You can also use the search buttons to change the number. Press
the down arrow to increase the number and the up arrow to
decrease the number.
0
Tone
SETUP FILE
SET BOX #
33
Set
Press Set.
Press the search buttons to display the desired setting.
SETUP FILE
1.FILE NAME
SETUP FILE
8.POLLING TX
Chapter 8
Using the Memory Features 8-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set
With the item displayed that you want to set press Set. Then
4.
5.
perform the settings as described in the summary below.
Stop
When you are finished setting up the memory box, press Stop to
return to standby.
Memory Box Setup Summary
The default settings, shown in bold, remain in effect unless you change them.
1.FILE NAME
2.PASSWORD
NAME
This setting allows you to enter a personal name for
the memory box that will appear in printed reports.
Enter a name of up to 24 characters and press Set.
0000 to 9999
This operation password protects your memory box
settings. After you set this password, you will have
to enter the password before you can view or change
the settings for the memory box. You will also have
to enter this password to print a document received
in the memory box.
3.SUBADDRESS
4.TX PASSWORD
0-9, , #, spaces (20 digits)
*
The ITU-T subaddress for the memory box. This
setting is not optional. You must enter a subaddress
here in order to use the memory box. Enter a
subaddress of up to 20 digits long. In addition to
numbers, the subaddress may include , #, and
*
spaces.
0-9, , #, spaces (20 digits)
*
The ITU-T standard TX password for your memory
box. TX password is only for polling sending. This
password must match the ITU-T password with
which the other party calls you in order for the
transaction to succeed. If your TX password does not
match the ITU-T password on the other fax machine,
your document will not be received by the other
party’s fax.
8-16 Using the Memory Features
Chapter 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Box Setup Summary (Cont'd)
5.RX PASSWORD
0-9, , #, spaces (20 digits)
*
The ITU-T standard RX password for your memory
box. This password must match the ITU-T password
sent with a document to your fax in order for the
transaction to succeed. If your RX password does not
match the TX password sent with the document from
the other party’s fax, your fax will not receive the
document.
6.RECEIVE
Determines whether or not the document is received
in the memory box and how it is received.
NO
Documents are not received in the
memory box.
YES
Documents are received in the memory
box and you can do some additional
settings to determine how they are
received. If selected, you can turn on
checking the originator, printing the
document, and printing method.
1.SELECT ORIG UNIT
Determines whether your fax checks to make sure the
originator of the transmission is registered on your
fax. To be registered on your fax, the originator’s
telephone number must be registered for a One-touch
or Coded Speed Dialing button on your fax unit.
OFF
Your fax receives an incoming document
even if the originator is not registered on
your fax.
ON
Your fax will receive the document only
if the originator is registered for a One-
Touch or Coded Speed Dialing button
on your fax unit.
TEL = After you turn SELECT ORIG UNIT on,
press the appropriate One-touch Speed
Dialing button or press the Coded Dial
button followed by the appropriate
three-digit code to register the number
of the originator and press Set. In order
to register the originator’s telephone
number, the number must be registered for a
One-touch or Coded Speed Dialing button.
Chapter 8
Using the Memory Features 8-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Box Setup Summary (Cont'd)
2.PRINT RX DOC.
Determines whether to print a received document.
ON
Documents will be printed when
they are received in the memory
box and you can set how they will
be printed.
OFF
Documents received in the
memory box are not printed.
1.PRINT METHOD If you turn on PRINT RX DOC., you can also set the
print method.
AUTO
A document will print automati-
cally as soon as it is received in the
memory box.
MAN.
You will have to manually print
documents received in the memory
box.
2.# OF RX COPIES
01 COPIES If you turn on PRINT RX DOC., use
this setting to specify the number of
copies you want to print (01-99).
7.TRANSMIT
Determines whether to transmit documents from the
memory box and how they are to be transmitted.
NO
Documents are not transmitted
from the memory box.
YES
Documents are transmitted from
the memory box.
1.SELECT LOCATIONS Allows you to select the destinations of the docu-
ments to be transmitted from the memory box. Press
the appropriate One-touch button or press the Coded
Dial button followed by the appropriate three-digit
code to enter numbers for dialing.
8-18 Using the Memory Features
Chapter 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Box Setup Summary (Cont'd)
2.TX DOCUMENT
Determines whether to (1) transmit documents
received in the memory box from another fax or (2)
transmit documents scanned into the memory box.
1.RECEIVED
DOCUMENT
Sets the memory box to receive documents from
other fax units and transmit them to other destina-
tions.
TRANSMIT
Documents received in the
memory box can be transmitted
to other destinations.
NOT TRANSMIT Documents received in the
memory box cannot be transmit-
ted to other destinations.
TX REPORT
If you turn on TRANSMIT for RECEIVED DOCU-
MENT, you can set the memory box to send a
transaction report to the originator every time it
sends a received document to another destination.
This setting is effective only when 6.RECEIVE –
1.SELECT ORIG UNIT is ON.
TRANSMIT
A transaction report for the
transmission is sent to the origi-
nator.
NOT TRANSMIT A transaction report for the
transmission is not sent to the
originator.
2.SCAN
Determines whether to transmit documents scanned
in the memory box.
DOCUMENT
TRANSMIT
Documents scanned into the
memory box are transmitted.
NOT TRANSMIT Documents scanned into the
memory box are not transmitted.
Chapter 8
Using the Memory Features 8-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Box Setup Summary (Cont'd)
3.TX START TIME
Allows you to set the timer for the transmission of a
document received or scanned into the memory.
EVERYDAY
Enter the time (in 24-hour format) that you want to
transmit the documents from the memory box. You
can set up to 5 times to transmit documents every day.
SELECT DAYS
8.POLLING TX
Select one or more days of the week to transmit
documents from the memory box. Enter the time (in
24-hour format) that you want to transmit the
documents from the memory box. You can set up to 5
times for each day you select.
Determines whether the memory box is to be used as
a polling box. A polling box holds a document in the
memory so that the fax is polled by another fax unit
requesting that the document be sent.
NO
The memory box is not set up as a
polling box. The documents
received or scanned into the
memory box are not sent in re-
sponse to a polling request from
another fax unit.
YES
The memory box is set up as a
polling box. The documents
received or scanned into the
memory box are sent in response to
a polling request from another fax
unit.
1.ERASE AFTER TX
Determines whether the document is erased from the
memory after it is sent in response to a polling
request.
ON
The document is erased after it is
sent. The memory box is polled
and sends the document only once.
OFF
The document is not erased after it
is sent. The memory box can be
polled to send the document
indefinitely.
8-20 Using the Memory Features
Chapter 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Box Setup Summary (Cont'd)
2.TX DOCUMENT
This setting determines which document is to be sent
when the memory box is polled: (1) only documents
received in the memory box or (2) only documents
scanned into the memory box.
1.RECEIVED
DOCUMENT
Determines whether to transmit the documents
received in the memory box when the memory box is
polled.
TRANSMIT
When the memory box is polled,
documents received from other
fax units and stored into the
memory box are sent.
NOT TRANSMIT When the memory box is polled,
documents received from other
fax units and stored into the
memory box are not sent.
2.SCAN
Determines whether to transmit the documents
scanned into the memory box when the memory box
is polled.
DOCUMENT
TRANSMIT
When the memory box is polled,
documents scanned into the
memory box are sent.
NOT TRANSMIT When the memory box is polled,
documents scanned into the
memory box are not sent.
Chapter 8
Using the Memory Features 8-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the Memory Box Settings
Follow this procedure to change the memory box settings.
Open the MEMORY BOX menu. (➞8-14)
1.
MEMORY BOX
1.SETUP FILE
Press the search buttons to display until you see the display
below.
2.
MEMORY BOX
2.CHANGE DATA
Set
Press Set.
3.
4.
CHANGE DATA
SET BOX #
00
Set
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the number of the
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
box you want to change and press Set.
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
CHANGE DATA
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
PASSWORD
_
0
Tone
If you have not set the operation password, you can skip the next
step.
Set
ABC
DEF
Enter the four-digit password protecting the memory box settings
5.
6.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
and press Set.
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
Press the search buttons to display the setting you want to change.
CHANGE DATA
1.FILE NAME
CHANGE DATA
8.POLLING TX
8-22 Using the Memory Features
Chapter 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set
With the setting you want to change on the display, press Set.
7.
8.
Follow the same procedures you used to set the initial settings or
change the defaults. (➞8-16)
If you want to change the operation password, first you will have to
enter the old password (it will not be displayed) and then enter the new
password (it will be displayed as you enter it).
Stop
When you are finished making changes, press Stop to return to
9.
standby.
Canceling a Memory Box
Follow this procedure to cancel a memory box.
Open the MEMORY BOX menu. (➞8-14)
1.
2.
3.
4.
MEMORY BOX
1.SETUP FILE
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
MEMORY BOX
3.DELETE FILE
Set
Press Set.
DELETE FILE
SET BOX #
00
Set
ABC
DEF
Enter the number of the box you want to delete and press Set.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
DELETE FILE
PASSWORD
_
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
If you have not set the operation password, you can skip the next
Tone
step.
Chapter 8
Using the Memory Features 8-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set
ABC
DEF
Enter the four-digit password protecting the memory box settings
and press Set.
5.
6.
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
DELETE FILE
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
FILE DELETED
0
Tone
Stop
Press Stop to return to standby.
Sending a Document Stored in the Memory Box
Follow this procedure to store a document in the memory box for
sending according to the memory box setup. (➞8-14)
Set the document on the fax. (➞6-3)
1.
Set the document resolution, contrast, and document type. (➞6-4)
You can also select a sender’s name with the TTI Selector. (➞6-6)
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
2.
Memory Box.
Memory Box
MEMORY BOX
1.MEMORY BOX TX
Set
Press Set.
3.
4.
SUBADDRESS
Set
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the ITU-T
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
subaddress of the memory box. Then press Set.
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
MEMORY BOX TX
SENDER’S NAME
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
SENDER’S NAME
CANON, INC.
8-24 Using the Memory Features
Chapter 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TTI Selector
Press TTI Selector until you see the sender name you want to use.
5.
6.
You can also use the search buttons to scroll up and down the TTI
list.
SENDER’S NAME
01
R.LOUIS
Set
Press Set.
TRANSMIT
0037
SCANNING DOC. P.001
The fax begins to scan the document.
The document is stored in the memory box and will be sent
according to the memory box settings. (➞8-14)
Printing a Document Received in a Memory Box
Follow this procedure to print a document that has been received and
stored in a memory box according to the memory box setup. (➞8-14)
You can use this procedure to print a document from the memory box
only after you have set PRINT RX DOC. to ON and set PRINT METHOD
to MAN. under the RECEIVE item of the memory box setup.
After the fax receives a document in a memory box, the fax displays a
message and prints a report, unless this feature has been turned off. (➞16-8)
PRINTING REPORT
12/31/1999 13:29 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE,INC.
001
*****************************
MEMORY BOX REPORT
***
***
*****************************
BOX
#
#66
FILE NAME
TX/RX NO
R.LOUIS
5006
CONNECTION TEL
SUBADDRESS
CONNECTION ID
ST. TIME
1
213 978 3314
0000
BELZER,INC.
12/31 13:29
USAGE
PGS.
T
00'18
1
RESULT
OK
Chapter 8
Using the Memory Features 8-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A message will alternate with the standby display (date and time) until
you print the document received in the memory box.
RECEIVED IN MEM. BOX
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
1.
Memory Box.
MEMORY BOX
Memory Box
1.MEMORY BOX TX
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
2.
3.
4.
MEMORY BOX
2.MEMORY BOX RX
Set
Press Set.
SUBADDRESS
Set
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the ITU-T
subaddress of the memory box holding the document you want to
print. Then press Set.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
MEMORY BOX RX
0
PASSWORD
_
Tone
If you have not set the operation password, the documents starts
printing.
Set
ABC
DEF
Enter the four-digit operation password that protects the memory
5.
1
2
3
box setup and press Set.
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
After you enter the operation password, the document starts
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
printing.
0
Tone
MEMORY BOX RX
PRINTING
P.001/002
8-26 Using the Memory Features
Chapter 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Happens to Memory after a Power Failure
If power to the fax is lost due to a power failure, or if the fax is acciden-
tally unplugged, a built-in battery keeps a trickle of current supplied to
the memory so all the documents currently stored in the memory can be
saved for up to approximately 12 hours.
How Your Registered Data Is Protected
This is what happens when the fax is disconnected:
❏
The backup battery takes over and keeps a trickle of current flowing
to the memory in order to preserve all the documents in the memory
waiting to be sent or printed.
❏
However, if the fax is left off for longer than approximately 12 hours,
all documents in the fax memory will be lost after the battery runs
down, and as soon as power is restored to the fax a Memory Clear
Report is printed that shows you what documents were erased.
(➞14-20)
❏
❏
Because your user data and speed dialing settings are constantly
refreshed by a lithium battery, they will not be lost as a result of a
power failure, even if power to the fax is cut off for longer than
approximately 12 hours.
When many documents are stored in the fax memory, the fax may
need about 2 minutes to recover after power is restored to the fax.
About the Backup Battery
Here is a list of things to keep in mind about the backup battery.
❏
The backup battery that preserves document data in the memory for
up to 12 hours in case of a power loss is a rechargeable battery, and it
requires about 1 day to reach full charge after power to the fax unit is
restored.
❏
Frequently disconnecting the fax unit from the power source short-
ens the service life of the battery.
Chapter 8
Using the Memory Features 8-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❏
❏
To avoid shortening the backup battery service life, use the fax
within a temperature range of 50°F to 90.5°F (10°C to 32.5°C). If the
fax is used in an environment that is too hot or too cold, this can
shorten the service life of the backup battery.
If the backup battery cannot preserve data even after you plug in the
power source and the fax is left on for 1 day (24 hours), call for
service and have the backup battery replaced.
8-28 Using the Memory Features
Chapter 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9
Using a Relay Network
This chapter shows you how to relay documents and how to have
documents relayed for you.
You can set up your fax unit as a relay station to relay documents that
you receive, or you can send documents to another fax and have the
documents relayed for you.
❏ What is Relay Broadcasting? ................................................................... 9-2
❏ Setting Up and Using a Standard Relay Unit ....................................... 9-3
• Setting Your Fax as a Relay Unit ....................................................... 9-4
• Changing the Relay Broadcast Settings ........................................... 9-7
• Deleting the Relay Group................................................................... 9-9
❏ Sending a Document to a Relay Unit for Relay Broadcasting .......... 9-10
• Sending a Document to a Relay Unit with Speed Dialing .......... 9-12
• Sending with the Relay Broadcast Button ..................................... 9-12
Chapter 9
Using a Relay Network 9-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What is Relay Broadcasting?
In a relay broadcast, the originator fax unit sends a document over a long
distance to another fax called the relay unit. After the relay unit receives
your document, it automatically sends the document to several other fax
units in the local area. In this way you can send a document to several
fax units in the same locality with only one long distance transmission.
Originator
Relay Unit
In a relay network your fax unit can function as both an originator and a
relay unit. When your fax unit is the originator, it sends a document to a
relay unit from which the document is relayed to several destination in
the same locality. When your fax unit is the relay unit it receives a docu-
ment from another party and relays it to one or several other faxes in
your own locality.
9-2 Using a Relay Network
Chapter 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up and Using a Standard Relay Unit
In this section we will show you how to set up and manage a relay
network with the standard relay features provided on the fax.
Before you set up your fax to relay documents from the originator fax
unit, confirm the following points:
❏
❏
❏
Make sure your unit telephone number is correctly registered.
(➞3-13, 14-5)
Make sure the telephone number of the originator fax unit is regis-
tered on your fax for a speed dialing button. (➞14-2)
After your fax receives the document from the originators it will
relay the document to one or several destination units. Make sure the
telephone numbers of all the destination units are registered on your
unit for speed dialing buttons. (➞14-2)
❏
❏
Ask the originator if they would like to receive a report of successful
transmission after your fax relays the document.
Make sure the relay feature on your fax is turned on.
Follow the procedure in this section to set up your fax as a relay unit.
When your fax is the relay unit, it receives the document from the
originator and relays it to several other destinations.
Chapter 9
Using a Relay Network 9-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Your Fax as a Relay Unit
Follow this procedure to set your fax to participate in a relay network as
a relay unit.
Open the RELAY TX GROUP menu.
1.
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels and press
Data Registration.
Data
Registration
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
Set
Set
Set
Press Set.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
DATA REGISTRATION
6.FILE SETTINGS
Press Set.
FILE SETTINGS
1.CONFID. MAILBOX
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
FILE SETTINGS
2.RELAY TX GROUP
Press Set.
RELAY TX GROUP
1.SETUP FILE
9-4 Using a Relay Network
Chapter 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Give the relay group a number from 00 to 99.
2.
Set
Press Set.
SETUP FILE
SET RLY TX GROUP# 00
Set
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit
relay group number and press Set.
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
SETUP FILE
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
1.GROUP DIAL NAME
0
Tone
Use the search buttons to display all the items in the menu.
Set
With the item displayed that you want to set, press Set. Then
follow the instructions in the table below to set up the relay group.
Stop
When you are finished, press Stop.
Relay Group Setup Summary
The default settings, shown in bold, remain in effect unless you change
them.
1.GROUP DIAL NAME
Name (24 characters)
Enter a name for the relay group. The name can be up to 24-
characters long. Then press Set.
2.PASSWORD
0000-9999
A four-digit password protects the relay box settings you are
about to set up. After you set a password, you will have to enter it
every time you want to view or change these settings. Enter a
four-digit password and press Set.
3.SUBADDRESS
20 digits ( # spaces)
*
This is the ITU-T subaddress. Enter a number up to 20 digits long
(it can include spaces and the symbols and #).
*
Chapter 9
Using a Relay Network 9-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relay Group Setup Summary (Cont'd)
4.RX PASSWORD
20 digits ( # spaces)
*
When your fax is the relay unit, this ITU-T password must match
the ITU-T password of the document sent from the originator in
order for your fax to receive the document. Otherwise, your fax
will not receive the document. Enter a number up to 20 digits long
(it can include spaces and the symbols and #).
*
5.SELECT ORIG UNIT
When your fax is the relay unit, this feature forces your fax to
check the identity of the originator before it receives the document
for relay to other units.
ON
When your fax receives a document for relay,
it will check the identity of the originator
before it receives the document. In order for
this feature to perform correctly, the telephone
number of the originator unit must be registered
correctly for speed dialing on your fax unit.
TEL =
Press the One-touch Speed Dialing button or
press the Coded Dial button followed by the
three-digit code where the number for the
originator fax is registered and press Set.
OFF
Your fax will receive a document for relay
without checking the identity of the
originator.
6.PRINT RX DOC.
When your fax is the relay unit, this setting determines if your fax
unit prints a copy of every document that it relays.
OFF
Your fax does not print a copy of every
document it relays to other fax units.
ON
Your fax prints a copy of every document it
relays to other fax units.
# OF RX COPIES 01 COPIES
If you turn on PRINT RX
DOC., use this setting to
specify the number of copies
you want to print (01-99).
7.SELECT LOCATIONS
This item allows you to select the fax units to receive the docu-
ment your unit relays. The number of fax units to receive the document
must be registered for One-touch or Coded Speed Dialing. You cannot
enter a number with regular dialing.
TEL =
Close the One-touch Speed Dialing panels and
press the speed dialing buttons where the
numbers of the fax units to receive the relay
broadcast are registered then press Set. You
can select up to 200 destinations.
9-6 Using a Relay Network
Chapter 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relay Group Setup Summary (Cont'd)
8.TX REPORT
This feature determines if your fax unit returns a relay transmis-
sion report to the originator after your fax unit receives and relays
a document.
TRANSMIT
After your fax unit relays a document, it sends
a transmission report back to the originator. In
order for the feature to perform correctly, the
originator’s unit telephone number must be
registered on your fax for One-touch or Coded
Speed Dialing.
NOT
No relay transmission report is sent to the
TRANSMIT
originator after a document has been relayed.
9.TX START TIME
10.RELAY B’CAST
You can set your fax to hold documents and then relay them at a
preset time. If you do not set this item, all documents received for
relay are relayed immediately. If you want to use this feature,
press Set.
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the time in 24-
hour format. You can set up to 5 times to relay documents within a
24-hour period every day.
This feature switches relay broadcasting for this group on and off
without altering any of the other settings.
ON
Your fax unit receives and relays a document
set for relay broadcasting.
OFF
Your fax unit will not receive and relay a
document set for relay broadcasting.
Changing the Relay Broadcast Settings
Follow this procedure to change the relay broadcast settings.
❏
If you want to add to the list of fax units to receive relay broadcasts
from your fax unit, make sure that the numbers you want to add are
registered for One-touch or Coded Speed Dialing.
❏
If you want to set your fax unit to confirm the identity of the origina-
tor before it receives a document for relay broadcasting, make sure
the telephone number of the originator’s fax unit is registered for
One-touch or Coded Speed Dialing on your fax unit.
Chapter 9
Using a Relay Network 9-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Open the RELAY TX GROUP menu. (➞9-4)
1.
2.
3.
4.
RELAY TX GROUP
1.SETUP FILE
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
RELAY TX GROUP
2.CHANGE DATA
Set
Press Set.
CHANGE DATA
SET RLY TX GROUP# 00
Set
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the group num-
ber. Then press Set.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
CHANGE DATA
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
PASSWORD
_
0
Tone
If you have not set the operation password, you can skip the next
step.
Set
ABC
DEF
Enter the four-digit operation password and press Set.
5.
6.
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
CHANGE DATA
1.GROUP DIAL NAME
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
Press the search buttons to display the item you want to change
and press Set.
Set
❏
To change the settings for an item, follow the same procedure
you used for initial setup of the relay group. (➞9-5)
❏
To delete an item, press Clear and then press Set.
9-8 Using a Relay Network
Chapter 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❏
❏
To turn off the relay feature for the group and retain the setup,
press the search buttons to display 10.RELAY B’CAST, press
Set, and turn this feature off. You do not have to delete the
relay group to disable it temporarily.
To change the operation password, first you have to enter the
old password (it is not displayed as you enter it) and then you
have to enter the new password (it is displayed as you enter
it).
Stop
When you are finished making changes, press Stop to return to
7.
standby.
Deleting the Relay Group
Follow this procedure to delete the relay group and all of its settings.
Open the RELAY TX GROUP menu. (➞9-4)
1.
RELAY TX GROUP
1.SETUP FILE
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
2.
RELAY TX GROUP
3.DELETE FILE
Set
Press Set.
DELETE FILE
SET RLY TX GROUP# 00
Set
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the relay group
3.
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
number then press Set.
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
DELETE FILE
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
PASSWORD
_
0
Tone
If you have not set the operation password, you can skip the next
step.
Chapter 9
Using a Relay Network 9-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set
ABC
DEF
Enter the four-digit operation password and press Set.
4.
5.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
DELETE FILE
FILE DELETED
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
Stop
Press Stop to return to standby.
If the relay has been set for timer sending and the document is still
in the memory, you will not be able to delete the relay group until
the document is sent. In this case the fax will prompt:
CANNOT DELETE
Wait until the document is sent before you attempt to delete the
relay group.
Sending a Document to a Relay Unit for
Relay Broadcasting
Follow this procedure to send a document to a relay unit.
In this procedure your fax is the originator.
Before you send a document to another fax for relay broadcasting,
confirm the following points on your fax:
❏
Make sure your own fax unit telephone number is correctly regis-
tered. (➞3-13, 14-5)
❏
Enter a subaddress.
9-10 Using a Relay Network
Chapter 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before you send a document to another fax for relay broadcasting,
contact the other party and confirm the following points about their fax:
❏
The relay unit must support ITU-T subaddress/password transac-
tions.
❏
If you want a relay transmission report sent back to your fax from
the relay unit, instruct the relay unit to turn this feature on when
they set up the relay function on their fax.
❏
Make sure the relay unit has registered the telephone numbers of all
destinations for the speed dialing buttons of the relay unit.
❏
❏
Make sure you have the correct subaddress for the other party’s fax.
Confirm that the subaddress you have been given has been used to
set up the other party’s fax as a relay station. Your fax cannot confirm
whether or not the other party’s fax has been set up properly as a
relay unit.
❏
If an ITU-T password is set on the other party’s fax you must send
the document with a password. Otherwise, the other fax will not
receive your document.
After the relay fax is set up to participate in a relay network, it should
receive and relay documents automatically. By following the initial setup
procedures in the previous section, the relay fax unit can be set to
confirm the identity of the originator before sending and to send a relay
transmission report to the originator after your fax unit requests the
other unit to relay a document.
When your fax unit is the originator of a relay transmission with this
method, it does not check to ensure that the fax to receive and relay the
transmission is set up properly for relay transmission. Even when the fax
is not set up to relay your documents, your fax unit reports such a
transmission as a successful relay transmission. Make sure the relay unit
is set up correctly to relay documents that it receives from your fax unit.
Chapter 9
Using a Relay Network 9-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending a Document to a Relay Unit with Speed Dialing
You can register a telephone number for relay sending under a One-
touch or Coded Speed Dialing button.
Check these points before you send a document to another party for
relay:
❏
Contact the other party and ask for the ITU-T subaddress and
password they are using for receiving documents to relay.
❏
The other party’s fax unit does not have to be a Canon fax unit, but
make sure the other party’s fax unit supports the use of ITU-T
subaddresses and passwords.
❏
❏
Perform the procedure to register a telephone number for One-touch
or Coded Speed Dialing. (➞4-6, 4-15) If the speed dialing buttons are
already set up, perform the procedure to change the One-touch or
Coded Speed Dialing settings. (➞4-6, 4-15)
When you do the speed dialing settings, turn on the OPTIONAL
SETTING feature and select TX TYPE. Select ORIG RELAY TX and
then set the ITU-T subaddress and password. (➞4-11, 4-21) Confirm
that the other party is set up properly to relay documents received
from your fax. Your fax cannot confirm whether or not the other fax
has been set up properly for relaying a document sent from your fax.
Sending with the Relay Broadcast Button
Follow this procedure to send the original document for a relay broad-
cast with the Relay Broadcast button.
You can set only one destination.
Set the document on the fax. (➞6-3)
1.
Set the document resolution, contrast, and document type. (➞6-4)
You can also select a sender’s name with the TTI Selector. (➞6-6)
9-12 Using a Relay Network
Chapter 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels and press
2.
3.
Relay Broadcast.
Relay
Broadcast
ORIG RELAY TX
SELECT LOCATIONS
TEL=
Dial the relay units.
ABC
DEF
Use regular dialing. (➞6-7)
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
-if not-
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
Press a One-touch Speed Dialing button, or press Coded Dial
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
followed by a three-digit code. (➞4-29, 4-31)
0
Tone
-if not-
Dial the number with directory dialing. (➞4-35)
TEL=
123 4567
01 CANON, INC.
Set
Press Set.
SUBADDRESS
Chapter 9
Using a Relay Network 9-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set
ABC
DEF
Enter the ITU-T subaddress required to start the relay broadcast
on the other party’s fax. Then press Set.
4.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
TEL=
123 4567
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
01 CANON, INC.
If a password is not required go on to the next step.
-if not-
0
Tone
Password
If an ITU-T password is also required to start the relay broadcast,
press Password.
PASSWORD
You must press Password within 5 seconds of pressing Set. If you wait
longer than the timeout interval before pressing Password, the fax will
start scanning the document. The timeout interval can be turned off.
(➞16-11)
Set
ABC
DEF
Enter the ITU-T password required to start the relay broadcast on
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
the other party’s fax. Then press Set.
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
TEL=
123 4567
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
01 CANON, INC.
0
Tone
Start / Scan
Press Start/Scan to start the transmission.
5.
The Fax will begin scanning automatically if the Time Out function is set
to on. (➞6-23, 16-11)
9-14 Using a Relay Network
Chapter 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10
Using Confidential Mailboxes
This chapter shows you how to send and receive confidential docu-
ments.
A confidential document is a document that does not print as soon as it is
received. The receiving party must use a password to unlock his or her
mailbox in order to print the document. Use confidential sending and
receiving for documents that you want only the person with the correct
password to read.
You cannot use the conventional Canon confidential mailbox feature.
❏ Setting Up and Using the Standard Mailbox Features ...................... 10-2
• Creating a Mailbox ............................................................................ 10-2
• Changing Mailbox Settings.............................................................. 10-6
• Canceling a Mailbox ......................................................................... 10-7
• Receiving a Confidential Document............................................... 10-8
❏ Sending a Confidential Document ..................................................... 10-10
• Sending a Confidential Document with Speed Dialing ............ 10-10
• Sending a Confidential Document with the Confidential
Mailbox Button .................................................................................10-11
Chapter 10
Using Confidential Mailboxes 10-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up and Using the Standard
Mailbox Features
In this section we will describe how to create your own mailbox, change
the mailbox settings when necessary, and delete the mailbox when it is
no longer needed.
Creating FaolMlowaitlhbisopxrocedure to create a mailbox to hold confidential documents
in a private mailbox protected with a password.
Open the CONFID. MAILBOX menu.
1.
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
Data Registration.
Data
Registration
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
Set
Press Set.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
DATA REGISTRATION
6.FILE SETTINGS
Set
Set
Press Set.
FILE SETTINGS
1.CONFID. MAILBOX
Press Set.
CONFID. MAILBOX
1.SETUP FILE
10-2 Using Confidential Mailboxes
Chapter 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Give the mailbox a number.
2.
Set
Press Set.
SETUP FILE
SET BOX #
00
Set
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a two-digit code
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
for the confidential mailbox number. Then press Set.
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
SETUP FILE
1.FILE NAME
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
Set
Press Set.
FILE NAME
_
:A
Give the mailbox a name to identify it in printed reports.
3.
4.
Set
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a personal name
for the mailbox. The name can be up to 24 characters long and
may include numbers, symbols, and spaces. Then press Set.
1
2
JKL
3
MNO
GHI
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
SETUP FILE
2.PASSWORD
0
Tone
Give the mailbox a password to protect the mailbox content and
settings from unauthorized access.
Set
Press Set.
PASSWORD
_
❏
❏
This password protects the confidential mailbox settings from
unauthorized access. The next time you want to open this
menu to view the settings or make any changes, you will have
to enter this password to open the menu.
You will have to enter this password to print documents you
receive in your mailbox. Do not forget your password.
Chapter 10
Using Confidential Mailboxes 10-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a four-digit
password. Then press Set.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
SETUP FILE
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
3.SUBADDRESS
0
Tone
Give the mailbox an ITU-T subaddress.
5.
Set
Press Set.
SUBADDRESS
This item is the ITU-T standard subaddress. This setting is required.
All confidential documents must be sent to your fax with this
subaddress in order to be stored in your mailbox. If the
subaddresses do not match, the document will not be received.
Set
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter an ITU-T
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
subaddress up to 20-digits long. Then press Set.
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
SETUP FILE
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
4.RX PASSWORD
0
Tone
The next setting is optional. If you set a password, however, the confi-
dential documents sent to you must include this password.
Set
To enter an ITU-T password, press Set.
6.
RX PASSWORD
Set
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter an ITU-T pass-
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
word up to 20-digits long. Then press Set.
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
SETUP FILE
5.# OF RX COPIES
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
10-4 Using Confidential Mailboxes
Chapter 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Normally only one copy of the document received in a
confidential mailbox is printed. If you want to print more copies,
change this setting. Otherwise, go on to the next step.
7.
Set
To specify more copies, press Set.
# OF RX COPIES
01COPIES
Press the search buttons to increase or decrease the number.
-if not-
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a two-digit
number. For numbers 00 to 09 you must enter 2 digits, including
the zero.
Set
Press Set.
SETUP FILE
SET BOX #
00
You can repeat this procedure to set up another mailbox.
8.
-if not-
Stop
Press Stop to return to standby.
Chapter 10
Using Confidential Mailboxes 10-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing Mailbox Settings
Follow this procedure to change the settings for a mailbox. To open a
mailbox to view and change the settings, you must know the mailbox
number and password.
Open the CONFID. MAILBOX menu. (➞10-2)
1.
2.
3.
CONFID. MAILBOX
1.SETUP FILE
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
CONFID. MAILBOX
2.CHANGE DATA
Open the mailbox with its number and password.
Set
Press Set.
CHANGE DATA
SET BOX #
00
Set
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit code
of the mailbox you want to change. Then press Set.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
CHANGE DATA
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
PASSWORD
_
0
Tone
Set
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
password protecting access to the mailbox. Then press Set.
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
CHANGE DATA
1.FILE NAME
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
10-6 Using Confidential Mailboxes
Chapter 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the search buttons to display the item you want to change.
4.
CHANGE DATA
1.FILE NAME
CHANGE DATA
5.# OF RX COPIES
Set
With the item you want to change shown in the display, press Set.
5.
6.
To change an item, follow the same procedure you used to
perform the initial settings. (➞10-3)
Stop
Press Stop to return to standby.
7.
Canceling a Mailbox
Follow this procedure to cancel a mailbox.
Open the CONFID. MAILBOX menu. (➞10-2)
1.
2.
3.
CONFID. MAILBOX
1.SETUP FILE
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
CONFID. MAILBOX
3.DELETE FILE
Set
Press Set.
DELETE FILE
SET BOX #
00
Chapter 10
Using Confidential Mailboxes 10-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the number of the
mailbox you want to delete. Then press Set.
4.
5.
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
DELETE FILE
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
PASSWORD
_
0
Tone
Set
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit
password protecting the mailbox you want to delete. Then press
Set.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
DELETE FILE
FILE DELETED
0
Tone
Stop
Press Stop to return to standby.
6.
Receiving a Confidential Document
When the fax receives a confidential document with a subaddress or
subaddress and password that match the subaddress/password settings
for your confidential mailbox, the document is stored in the mailbox.
After the fax unit receives a document in a confidential mailbox, it
displays a message and prints a report unless this feature has been
turned off.
PRINTING REPORT
12/31/1999 13:34 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE,INC.
001
*****************************
CONFID. RX REPORT
***
***
*****************************
CONFID. MBOX
#
#01
CONFID. MBOX NAME
TX/RX NO
LOUIS
5007
CONNECTION TEL
SUBADDRESS
1
213 978 3314
1111
CONNECTION ID
ST. TIME
BELZER,INC.
12/31 13:33
USAGE
PGS.
T
00'18
1
RESULT
OK
10-8 Using Confidential Mailboxes
Chapter 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❏
❏
The report lists the subaddress where the documents have been
received.
Printing this Confidential Receive Report every time you receive a
confidential document can be turned off and on. (➞16-8)
After the report prints, a message alternates with the standby display
(date and time) until you print the report received in the mailbox.
RECEIVED IN MAILBOX
Follow this procedure to print a document received in a confidential
mailbox.
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
1.
Confidential Mailbox.
Confidential
Mailbox
CONFID. TX/RX
1.CONFIDENTIAL TX
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
2.
3.
4.
CONFID. TX/RX
2.CONFIDENTIAL RX
Set
Press Set.
SUBADDRESS
Set
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the subaddress
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
for the mailbox. Then press Set.
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
CONFIDENTIAL RX
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
PASSWORD
_
0
Tone
Chapter 10
Using Confidential Mailboxes 10-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit
password to open the mailbox. Then press Set.
5.
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
To protect your password, it is not displayed when you enter it.
The document starts printing.
CONFIDENTIAL RX
PRINTING
P.001/002
Sending a Confidential Document
Sending a document with a subaddress and password does not ensure
that the document will be received as a confidential document. Before
your fax sends a document, it cannot confirm that the other party has
their fax set up for confidential receiving.
You can use two methods to send a confidential document:
❏
If you frequently use the confidential sending feature, you can
register a telephone number for confidential sending with One-touch
or Coded Speed Dialing registration.
❏
You can also enter the ITU-T subaddress and password with
Confidential Mailbox button.
Sending a Confidential Document with Speed Dialing
You can register a telephone number for confidential sending at the
touch of a One-touch Speed Dialing button or by pressing Coded Dial
followed by a three-digit code.
Check these points before you send a confidential document to another
party:
❏
Contact the other party and ask for the ITU-T subaddress and
password they are using for receiving confidential documents.
10-10 Using Confidential Mailboxes
Chapter 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❏
The other party’s fax unit does not have to be a Canon fax unit, but
make sure the other party’s fax unit supports the use of ITU-T
subaddresses and passwords.
❏
❏
Perform the procedure to register a telephone number for One-touch
or Coded Speed Dialing. (➞4-6, 4-15)
If the speed dialing buttons are already set up, perform the proce-
dure to change the One-touch or Coded Speed Dialing settings.
(➞4-6, 4-15)
❏
❏
When you do the speed dialing settings, turn on the OPTIONAL
SETTING feature and select TX TYPE. Select CONFIDENTIAL TX
and then set the ITU-T subaddress and password. (➞4-11, 4-20)
Confirm that the other party has set up a confidential mailbox with
the subaddress you have been given. Your fax cannot confirm whether
or not the subaddress has been used to set up a confidential mailbox.
Sending a Confidential Document with the Confidential
Mailbox Button
Note these points about sending a confidential document to a confiden-
tial mailbox.
❏
❏
You can dial only one telephone number.
If you frequently need to send a confidential document to more than
one location, register the number, subaddress, and password for
One-touch or Coded Speed Dialing so you can use multiple broad-
casting. (➞4-6, 4-15)
❏
❏
If you use One-touch or Coded Speed Dialing to dial the number
after you perform the following operation, the transmission mode
settings registered for the speed dialing button are ignored.
The password setting is optional but required if the other party has
set a password on the other fax unit.
Set the document on the fax. (➞6-3)
1.
Set the document resolution, contrast, and document type. (➞6-4)
You can also select a sender’s name with the TTI Selector. (➞6-6)
Chapter 10
Using Confidential Mailboxes 10-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels and press
2.
3.
Confidential Mailbox.
Confidential
Mailbox
CONFID. TX/RX
1.CONFIDENTIAL TX
Set
Press Set.
CONFIDENTIAL TX
SELECT LOCATIONS
TEL =
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to dial the number. (➞6-7)
4.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
-if not-
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
Close the One-touch Speed Dialing panels and press a One-touch
Speed dialing button to dial the number, or press Coded Dial and
enter the three-digit code. (➞4-29, 4-31)
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
-if not-
Tone
Dial the number with directory dialing. (➞4-35)
❏
❏
You can dial only one number.
The transmission mode settings for the speed dialing button
are ignored.
Set
Press Set.
SUBADDRESS
Set
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the ITU-T
5.
1
2
3
subaddress. Then press Set.
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
TEL=
123 4567
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
01 CANON, INC.
0
Tone
10-12 Using Confidential Mailboxes
Chapter 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Password
If you must also enter an ITU-T password, press Password. Other-
6.
wise, just go on to the next step.
PASSWORD
You must press Password within 5 seconds of pressing Set. If you wait
longer than the timeout interval before pressing Password, the fax will
start scanning the document. The timeout interval can be turned off.
(➞16-11)
Set
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the ITU-T pass-
1
2
3
word. Then press Set.
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
TEL=
123 4567
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
01 CANON, INC.
0
Tone
Start / Scan
Press Start/Scan to start the transmission.
7.
The Fax will begin scanning automatically if the Time Out function is set
to on. (➞6-23, 16-11)
Chapter 10
Using Confidential Mailboxes 10-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-14 Using Confidential Mailboxes
Chapter 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11
Setting Up and Using Polling
This chapter shows you how to set up and use polling sending and
receiving. Polling is useful when one or both parties cannot be in the
office at the same time.
❏ What is Polling? .......................................................................................11-2
• Before You Use Polling Receiving ....................................................11-2
❏ Polling Other Fax Machines to Receive a Document .........................11-3
• Polling to Receive at a Preset Time ..................................................11-5
• Changing the Preset Polling Settings ............................................11-12
• Canceling Preset Polling..................................................................11-13
❏ Setting Up Polling Sending ..................................................................11-15
• Before You Can Be Polled to Send .................................................11-15
• Setting Up a Polling Box..................................................................11-15
• Scanning a Document into the Memory for Polling Sending ....11-20
• Changing the Polling Box Setup ....................................................11-21
• Canceling a Polling Box...................................................................11-23
Chapter 11
Setting Up and Using Polling 11-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What is Polling?
Polling means a fax calls another fax and requests that the other fax send
a document that it is holding. Unlike normal sending and receiving, in
polling the receiver always calls the sender. This is called polling to
receive a document. The sender sends the document in response to the
polling by a telephone call from the receiver.
Your fax can be set up to function in both roles. Your fax can poll to
receive a document, or it can be polled to send a document that it is
holding.
Before You Use Polling Receiving
Before you try to set up polling, note the following points:
❏
❏
❏
With one operation you can poll several faxes. You can dial up to 210
telephone numbers and poll those faxes to receive documents that
they are holding.
You can poll a document at any time, but you may find it more
useful to set your fax for polling other faxes at specified times
throughout the day. (➞11-5)
You must know if the other fax is holding the document under both
a subaddress and password or only a subaddress or password. You
must also know the subaddress and password so you can enter them
on your fax. If you do not know the subaddress or password, contact
the other party.
❏
❏
If the other party's documents are registered for polling without a
subaddress or password, you can still perform polling receiving.
If the other party's fax does not support ITU-T subaddress/password
transactions, you can ask them to set the polling ID to 255 or 1111
1111 binary when the other party's fax machine is a Canon fax.
11-2 Setting Up and Using Polling
Chapter 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Polling Other Fax Machines to Receive a
Document
Follow this procedure to poll another fax to receive the document that it
is holding. This procedure starts polling the other fax immediately. You
can also set the fax to poll at a preset time. (➞11-5)
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
1.
Polling.
POLLING
Polling
1.POLLING TX
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
2.
3.
POLLING
2.POLLING RX
Set
Press Set.
TEL=
TTI Selector
You can select a sender's name with the TTI Selector. (➞6-6)
Close all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels and dial the
4.
other party’s number.
Set
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to dial the number. If you
use regular dialing, make sure you press Set after you dial the
number. (➞6-7)
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
-if not-
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
Press a One-touch Speed Dialing button to dial the number. (➞4-29)
0
Tone
-if not-
Press Coded Dial and a three-digit code to dial the number. (➞4-31)
-if not-
Dial the number with directory dialing. (➞4-35)
Chapter 11
Setting Up and Using Polling 11-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you make a mistake during dialing, press Stop to return to
standby and start again.
If you want to receive a document from a fax unit that does not
support ITU-T subaddress/password transactions, press Start/
Scan.
-if not-
If you want to receive a document from a fax unit that supports
ITU-T transactions, press Set. Then press the Subaddress button.
SUBADDRESS
You must press Subaddress within 5 seconds of pressing Set. If you wait
longer than the timeout interval before pressing Subaddress, the fax will
start dialing the number. The timeout interval can be turned off.
(➞16-11)
An ITU-T subaddress is a number up to 20 digits long which can
include spaces and the symbols and #.
*
Set
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the ITU-T
5.
6.
1
2
3
subaddress. Then press Set.
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
TEL=
123 4567
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
01 CANON, INC.
0
Tone
Password
If you must also enter an ITU-T password, press the Password
button. Otherwise, go on to the next step.
PASSWORD
You must press Password within 5 seconds of Set. If you wait longer than
the timeout interval before pressing Password, the fax will start dialing
the number. The timeout interval can be turned off.(➞16-11)
11-4 Setting Up and Using Polling
Chapter 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
An ITU-T password is a number up to 20 digits long which can
include spaces and the symbols and #.
*
Set
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the ITU-T pass-
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
word. Then press Set.
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
TEL=
123 4567
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
01 CANON, INC.
0
Tone
Start / Scan
Press Start/Scan to start polling the other faxes.
7.
❏
If the other document is holding the document under a
subaddress, your subaddress must match the other party’s
subaddress.
❏
If the other document is holding the document under both a
subaddress and password, then you must poll the fax with
both a matching subaddress and password.
Polling to Receive at a Preset Time
Follow this procedure to set the fax to poll another fax at a preset time.
Polling faxes at preset times allows you to conduct document transac-
tions later at night when the telephone rates are lower.
Before you set up polling at a preset time, make sure you have per-
formed the following tasks:
❏
The numbers you want to register for dialing must be registered for
One-touch or Coded Speed Dialing buttons. (➞4-6, 4-15)
❏
When you register the One-touch or Coded Speed dialing button,
you must turn on OPTIONAL SETTINGS and set the TX TYPE for
POLLING RX when the other party set subaddress/password, you
have to register an ITU-T subaddress and/or password for the speed
dialing button. (➞4-12, 4-21)
❏
If you have to poll a number that you use regularly, you should
register it once again for another speed dialing button so you can set
the ITU-T subaddress and/or password to match the polling box of
the other party’s fax and register the second number for preset
polling.
Chapter 11
Setting Up and Using Polling 11-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Open the PRESET POLLING menu.
1.
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
Data Registration.
Data
Registration
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
Set
Press Set.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
DATA REGISTRATION
6.FILE SETTINGS
Set
Press Set.
FILE SETTINGS
1.CONFID. MAILBOX
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
FILE SETTINGS
4.PRESET POLLING
Set
Set
Press Set.
PRESET POLLING
1.SETUP FILE
Press Set.
2.
SETUP FILE
SET BOX #
00
11-6 Setting Up and Using Polling
Chapter 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set
ABC
DEF
Enter a two-digit box number (00-99) for the polling box. Then
press Set.
3.
4.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
SETUP FILE
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
1.FILE NAME
0
Tone
Enter a file name.
Set
Press Set.
FILE NAME
_
:A
This is the name of the file that will hold the polled document you
receive.
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a name of up to
1
2
JKL
3
MNO
24 characters long. (➞3-7)
GHI
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
Set
Press Set.
SETUP FILE
2.PASSWORD
If you want to set a password go to the next step.
This is the operation password to protect your preset polling
settings. To change the settings later, you will have to enter this
password.
5.
-if not-
If you do not want to set a password, press the down search
button to display the next item.
Chapter 11
Setting Up and Using Polling 11-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set
1
Press Set to set a password.
6.
7.
Set
ABC
DEF
Enter a four-digit password and press Set.
2
JKL
3
MNO
GHI
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
SETUP FILE
3.SELECT LOCATIONS
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
Set
Press Set.
TEL =
ABC
DEF
Dial the other party’s fax number.
1
GHI
2
3
JKL
MNO
Press a One-touch Speed Dialing button to dial the number.
4
PRS
5
6
(➞4-29)
TUV
WXY
-if not-
9
7
8
OPER
SYMBOLS
Press Coded Dial and a three-digit code to dial the number. (➞4-31)
0
Tone
If you make a mistake during dialing, press Stop to return to
standby and start again.
You can enter up to 200 numbers to be polled by your fax.
Set
Press Set.
SETUP FILE
4.START TIME
You can set the fax to poll other faxes everyday or only for se-
lected days. For any day you can set up to 5 times for the fax to
poll another unit during a 24-hour period.
11-8 Setting Up and Using Polling
Chapter 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set the fax to poll other faxes every day or on selected days.
8.
To set preset polling for every day
SETUP FILE
4.START TIME
Set
Set
Set
Press Set.
START TIME
EVERYDAY
Press Set.
EVERYDAY
1:
:
Press Set.
EVERYDAY
_ :
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the time.
Enter the time in the 24-hour format (e.g. 1:00 p.m. as 13:00).
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
❏
If you make a mistake, press Clear to erase the number and try
again.
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
EVERYDAY
00:30
Set
Press Set.
If you want to set more than one time for your fax unit to poll the
other faxes, press the search buttons to display another empty
setting.
EVERYDAY
2:
:
Chapter 11
Setting Up and Using Polling 11-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set
Press Set and use the numeric keypad to enter another time in 24-
hour format.
You can register up to 5 times for your fax to poll other faxes every day.
Stop
When you are finished setting times, press Stop to return to
standby.
To set preset polling for selected days
SETUP FILE
4.START TIME
Set
Press Set.
START TIME
EVERYDAY
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
START TIME
SELECT DAYS
Set
Press Set.
SELECT DAYS
1.SUN
Press the search buttons to display the name of the first day you
want to set up then press Set.
Set
Set
MON
1:
:
Press Set.
MON
_ :
11-10 Setting Up and Using Polling
Chapter 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the time.
Enter the time in the 24-hour format (e.g. 1:00 p.m. as 13:00).
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
❏
If you make a mistake, press Clear to erase the number and try
again.
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
MON
02:00
Tone
Set
Press Set.
If you want to set more than one time for your fax unit to poll the
other faxes on the selected day, press the search buttons to display
another empty setting.
MON
2:
:
Set
Press Set and use the numeric keypad to enter another time in 24-
hour format.
You can register up to 5 times for your fax to poll other faxes on the
selected day.
Data
Registration
If you want to select another day, press Data Registration to return
to the previous level so you can select another day and repeat the
procedure to set the times for that day.
-if not-
Stop
When you are finished selecting days and setting times, press Stop
to return to standby.
Chapter 11
Setting Up and Using Polling 11-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the Preset Polling Settings
Follow this procedure to change the settings of the preset polling setup
file.
Open the PRESET POLLING menu. (➞11-6)
1.
2.
3.
4.
PRESET POLLING
1.SETUP FILE
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
PRESET POLLING
2.CHANGE DATA
Set
Press Set.
CHANGE DATA
SET BOX #
00
Set
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
number of the preset polling box you want to change. Then press
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
Set.
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
CHANGE DATA
0
PASSWORD
_
Tone
If you have not set the operation password, you can skip the next
step.
Set
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit
5.
1
2
JKL
3
MNO
password and press Set.
GHI
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
CHANGE DATA
1.FILE NAME
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
11-12 Setting Up and Using Polling
Chapter 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use the search buttons to display the item you want to change and
press Set.
6.
Set
CHANGE DATA
1.FILE NAME
CHANGE DATA
4.START TIME
To change a setting, follow the same procedures you used to set
7.
8.
them. (➞11-7)
❏
To change the password setting, you will first have to enter
the current password and press Set. Then you can enter a new
password and press Set.
Stop
When you are finished making changes, press Stop to return to
standby.
Canceling Preset Polling
Follow this procedure to cancel preset polling.
Open the PRESET POLLING menu. (➞11-6)
1.
2.
3.
PRESET POLLING
1.SETUP FILE
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
PRESET POLLING
3.DELETE FILE
Set
Press Set.
DELETE FILE
SET BOX #
00
Chapter 11
Setting Up and Using Polling 11-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the preset two-
digit code of the polling box. Then press Set.
4.
5.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
DELETE FILE
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
PASSWORD
_
0
Tone
If you have not set the operation password, you can skip the next
step.
Set
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
password protecting the preset polling setup file. Then press Set.
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
After you enter the password, the file is deleted.
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
DELETE FILE
0
Tone
FILE DELETED
DELETE FILE
SET BOX#
00
Stop
Press Stop to return to standby.
6.
11-14 Setting Up and Using Polling
Chapter 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up Polling Sending
This section shows you how to set up your fax to store and hold a
document until it is polled by another fax to send it.
Before You Can Be Polled to Send
Before you set up your polling box, contact the parties who are going to
poll your fax to receive documents and confirm the following points:
❏
❏
The other parties must know your ITU-T subaddress number.
If you are also using an ITU-T password for the polling box, they
must also know this password. This password setting is optional.
❏
❏
Your TX PASSWORD must match the ITU-T password attached
when the other party calls you. Confirm that the TX PASSWORD on
your fax matches the ITU-T password attached when the other party
calls you.
If the other party’s fax does not support ITU-T subaddress/pass-
word transactions, you may be able to use the polling box #00.
Setting UBpefaorePyooullcinangusBe opoxlling sending, you must create a polling box with
the File settings. The polling box holds the document in the memory
until the other party polls your fax to send the document.
Open the FILE SETTINGS menu.
1.
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
Data Registration.
Data
Registration
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
Set
Press Set.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
Chapter 11
Setting Up and Using Polling 11-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
DATA REGISTRATION
6.FILE SETTINGS
Set
Press Set.
FILE SETTINGS
1.CONFID. MAILBOX
Open the POLLING BOX menu.
2.
3.
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
FILE SETTINGS
5.POLLING BOX
Set
Press Set.
POLLING BOX
1.SETUP FILE
Create a polling box and give it a number.
Set
Press Set.
SETUP FILE
SET BOX #
00
Set
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a two-digit code
1
2
3
for the box. Then press Set.
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
SETUP FILE
1.FILE NAME
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
If the other party's fax does not support ITU-T subaddress/password
transactions, set the box number to 00 so the other party can poll your
fax unit and receive the document.
11-16 Setting Up and Using Polling
Chapter 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Create a file name to store the document in the memory where it
will wait to be polled by other fax units.
4.
Set
Press Set.
FILE NAME
_
:A
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a name of up to
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
24 characters. (➞3-7)
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
FILE NAME
:A
CANON TOKYO
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
Set
Press Set.
SETUP FILE
2.PASSWORD
If you don't want to set password, press the search buttons to go
to the next step.
5.
-if not-
Set
If you want to enter a password to protect the polling box setup
file, Press Set.
PASSWORD
_
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a four-digit
password.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
PASSWORD
1147
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
Chapter 11
Setting Up and Using Polling 11-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set
Press Set.
SETUP FILE
3.SUBADDRESS
If you set the box number to 00 for a party whose fax unit does not
support ITU-T subaddress/password transactions, you do not have to
register 3.SUBADDRESS and 4.TX PASSWORD. Just press the search
buttons to display 5.ERASE AFTER TX then go to step 8.
Set
Press Set.
6.
SUBADDRESS
This is the ITU-T subaddress. An ITU-T subaddress is a number of
up to 20 digits long which can include spaces and the symbols
*
and #.
Set
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the subaddress
7.
1
2
3
and press Set.
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
SETUP FILE
4.TX PASSWORD
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
If you do not want to enter the ITU-T password, press the down
search button to display the next item and go on to the next step.
-if not-
Set
If you want to enter an ITU-T password press Set.
TX PASSWORD
An ITU-T password is a number of up to 20 digits long which can
include spaces and the symbols and #.
*
If you register a TX PASSWORD, it must match the ITU-T password
attached when the other party calls you.
11-18 Setting Up and Using Polling
Chapter 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the password.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
TX PASSWORD
#12345676
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
Set
Press Set.
SETUP FILE
5.ERASE AFTER TX
Set the polling box to erase or keep the document after polling.
8.
9.
Set
Press Set.
Press the search buttons to display the setting you want.
ERASE AFTER TX
ON
ERASE AFTER TX
OFF
ON
The document in the memory box is erased after it is
sent once in response to polling by another fax.
OFF
The document in the memory box is not erased after it is
polled. Select this setting if you expect the document
will be polled by more than one fax.
Set
With the selection you want displayed, press Set.
You can repeat this procedure to set up another polling box.
-if not-
Stop
Press Stop to return to standby.
Chapter 11
Setting Up and Using Polling 11-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scanning a Document into the Memory for Polling
Sending
Follow this procedure to scan a document into the polling box. The
document will remain in the polling box to be polled by other fax units.
Set the document on the fax. (➞6-3)
1.
2.
Set the document resolution, contrast, and document type. (➞6-4)
You can select a sender’s name with the TTI Selector. (➞6-6)
Polling
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
Polling.
POLLING
1.POLLING TX
Set
Press Set.
3.
4.
SUBADDRESS
Set
ABC
DEF
If the other party's fax supports ITU-T subaddresses and pass-
words, use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the
subaddress for the polling box. Then press Set.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
-if not-
Tone
Set
If the other party's fax does not support ITU-T subaddresses and
passwords, just press Set.
If you want to skip selecting a sender name, go on to the next step.
-if not-
5.
TTI Selector
If you want to select a sender name, press TTI Selector until you see
the sender name you want to use. You can also use the search
buttons to scroll up and down the TTI list.
SENDER'S NAME
19
CANON FAX DIV.
11-20 Setting Up and Using Polling
Chapter 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set
Press Set. The fax starts scanning the document into the polling
6.
box.
POLLING TX
6048
SCANNING DOC. P.003
When another party polls your fax to receive a document stored in
your polling box, the document is sent if the following conditions
are met:
❏
If you entered both a subaddress and a password when you
created the polling box, the subaddress and the password of
the other party’s polling request must match the subaddress
and the password for the polling box.
❏
❏
The password setting is optional. However, if you have
registered a password for the polling box, the other party’s
polling request must contain a matching password.
If no password is registered for the document in the polling
box and the other party’s polling request contains a password,
then the document is not sent.
Changing the Polling Box Setup
Follow this procedure to change the setup of the polling box.
Open the POLLING BOX menu. (➞11-15, 11-16)
1.
POLLING BOX
1.SETUP FILE
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
2.
POLLING BOX
2.CHANGE DATA
Chapter 11
Setting Up and Using Polling 11-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set
Press Set.
3.
4.
CHANGE DATA
SET BOX #
00
Set
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the polling box
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
number. Then press Set.
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
CHANGE DATA
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
PASSWORD
_
0
Tone
If you have not set the operation password, you can skip the next
step.
Set
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit
password protecting the polling box setup file. Then press Set.
5.
6.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
CHANGE DATA
1.FILE NAME
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
Press the search buttons to display the item you want to change.
CHANGE DATA
1.FILE NAME
CHANGE DATA
5.ERASE AFTER TX
Set
Press Set.
7.
8.
To change the settings, follow the same procedures you used to set
up the polling box setup file. (➞11-17)
Stop
When you are finished, press Stop to return to standby.
9.
11-22 Setting Up and Using Polling
Chapter 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Canceling a Polling Box
Follow this procedure to cancel a polling box.
You cannot cancel a polling box when the polling box is holding a
document for polling sending.
Open the POLLING BOX menu. (➞11-15, 11-16)
1.
2.
3.
4.
POLLING BOX
1.SETUP FILE
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
POLLING BOX
3.DELETE FILE
Set
Press Set.
DELETE FILE
SET BOX #
00
Set
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the number of the
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
box that you want to delete. Then press Set.
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
DELETE FILE
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
PASSWORD
_
0
Tone
If you have not set the operation password, you can skip the next
step.
Set
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit
operation password protecting the polling box setup file. Then
press Set.
5.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
After you press Set, the polling box is deleted.
0
Tone
DELETE FILE
FILE DELETED
Chapter 11
Setting Up and Using Polling 11-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Stop
Press Stop to return to standby.
6.
11-24 Setting Up and Using Polling
Chapter 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12
Other Special Features
This chapter describes some convenient features that you may want to
use in daily operations.
❏ Using the Telephone ............................................................................... 12-2
❏ Tone Dialing on a Pulse Line ................................................................. 12-3
❏ Setting and Using the Program Button ................................................ 12-5
❏ Setting Up and Using the Optional Stamp Feature ........................... 12-8
• Setting Up the Stamp Feature.......................................................... 12-8
• Turning the Stamp Feature ON/OFF ........................................... 12-10
❏ How the Fax Operates with Default Settings ................................... 12-12
Chapter 12
Other Special Features 12-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Telephone
Follow this procedure to use the telephone for voice communication if
you have installed the optional handset kit. (➞2-38)
Hook
or
Pick up the handset.
1.
-if not-
Press the Hook button.
TEL =
When you hear the dial tone, dial the telephone number.
2.
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to dial the number. (➞6-7)
1
2
JKL
3
MNO
GHI
-if not-
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
Press a One-touch Speed Dialing button to dial the number. (➞4-29)
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
-if not-
0
Tone
Press Coded Dial and a three-digit code to dial the number. (➞4-31)
-if not-
Dial the number with directory dialing. (➞4-35)
If you make a mistake during dialing, press Stop to return to
standby and start again.
TEL =
123 4567
12-2 Other Special Features
Chapter 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the other party answers your call, you can talk into the
handset.
3.
-if not-
If you did not pick up handset in step 1, pick up the handset as
soon as you hear the other party answer. The other party will not
be able to hear you until you pick up the handset.
-if not-
Hook
or
If the other party does not answer, or if the line is busy, just hang
up the handset or press Hook to disconnect.
Tone Dialing on a Pulse Line
Many telephone information services for banks, airline reservations,
hotel reservations, etc., require tone dialing for their services. If your fax
is connected to a rotary pulse line, follow this procedure to set the fax
temporarily for tone dialing.
Hook
Press Hook.
1.
The In Use lamp blinks green and you will hear the dial tone.
-if not-
Just pick up the handset if you have installed the optional handset
kit.(➞2-38)
The level of the dial tone can be adjusted. (➞2-18)
TEL =
Dial the telephone number.
2.
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to dial the telephone
number of the information service.
1
2
JKL
3
MNO
GHI
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
TEL =
123 4567
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
Chapter 12
Other Special Features 12-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the recorded message of the information service answers,
press Tone.
3.
Tone
After you press Tone you will see a “T” in the display.
TEL =
123 4567T
If your fax is connected to a touch tone line, “ ” will appear on the
*
display when you press Tone.
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the numbers
requested by the information service.
4.
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
12-4 Other Special Features
Chapter 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting and Using the Program Button
The program button feature allows you to register a setting so you can
automatically perform a routine procedure with a single button press.
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
1.
2.
Data Registration.
Data
Registration
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
Set
Set
Press Set twice.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
USER SETTINGS
1.DATE & TIME
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
3.
4.
5.
USER SETTINGS
7.PROGRAM KEY
Set
Press Set to display the current settings.
PROGRAM KEY
PRINT REPORT
Press the search buttons to display the function you want to
assign to the Program button.
You can select only one function at a time to assign to the Program button.
Chapter 12
Other Special Features 12-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Program button Setup Summary
The default settings, shown in bold, remain in effect unless you
change them.
PRINT REPORT
Sets the Program button to function as a
print transmission report button. When-
ever you need a transmission report for a
document you are sending, just press the
Program button and a transmission report
will print after the document is sent.
REPORT
Assigns the Program button to the functions
of the Report button. Whenever you need to
print a report, all you have to do is press
the Program button. This saves you the
effort of opening all three of the One-touch
Speed Dialing panels to press the Report
button.
SCANNING MODE Set up the Resolution, Contrast, or Document
buttons for sending special documents and
then store the settings under the Program
button. The next time you need to set them
before a document transmission, you can
set them with a single button press.
STAMP
If you had the optional stamp feature
installed for you, this feature is available. If
you select STAMP you can turn the stamp
feature on and off without opening all
three of the One-touch Speed Dialing
panels to press the Stamp button.
12-6 Other Special Features
Chapter 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To set transmission report feature
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
PROGRAM KEY
PRINT REPORT
Set
Press Set.
To use this feature, press the Program button before you dial to
have a report printed for the transaction.
To set up the Report button feature
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
PROGRAM KEY
REPORT
Set
Press Set.
Program
Now any time you need a report, press the Program button.
Use the search buttons to choose the report you want. Then press
Set.
Set
REPORT
1. ACTIVITY REPORT
REPORT
6.RX MEM. BOX LIST
To set up the scanning mode
Press search buttons until you see the display below.
PROGRAM KEY
SCANNING MODE
Set
Press Set.
SELECT SCANNING MODE
Chapter 12
Other Special Features 12-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use the Resolution, Contrast, or Document Type buttons to set these
features for scanning (or copying) the document. (➞6-4)
Set
Press Set.
SELECT SCANNING MODE
DATA ENTRY OK
Stop
Press Stop to return to standby.
6.
Setting Up and Using the Optional Stamp Feature
If the optional stamp feature is provided on your fax machine, you can
set the fax to stamp the front, lower left corner of every page you scan for
sending.
Setting Up the Stamp Feature
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels.
1.
2.
Open the TX SETTINGS menu.
Data
Registration
Press Data Registration.
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
Set
Press Set.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
DATA REGISTRATION
3.TX SETTINGS
12-8 Other Special Features
Chapter 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set
Press Set.
TX SETTINGS
1.ECM TX
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
3.
TX SETTINGS
7.TX STAMP
This item will not appear on the menu unless your fax machine has been
provided with the stamp option.
Set
Press Set.
4.
5.
Press the search buttons to display ON or OFF then press Set.
Set
If you turn this feature ON, select one of the options described on
the next page.
Stop
When you are finished, press Stop to return to standby.
6.
Chapter 12
Other Special Features 12-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TX Stamp Setup Summary
The default settings, shown in bold, remain in effect unless you
change them.
ON Turns on the stamp feature. After you set this switch ON,
documents will be stamped according to the following
settings. If you do not want to stamp temporarily, you can
use the STAMP button to turn the stamp feature off.
STAMP ACTION
DIRECT &
MEMORY TX
Stamps all documents you scan
for direct sending or memory
sending.
DIRECT TX
Stamps only documents you
scan for direct sending.
OFF Turns off stamping documents scanned for sending.
However, before you scan a document, you can still turn on
the stamp feature for a document you want to stamp with
Stamp button.
Turning the Stamp Feature ON/OFF
If you have turned the TX STAMP setting ON, documents will be
stamped according to the above setting. If you have not turned on the
TX STAMP feature but you still want to occasionally stamp documents
you scan for sending, or if you have turned on the TX STAMP feature but
you want to turn it off occasionally, follow the procedure below.
Set the document on the fax. (➞6-3)
1.
2.
Set the document resolution, contrast, and document type. (➞6-4)
You can also select a sender’s name with the TTI Selector button.
(➞6-6)
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels and press
Stamp.
TX STAMP
OFF
Stamp(Option)
12-10 Other Special Features
Chapter 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you want to stamp document pages, press the search buttons
until you see ON.
3.
TX STAMP
ON
-if not-
If you want to turn the stamp feature off, press the search buttons
until you see OFF.
TX STAMP
OFF
Set
Press Set.
4.
5.
TEL =
Close all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels and send
the document.
Chapter 12
Other Special Features 12-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How the Fax Operates with Default Settings
There are many minor features that you can change to customize the
operation of the fax. Some of these features are listed in the table below.
The description in the third column is the default setting. In other words,
this is how the fax will operate unless you change the referenced setting.
If your fax is not operating as described, this means the default may have
already been changed. In such a case you may want to go to the refer-
enced page to restore the default setting.
Feature
Menu Item
Description of default
Batch sending
BATCH TX
If several documents for the same destination with the
same telephone number are stored in the memory for
delayed sending, when the timer goes off for one of the
documents all other documents for the same destination
are sent together in the same transmission, regardless of
their time setting. (➞16-11)
Button press sound
Every time you press a button on the numeric keypad you
will hear a beep. The volume of this beep can be adjusted
or it can be turned off. (➞16-6)
VOLUME CON-
TROL
KEYPAD VOLUME
Date format
DATE SETUP
In the standby mode, the date is given in the format MM/
DD/YYYY. Two other formats are available. (➞16-30)
Dialing timeout
TIME OUT
The fax automatically pauses five seconds after you
press a speed dialing button to allow you to dial other
numbers for sequential broadcasting. You can turn the
timeout feature off.(➞16-11)
Document smaller
than paper
SELECT CASSETTE
CASSETTE SW B
If you receive a letter-size document and only a larger
paper size is available, the fax prints the document on the
larger paper. If you do not want the smaller documents
printed on larger paper, you can receive them in the
memory. This switch is effective only when the letter-size
paper runs out.(➞16-17)
Document too large
for paper
SELECT CASSETTE
CASSETTE SW A
If you receive a legal-size document and only letter-size
paper is available, the document will be divided over two
pages or reduced. If you do not want to divide documents,
you can receive them in the memory. This switch is effective
only when the paper cassettes are set to legal size and out
of legal-size paper. (➞16-17)
12-12 Other Special Features
Chapter 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Feature
Menu Item
Description of default
ECM sending/
receiving
ECM TX
The fax is set to conduct all transactions using ECM (error
correction mode). If transmission speed appears to be
extremely slow, you may be able to speed up transmission
time by turning ECM off. (➞16-10, 16-14)
ECM RX
Energy Saver
Language
ENERGY SAVER
The Energy Saver feature is off and will remain off until
you turn it on. (➞3-21, 16-31)
DISPLAY LAN-
The initial display language is English. Spanish and
GUAGE
French are also available. (➞16-30)
Manual receiving
with extension
phone
REMOTE RX
MEMORY RX
To start receiving a fax manually by answering an
extension telephone connected to the fax, dial 25. You can
change this number. (➞7-9, 16-14)
Memory receiving
If paper or toner runs out while you are receiving a long
document, or the full paper sensor detects the trays are
full, the remainder of the document will be stored in the
memory until you can re-fill the paper cassette, replace the
toner cartridge or pick up the paper on the trays. You can
also set an alarm to sound when the fax starts receiving a
document in the memory. (➞16-15)
Offhook alarm
Pause length
OFFHOOK ALARM If the handset remains off the hook , an alarm will sound.
The volume of this alarm can be adjusted or it can be
turned off. (➞16-6)
MID PAUSE SET
A pause entered within a number is set for 2 seconds. You
can lengthen this pause up to 15 seconds. A pause entered
at the end of a number is fixed at 10 seconds and cannot be
adjusted. (➞4-3, 16-10)
PIN codes
PIN CODE
The PIN code feature is disabled unless you turn it on and
set up the fax for dialing through a PBX with PIN codes.
(➞13-21, 16-12)
Printing: Continue
printing with toner
supply low
TONER SUPPLY
LOW
When the toner supply runs low, the fax saves the
remainder of the document into the memory. You can set
the fax to continue printing even after the toner runs low
during printing. (➞16-18)
Printing: Footer on
printed documents
RX PAGE FOOTER
The fax will not print a footer on every document
received unless you turn this feature on. (➞16-15)
Chapter 12
Other Special Features 12-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Feature
Menu Item
Description of default
Program button
PROGRAM KEY
If you press Program before you start a transmission, you
can tell the fax to print an activity report for the transmis-
sion. This button can be programmed for other
functions.(➞12-5, 16-6)
Quick-on-line TX
QUICK ON-LINE TX When you are scanning documents, the fax will start
dialing and sending before all pages are scanned. You can
turn this feature off. (➞16-11)
Receiving password
RX PASSWORD
No receiving password is set until you set one. If the other
party regularly sends you documents with only an ITU-T
password with no subaddress, set the RX PASSWORD.
(➞16-30)
Redialing
AUTO REDIAL
If the other party’s line is busy, the fax is set to perform
two re-dialing attempts at two minute intervals. You can
increase the number of re-dial attempts and the length of
the interval between attempts. (➞6-19, 16-11)
Reduction of
All documents are automatically reduced to fit on a sheet
of paper. You can also set the reduction rate to a fixed rate.
You can select one of the fixed rates to increase the amount
of reduction, or you can turn reduction off. (➞16-17)
RX REDUCTION
document image
Report: Activity
ACTIVITY REPORT
An Activity Management Report prints after every 40
transactions. Transactions are listed in chronological order.
You can turn this feature off or set the fax to print an
Activity Management Report at the same time every day.
You can also change the format of the report by listing
sending and receiving transactions separately. (➞16-9)
Management Report
Report: Confidential CONFID. RX
A report prints every time you receive a document in a
receiving
REPORT
confidential mailbox. You can turn this feature off. (➞16-8)
Report: Error
TX REPORT
REPORT WITH TX
IMAGE
If an error occurs while you are sending a document, an
Error TX report prints automatically. (➞16-8)
Report: Memory box MEMORY BOX
A report prints every time you receive a document in a
receiving
REPORT
memory box. This feature can be turned off. (➞16-8)
Report: Paper
supply for printed
reports
PRT REPORT
WHERE
The default setting is off (no paper cassette selected). You
can select a paper supply from Paper Cassette 1 or 2, or
the MP tray. (Paper Cassette 2 is optional for the LASER
®
CLASS 3170/3170MS.) (➞16-9)
12-14 Other Special Features
Chapter 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Feature
Menu Item
Description of default
Report: Receiving
RX REPORT
A report is not printed when you receive a fax. However,
you can set the fax to print a report every time you receive
a document or if an error occurs during reception. (➞16-8)
Restricting use:
DACs, user access
codes
RESTRICTIVE
CODES
No password or access codes are set on the fax to restrict
sending documents, printing, or using the handset to
make a telephone call. All these functions can be re-
stricted. (➞13-6, 16-28)
Restricting use:
RX RESTRICTION
The fax is set to receive all incoming documents. You can
restrict receiving to only numbers registered on your fax
for speed dialing. (➞13-16, 16-29)
Stopping junk mail
Speed
Stamp
TX START SPEED
RX START SPEED
The starting speed for all transactions is set for 33600 bps.
Slower settings are available. (➞16-30)
TX STAMP
If you have the optional stamp feature on your fax
machine, you can turn the stamp feature on with this
switch. The default setting is off. (➞12-8, 16-12)
Tel/Fax switching
Telephone line
MAN/AUTO
SWITCH
You can set a time interval for the fax to wait until it
automatically enters the document receive mode when the
fax is set for manual receiving. (➞16-14)
TEL LINE TYPE
Your fax is set to operate on a touch tone telephone line.
(➞3-10, 16-6)
Unit Name, Unit
DATE & TIME
UNIT TELEPHONE
UNIT NAME
Your registered identification and fax number are printed
at the top and outside of the image border of every
document you send. This feature is required by Telephone
Consumer Protection Act of 1991 in the United States. Your
number is prefixed with the word “FAX”. (➞3-12, 16-4,
16-5)
Telephone Number
#
Chapter 12
Other Special Features 12-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-16 Other Special Features
Chapter 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13
Restricting Use of the Fax
In this chapter we will show you how to protect the fax from unautho-
rized access.
Some of these features also allow you to keep track of fax transactions
based on division numbers or user access codes that you can assign to
individuals or sections inside your company.
❏ Setting and Using the System Settings Password .............................. 13-2
• Setting the System Settings Password ............................................ 13-2
• Changing or Canceling the System Settings Password ............... 13-4
❏ Restricting Fax Operation ...................................................................... 13-6
• Setting Operation Restrictions......................................................... 13-6
• Operating the Fax with Restrictions ON ......................................13-11
• Turning Restrictions OFF and ON ................................................ 13-14
❏ Receiving Documents from Registered Senders Only .................... 13-16
❏ Using Memory Lock ............................................................................. 13-17
• Setting a Time and Password for Memory Lock......................... 13-17
• Turning the Memory Lock ON ...................................................... 13-20
• Turning the Memory Lock OFF and Printing Documents ........ 13-20
❏ Setting Up and Using PIN Codes ....................................................... 13-21
• Setting a PIN Code .......................................................................... 13-21
• Dialing with a PIN Code after the Number ................................ 13-24
• Dialing with a PIN Code before the Number ............................. 13-25
• Setting PIN Code Access for Speed Dialing ................................ 13-26
• Using Speed Dialing with PIN Code Access ............................... 13-27
• Forced PIN Code Access ................................................................ 13-28
Chapter 13
Restricting Use of the Fax 13-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting and Using the System Settings Pass-
word
The system settings password protects all the settings in the System
Settings menu.
If you fail to create and safeguard a system password, then anyone can
open the System Settings menu and change or disable the settings.
Setting the System Settings Password
Follow this procedure to set the system settings password.
Open the SYSTEM SETTINGS menu.
1.
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
Data Registration.
Data
Registration
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
Set
Press Set.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
DATA REGISTRATION
7.SYSTEM SETTINGS
Set
Press Set.
SYSTEM SETTINGS
1.PASSWORD
13-2 Restricting Use of the Fax
Chapter 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set the system password.
2.
3.
Set
Press Set.
PASSWORD
_
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a four-digit
password between 0000 and 9999.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
PASSWORD
3377
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
Record the password number and store it in a safe location.
You must enter this system password every time you open the System
Settings menu.
Set
Press Set.
SYSTEM SETTINGS
2.RESTRICTIVE CODES
Stop
Press Stop to return to standby.
4.
Chapter 13
Restricting Use of the Fax 13-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing or Canceling the System Settings Password
Follow this procedure to cancel or change the System Settings password.
Open the SYSTEM SETTINGS with your password.
1.
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
Data Registration.
Data
Registration
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
Press Set.
Set
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
DATA REGISTRATION
7.SYSTEM SETTINGS
Set
Press Set.
SYSTEM SETTINGS
PASSWORD
_
Set
ABC
DEF
Enter the current four-digit system settings password. Then press
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
Set.
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
SYSTEM SETTINGS
1.PASSWORD
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
13-4 Restricting Use of the Fax
Chapter 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set
Press Set.
2.
3.
PASSWORD
_
Set
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the current
password. Then press Set. The current password is not displayed
as it is entered.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
PASSWORD
_
0
Tone
Set
ABC
DEF
Enter the new password and press Set. The new password is
4.
5.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
displayed as it is entered.
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
-if not-
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
To cancel the password setting, press Clear then Set.
0
Tone
SYSTEM SETTINGS
2.RESTRICTIVE CODES
Stop
Press Stop to return to standby.
Chapter 13
Restricting Use of the Fax 13-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Restricting Fax Operation
This section describes how to set up restrictions on operation of the fax.
We will first show you how to set up restrictions on sending documents,
printing fax reports and copying, and using the telephone. Then we will
show you how to use the fax with these restrictions on. Finally, we will
show you how to turn these restrictions off temporarily or make changes
in the settings.
The table below is a brief summary of how restrictive codes and pass-
words are used.
SENDING
Dept. access
Dept. access code With a password Every time you send a docu-
RESTRICTION code (DAC)
ON
ment, you must enter a
department code and password.
Without a
password
Every time you send a
document, you only have to
enter a department code.
Dept. access
code (DAC)
OFF
With user access code
Every time you send a
document, you only have to
enter a user access code.
No user access code
You cannot send a document
unless you turn sending
restriction OFF.
PRINTING
With user access code
Every time you make a copy
or print a report, you must
enter a user access code.
RESTRICTION
Without user access code
ON
You cannot print unless you
turn printing restriction OFF.
TELEPHONE
RESTRICTION
You cannot dial unless you
turn telephone restriction OFF.
Setting Operation Restrictions
You can create up to 19 department access codes (DACs) and passwords
to restrict sending operations on the fax. Follow this procedure to restrict
access to all of these features:
❏
❏
❏
Sending documents
Copying documents and printing fax reports
Using the telephone for voice communication
13-6 Restricting Use of the Fax
Chapter 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Open the SYSTEM SETTINGS menu with your system settings
1.
password. (➞13-4)
SYSTEM SETTINGS
1.PASSWORD
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
2.
3.
SYSTEM SETTINGS
2.RESTRICTIVE CODES
Turn on the transmission restriction feature.
Set
Set
Press Set.
RESTRICTIVE CODES
1.TX SETTINGS
Press Set.
TX SETTINGS
OFF
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
TX SETTINGS
ON
Set
Press Set.
DAC SETUP
OFF
Chapter 13
Restricting Use of the Fax 13-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enter the department access codes.
4.
Press the search buttons to display ON then press Set.
Set
DAC SETUP
ON
ENTER DAC
01:
If the first number is already in use, press the search buttons until
you see an empty line.
-if not-
If you do not want to set a department access code (DAC) and
want to use only the user access code for transactions, use the
search keys to display OFF, then press Set and go on to step 6 to
set the user access code. If you set only the user access code, you
have to enter only the user access code when you send a docu-
ment.
Set
Press Set.
Enter the department access code (DAC).
5.
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a four-digit code
for the department access code.
1
2
JKL
3
MNO
GHI
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
Set
Press Set.
DAC PASSWORD
_
13-8 Restricting Use of the Fax
Chapter 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enter the department access code password or the user access
code.
6.
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a four-digit code
for the department access code password or the user access code.
1
2
JKL
3
MNO
GHI
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
DAC PASSWORD
2222
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
or
0
Tone
USER ACCESS CODE
1234
Set
Press Set.
ENTER DAC
02:
-if not-
If you do not want to enter a password so you can use only the
department access code for transactions, just press Set and go on
to the next step. If you set only the department access code, you
have to enter only the department access code when you send a
document.
You can now repeat steps 4 and 5 to enter other department access
codes and passwords.
ENTER DAC
10:
Data
Registration
When you are finished, press Data Registration to return to the
7.
8.
previous level of the menu.
RESTRICTIVE CODES
2.FAX’S PRINTER SET
Turn on the restrictions for printing.
Set
Press Set.
FAX’S PRINTER SET
OFF
Chapter 13
Restricting Use of the Fax 13-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the search buttons to display ON.
FAX’S PRINTER SET
ON
Set
Press Set.
USER ACCESS CODE
_
Enter a user access code to protect the copying and printing
features.
9.
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter a four-digit user
access code.
1
2
JKL
3
MNO
GHI
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
This user access code is used only to restrict access to copying and
printing.
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
USER ACCESS CODE
2894
0
Tone
Set
Press Set.
RESTRICTIVE CODES
3.TEL SETTING
Turn off access to the telephone.
10.
Set
Press Set.
TEL SETTING
OFF
Press the search buttons to display ON.
TEL SETTING
ON
Set
Press Set. This disables the telephone handset and the Hook button
on the operation panel.
13-10 Restricting Use of the Fax
Chapter 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This concludes the restrictive settings for sending, printing, and
using the telephone.
Stop
Press Stop to return to standby.
11.
Operating the Fax with Restrictions ON
This section describes how to operate the fax with the operation restric-
tion features set up and turned on.
Sending a Document with Restrictions ON
Follow this procedure to send a document after department access codes
(DAC) and passwords have been set up.
Set the document on the fax. (➞6-3)
1.
Set the document resolution, contrast, and document type. (➞6-4)
You can also select a sender’s name with the TTI Selector. (➞6-6)
Dial the other party’s fax number.
2.
ABC
DEF
Use regular dialing to dial a number. (➞6-7)
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
-if not-
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
Press a One-touch Speed Dialing button to dial the number. (➞4-29)
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
-if not-
0
Press Coded Dial and a three-digit code to dial the number. (➞4-31)
-if not-
Tone
Dial the number with directory dialing. (➞4-35)
Start / Scan
Press Start/Scan.
3.
If you see this message, you have to enter the department access
code. Go on to step 4.
ENTER DAC
_
Chapter 13
Restricting Use of the Fax 13-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
-if not-
If you see this message, you have to enter the user access code. Go
on to step 5.
USER ACCESS CODE
_
Enter the DAC (department access code).
4.
5.
Set
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit
1
2
JKL
3
MNO
GHI
DAC (department access code) then press Set.
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
DAC PASSWORD
_
0
Tone
If you enter the wrong department access code, the fax beeps and
waits for you to enter the correct code.
Enter the DAC password or user access code.
Set
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
DAC password or user access code then press Set.
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
If you enter the wrong password, the fax beeps and waits for you
to enter the correct password.
0
Tone
After you enter the department access code and password or user
access code correctly, the fax sends the document.
Making a Copy with Restrictions ON
Follow this procedure to make a copy with the printing restriction set up
and turned on.
Set the document on the fax.
1.
2.
DOCUMENT READY
Copy
Press Copy.
USER ACCESS CODE
_
13-12 Restricting Use of the Fax
Chapter 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit user
access code that you set previously to restrict access to copying.
Then press Set.
3.
4.
ABC
DEF
1
2
JKL
3
MNO
GHI
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
COPY
01
CASSETTE 1
LTR
0
Tone
Follow the normal procedure to complete copying the document.
(➞5-6)
Printing a Report with Restrictions ON
Follow this procedure to print a report about information stored in the
fax with the printing restriction set up and turned on.
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
1.
Report.
Report
REPORT
1.ACTIVITY REPORT
Press the search buttons to select the type of report you want to
print then press Set.
2.
3.
Set
USER ACCESS CODE
_
Set
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit user
access code you set to protect printing reports. Then press Set.
ABC
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
The fax starts printing the report.
OPER
0
Tone
PRINTING REPORT
Using the Telephone with Restrictions ON
When the telephone restriction feature is turned on, the handset and
Hook button are disabled. If you pick up the handset or press the Hook
button, you will not hear a dial tone.
Chapter 13
Restricting Use of the Fax 13-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning Restrictions OFF and ON
Follow this procedure to turn off the following features temporarily
without changing the settings.
Open the SYSTEM SETTINGS menu with your system settings
1.
password. (➞13-4)
SYSTEM SETTINGS
1.PASSWORD
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
2.
3.
4.
SYSTEM SETTINGS
2.RESTRICTIVE CODES
Set
Press Set.
RESTRICTIVE CODES
1.TX SETTINGS
Press the search buttons to display the feature you want to turn
off.
RESTRICTIVE CODES
1.TX SETTINGS
RESTRICTIVE CODES
3.TEL SETTING
To turn off restricted sending
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
RESTRICTIVE CODES
1.TX SETTINGS
Set
Press Set.
TX SETTINGS
ON
13-14 Restricting Use of the Fax
Chapter 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the search buttons to display OFF, then press Set.
Set
To turn off restricted printing
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
RESTRICTIVE CODES
2.FAX’S PRINTER SET
Set
Press Set.
FAX’S PRINTER SET
ON
Press the search buttons to display OFF, then press Set.
Set
To turn off restricted use of the telephone
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
RESTRICTIVE CODES
3.TEL SETTING
Set
Press Set.
TEL SETTING
ON
Press the search buttons to display OFF, then press Set.
Set
Stop
Press Stop to return to standby.
5.
To turn the settings on again, just repeat this procedure from step 1 and
select ON.
Chapter 13
Restricting Use of the Fax 13-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Receiving Documents from Registered
Senders Only
Follow this procedure to turn restricted receiving on and off. Restricted
receiving limits document reception to fax units whose telephone
numbers are registered on your fax for One-touch or Coded Speed
Dialing buttons. You cannot receive a document from another fax unless
it is registered on your fax for a speed dialing button, so the fax will not
receive unsolicited direct mail.
Open the SYSTEM SETTINGS menu with your system settings
1.
2.
password. (➞13-4)
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
SYSTEM SETTINGS
4.RX RESTRICTION
Set
Set
Press Set.
3.
4.
Press the search buttons to display the setting you want, then
press Set.
RX RESTRICTION
OFF
RX RESTRICTION
ON
OFF
Your fax will receive a document even if the fax tele-
phone number of the originator is not registered on your
fax for a One-touch Speed Dialing or a Coded Speed
Dialing button. However, other restrictions like pass-
words, subaddresses, and so on, still apply.
ON
Your fax will receive a document only if the fax tele-
phone number of the originator is registered on your fax
for a One-touch Speed Dialing or a Coded Speed Dialing
button.
Stop
Press Stop to return to standby.
5.
13-16 Restricting Use of the Fax
Chapter 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Memory Lock
Normally a document prints as soon as you receive it. However, there
may be occasions when you want the fax to store all documents in the
memory until you are ready to print them. Locking the fax to receive and
store all documents in the memory is called memory lock.
You may want to turn the memory lock on when the fax is left
unattended at night or over long holidays to prevent a large volume of
printed documents from collecting on the paper output tray. After you
return to the office, you can review the contents of the memory and then
enter the memory lock password to print all the documents stored in the
memory.
Setting aATfitemr teheamnedmoPryalsocskwisoturrdnefdoorn,Mthee fmaxowriyll aLutoocmkatically enter and
leave the memory lock mode at times you specify. The documents
received when the fax is in the memory lock mode are stored in the
memory until you unlock the memory with a password and print them.
Follow the procedure below to define a memory lock password and set
the times for the fax to enter and leave the memory lock mode.
Open the MEMORY LOCK menu.
1.
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
Data Registration.
Data
Registration
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
Set
Press Set.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
DATA REGISTRATION
7.SYSTEM SETTINGS
Chapter 13
Restricting Use of the Fax 13-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set
Press Set. Be sure to enter your system settings password if you
have one.
SYSTEM SETTINGS
1.PASSWORD
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
SYSTEM SETTINGS
3.MEMORY LOCK RX
Set
Press Set.
MEMORY LOCK RX
OFF
Turn on the memory lock feature.
2.
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
MEMORY LOCK RX
ON
Set
Set
Press Set.
Press the search buttons to display the setting you want and press
3.
4.
Set.
MEMORY LOCK RX
1.MEM LOCK PASSWORD
MEMORY LOCK RX
3.TIME SETUP
For details about setting up the memory lock feature, refer to the
summary below.
13-18 Restricting Use of the Fax
Chapter 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Lock Setup Summary
The default settings, shown in bold, remain in effect unless you change them.
1.MEM LOCK PASSWORD
0000 to 9999
This password protects the memory lock settings. You must
also use this password to unlock the memory so you can
print documents stored in the memory. Use the buttons on
the numeric keypad to enter a four-digit password and
press Set.
2.REPORT
Set the fax to print reports or not. This setting affects only
reports that print automatically, such as Activity Reports for
sending and receiving, and Activity Management Reports.
OUTPUT NO
No report prints while in the memory
lock mode.
OUTPUT YES
A report prints while the fax is in the
memory lock mode.
3.TIME SETUP
Set the times for the fax to enter and leave the memory lock
mode. The time settings are optional. If you do not set the
times, you can use the Memory Reception button to turn the
memory lock feature on and off.
OFF
Turns off the timer setup. You can turn
the memory lock mode on and off with
the Memory Reception button.
ON
Turns on the timer setup. You can still
use the Memory Reception button to turn
the memory lock mode on and off.
1. START TIME Sets the time for the fax to enter the
memory lock mode.
EVERYDAY Set the time in 24-hour format. Up to 5
starting times can be specified for every
day or each selected day.
SELECT DAYS
2. END TIME
Sets the time for the fax to leave the
memory lock mode.
EVERYDAY Set the time in 24-hour format. Up to 5
starting times can be specified for every
day or each selected day.
SELECT DAYS
Chapter 13
Restricting Use of the Fax 13-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning the Memory Lock ON
Follow this procedure to put the fax in the memory lock mode if the
memory lock mode timer has not been set or if you want to put the fax in
the memory lock mode before the timer turns the memory lock on.
If the timer is set for the memory lock feature, the fax will enter and
leave the memory lock mode automatically. (➞13-17)
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
1.
Memory Reception.
Memory
Reception
MEM LOCK PASSWORD
_
Set
ABC
DEF
Enter the memory lock password then press Set.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
MEMORY LOCK RX
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
The fax is now in the memory lock receive mode. All documents
will be received in the memory until you unlock memory receiv-
ing and print them.
Turning the Memory Lock OFF and Printing Documents
Follow this procedure to turn the memory lock off and print the
documents received in the memory.
If the timer is set for the memory lock feature, the fax will enter and
leave the memory lock mode automatically. (➞13-17)
When the memory lock is on, a message is displayed.
1.
MEMORY LOCK RX
13-20 Restricting Use of the Fax
Chapter 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
2.
3.
Memory Reception.
Memory
Reception
MEM LOCK PASSWORD
_
Set
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
memory lock password and press Set.
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
All the documents received in the memory while the fax was in
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
the memory lock mode are printed.
0
Tone
Setting Up and Using PIN Codes
PIN (Personal Identification Number) codes prevent unauthorized
personnel from making calls. To protect privileged access to the tele-
phone lines, only authorized users are entrusted with the PIN codes for
daily operations. Some Private Branch Exchange (PBX) systems require
that a PIN code be entered when dialing a number to make a call or send
a document by fax. Depending on the requirements of the PBX system,
the PIN code may be entered either before the number as a prefix, or
after the number as a suffix.
If your PBX requires a PIN code to connect to an outside line, the fax
machine can be set up with the USER DATA SETTINGS to prompt you
for a PIN code every time you dial.
Setting a PIN Code
Open the TX SETTINGS menu.
1.
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels and press
Data Registration.
Data
Registration
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
Set
Press Set.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
Chapter 13
Restricting Use of the Fax 13-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
DATA REGISTRATION
3.TX SETTINGS
Set
Press Set.
TX SETTINGS
1.ECM TX
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
2.
TX SETTINGS
7.PIN CODE
If the TX STAMP option has been installed, this item will appear
as 8.PIN CODE.
Set
Press Set.
3.
4.
5.
PIN CODE
OFF
Press the search buttons until ON appears.
PIN CODE
ON
Set
Press Set.
NECESS. PIN CODE
OFF
13-22 Restricting Use of the Fax
Chapter 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set
If your PBX requires PIN code entry depending on destination,
press Set to leave NECESS. PIN CODE set to OFF.
6.
-if not-
If your PBX always requires PIN code entry, press the search
buttons until ON appears.
NECESS. PIN CODE
ON
Set
Set
Press Set.
7.
8.
PIN CODE BEF/AFT
BEFORE TEL NO.
To select BEFORE TEL NO., press Set.
-if not-
To select AFTER TEL NO., press the search buttons until AFTER
TEL NO. appears and press Set.
Set
Stop
Press Stop.
9.
Chapter 13
Restricting Use of the Fax 13-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dialing wWithhenaNPEICNESCS. oPIdNeCOaDftEeorf tthheepiNn cuomdebseettring (➞13-22) is OFF, you
can operate as described below.
Set the document on the fax machine.
1.
DOCUMENT READY
ABC
DEF
Enter the telephone number.
2.
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
TEL =
123 4567
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels, press Pin
Code, then press Set.
3.
Pin Code
TEL =
123 4567C
Set
Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each number in a sequential broadcast.
4.
5.
Start / Scan
Press Start/Scan.
ENTER PIN CODE
ABC
DEF
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the PIN code.
6.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
ENTER PIN CODE
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
********
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
The PIN code is not displayed as it is entered.
0
Tone
Set
Press Set to start the transmission.
7.
13-24 Restricting Use of the Fax
Chapter 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dialing wWithhenaNPEICNESCS. oPIdNeCObDeEfoofrtehethpien cNoduemsetbtinegr(➞13-22) is OFF, you
can operate as described below.
Set the document on the fax machine.
1.
DOCUMENT READY
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels and press
2.
Pin Code.
TEL=
C
Pin Code
Set
Use the buttons on the numeric keypad to enter the other party’s
3.
ABC
DEF
fax number. Then press Set.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
TEL=
C123 4567
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each number in a sequential broadcast.
4.
5.
Start / Scan
Press Start/Scan.
ENTER PIN CODE
ABC
DEF
Enter the PIN code with the buttons on the numeric keypad. A
maximum of 20 digits can be entered.
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
ENTER PIN CODE
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
********
The PIN code is not displayed as it is entered.
0
Tone
Set
Press Set to start transmission.
Restricting Use of the Fax 13-25
7.
Chapter 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting PTINhisCmoetdhoedAallcowces ysosu tfoorregSistpereOende-tDouiachlianndgCoded Speed Dialing
buttons for PIN Code Access. When a user attempts to dial with a speed
dialing button, the fax machine will prompt the user to enter a PIN Code.
When NECESS. PIN CODE of the pin code setting (➞13-22) is OFF, you
can operate as described below.
Select the speed dialing location to register the telephone number.
1.
(➞4-7, 4-16)
TELEPHONE NUMBER
TEL=_
Pin Code
If the PIN code is to be dialed before the telephone number, press
2.
Pin Code then enter the telephone number.
TELEPHONE NUMBER
TEL=C123 4567
-if not-
Pin Code
If the PIN code is to be dialed after the telephone number, enter
the telephone number then press Pin Code.
TELEPHONE NUMBER
TEL=123 4567C
Set
Press Set.
3.
4.
5.
Repeat the procedure to continue registering additional numbers.
When you are finished, press Stop.
Stop
13-26 Restricting Use of the Fax
Chapter 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using SpIef eyodu DregiaistleirntghewPIiNthCoPdeINentCryowdheenArecgicsteersinsg automatic dialing
(➞13-26), do the following procedures.
Set the document on the fax machine.
1.
2.
3.
4.
DOCUMENT READY
Press a speed dialing button.
1
Coded Dial
TEL=
C123 4567
72
01 CANON
Start / Scan
Press Start/Scan.
ENTER PIN CODE
ABC
DEF
Enter the PIN code using the buttons on the numeric keypad.
A maximum of 20 digits can be entered for the PIN code.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
ENTER PIN CODE
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
********
OPER
0
The PIN code is not displayed as it is entered.
Tone
Set
Press Set to start transmission.
5.
Chapter 13
Restricting Use of the Fax 13-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Forced PIN Code Access
Follow this procedure to dial when Forced PIN Code Access (NECESS.
PIN CODE) has been turned ON. With Forced PIN Code Access ON, you
must enter a PIN Code every time you dial. The PIN Code must be
entered either before or after the number, depending on how PIN Code
Access has been set up. (➞13-23)
Set the document on the facsimile.
1.
DOCUMENT READY
ABC
DEF
Dial the telephone number with the numeric keypad or the speed
dialing buttons.
2.
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
TEL=
123 4567
01 CANON
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
0
Tone
Start / Scan
Press Start/Scan.
3.
4.
ENTER PIN CODE
ABC
DEF
Enter the PIN code with the buttons on the numeric keypad.
A maximum of 20 digits can be entered for the PIN code.
1
GHI
2
JKL
3
MNO
4
PRS
5
TUV
6
WXY
ENTER PIN CODE
9
SYMBOLS
7
8
OPER
*******
0
The PIN code is not displayed as it is entered.
Tone
Set
Press Set.
5.
The fax starts to send the document.
13-28 Restricting Use of the Fax
Chapter 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14
Printing Reports and Lists
This chapter shows you how to print lists and reports.
You can print lists of telephone numbers and transmissions settings
registered in the fax, as well as print reports about document transactions.
❏ Printing the Speed Dialing Lists ........................................................... 14-2
❏ Printing the User Data List .................................................................... 14-5
❏ Printing the List of Sender Names ....................................................... 14-6
❏ Reports...................................................................................................... 14-8
• Printing the Activity Management Report .................................... 14-9
• Setting and Using Activity Reports ...............................................14-11
❏ Memory Lists ......................................................................................... 14-17
Chapter 14
Printing Reports and Lists 14-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing the Speed Dialing Lists
Follow this procedure to print the speed dialing lists. You can print two
types of One-touch or Coded Speed Dialing list: a standard list (List 1) or
a detailed list (List 2).
Open the SPEED DIAL LIST menu.
1.
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
Report.
Report
REPORT
1.ACTIVITY REPORT
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
REPORT
2.SPEED DIAL LIST
Set
Press Set.
SPEED DIAL LIST
1.1-TOUCH LIST
Press the search buttons to display the name of the list you want
to print.
2.
1.1-TOUCH LIST
Prints the standard list (List 1) of all One-
touch Speed Dialing buttons and numbers
registered in the fax.
2.CODED DIAL LIST Prints the standard list (List 1) of all Coded
Speed Dialing buttons and numbers
registered in the fax.
3.1-TOUCH (DETAIL) Prints the detailed list (List 2) of all One-
touch Speed Dialing buttons and numbers
registered in the fax in a stacked format.
4.CODED (DETAIL) Prints the detailed list (List 2) of all Coded
Speed Dialing buttons and numbers
registered in the fax in a stacked format.
5.GROUP DIAL LIST Prints the list of buttons and numbers
registered for Group Dialing.
14-2 Printing Reports and Lists
Chapter 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set
Press Set.
3.
4.
The Group Dial list starts printing.
SORTED OUTPUT
1.NO
1.NO
2.YES
The One-touch or Coded Speed Dial list is printed in
order of the Speed Dial numeric list, from the lowest
number to the highest number.
The Connection ID (name) column is sorted and the
One-touch or Coded Speed Dial list is printed in alpha-
betical order.
Press the search buttons to display YES or NO. Press Set.
After you press Set, the report starts printing.
PRINTING REPORT
Set
Samples of each type of list are shown below.
One-Touch Speed Dial List 1
12/31/1999 10:32 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE,INC.
001
***********************************
1-TOUCH SPD DIAL LIST
1
***
***
***********************************
NO.
01] 732 2233
02] 761 1298
CONNECTION TEL
CONNECTION ID
TX TYPE
REGULAR TX
REGULAR TX
REGULAR TX
REGULAR TX
[
[
[
[
ADAM BOOKS,CPA
JOHN BARRISTER
NATALIE SMITH
SEYMOUR GREEN
23:00
23:00
04]
03]
1
1
516 911 4411
914 438 3619
Coded Speed Dial List 1
12/31/1999 10:47 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE,INC.
001
***********************************
CODED SPEED DIAL LIST
1
***
***
***********************************
NO.
CONNECTION TEL
CONNECTION ID
BILL
HUNT INVESTMENTS REGULAR TX
TX TYPE
[
[
[
[
000] 555 1234
REGULAR TX
*
*
*
*
002] 16172223322
003] 312 538 4005
001] 14043333499
23:00
23:00
1
LAKESIDE INC.
PEACHTREE,INC.
REGULAR TX
REGULAR TX
Chapter 14
Printing Reports and Lists 14-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
One-Touch Speed Dial List 2
12/31/1999 09:41 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE,INC.
001
***********************************
1-TOUCH SPD DIAL LIST
2
***
***
***********************************
[
[
[
01]
02]
03]
CONNECTION TEL
CONNECTION ID
TX START TIME
TX SPEED
TX TYPE
ECM
889 344 222
AK ENTERPRISES
(1)10:00
33600bps(0)
REGULAR TX
ON
(2)12:00
(3)14:00
(4)16:00
(5)18:00
CONNECTION TEL
CONNECTION ID
TX START TIME
TX SPEED
TX TYPE
ECM
513 931 7660
ENVIRONS CORP.
(1)23:00
33600bps(0)
REGULAR TX
ON
(2)08:00
(3)
(4)
(5)
CONNECTION TEL
CONNECTION ID
TX START TIME
TX SPEED
291 4564
ACTUAL ASSOC.
(1)18:00
9600bps(0)
CONFID. TX
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
TX TYPE
SUBADDRESS
ECM
00000000
ON
Coded Speed Dial List 2
12/31/1999 09:53 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE,INC.
001
***********************************
CODED SPEED DIAL LIST
2
***
***
***********************************
[
[
[
024]
075]
080]
CONNECTION TEL
CONNECTION ID
TX START TIME
TX SPEED
TX TYPE
ECM
982 8877
AK ASSOCIATES
(1)10:00
33600bps(0)
REGULAR TX
ON
*
*
*
(2)12:00
(2)08:00
(2)
(3)14:00
(4)16:00
(5)18:00
CONNECTION TEL
CONNECTION ID
TX START TIME
TX SPEED
TX TYPE
ECM
712 0965
T&S DESIGNS
(1)23:30
33600bps(0)
REGULAR TX
ON
(3)
(4)
(5)
CONNECTION TEL
CONNECTION ID
TX START TIME
TX SPEED
342 8734
ARK TRAVEL
(1)18:00
9600bps(0)
CONFID. TX
(3)
(4)
(5)
TX TYPE
SUBADDRESS
ECM
11111111
ON
Group Dial List
12/31/1999 10:07 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE,INC.
001
***************************
GROUP DIAL LIST
***
***
***************************
[
05]
CANON GROUP
[
[
[
[
001] 225 7823
010] 233 7766
01] 876 2398
02] 613 9076
CANON NY
*
*
CANON CA
CANON TX
CANON OH
14-4 Printing Reports and Lists
Chapter 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing the User Data List
Follow this procedure to print a comprehensive list of the current user
data and other settings.
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
1.
Report.
REPORT
1.ACTIVITY REPORT
Report
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
2.
3.
4.
REPORT
3.USER DATA LIST
Set
Set
Press Set.
USER DATA LIST
1.USER DATA
Press Set to start printing.
After you press Set, the report starts printing.
PRINTING REPORT
User’s Data List
12/31/1999 13:36 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE,INC.
001
***************************
USER'S DATA LIST
***
***
***************************
1.USER SETTINGS
UNIT TELEPHONE
UNIT NAME
#
833 4423
WORLD ESTATE,INC.
TX TERMINAL ID
TTI POSITION
ON
OUTSIDE IMAGE
FAX
TELEPHONE
#
MARK
After you have installed the
optional Dual-line Upgrade Kit
II, the settings selections you
register for Line 2 will appear in
the User Data List. (➞16-32)
8.DUAL LINE OPTIONS
2nd LINE TEL
2nd LINE TYPE
TX LINE PRIORITY
#
TOUCH TONE
LINE1 TX PRIORITY
TOTAL FTAOXTAMLEFMAOXRYMEMORY
7MByte
Chapter 14
Printing Reports and Lists 14-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing the List of Sender Names
Follow this procedure to print a list of sender names registered in the fax.
❏
❏
The sender names are names registered to print at the top of docu-
ments you send in place of the unit name. (➞3-12)
Sender names are selected by pressing TTI Selector just before you
send a document. (➞6-6)
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
1.
Report.
REPORT
1.ACTIVITY REPORT
Report
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
2.
3.
4.
REPORT
3.USER DATA LIST
Set
Press Set.
USER DATA LIST
1.USER DATA
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
USER DATA LIST
2.SENDER’S NAME
14-6 Printing Reports and Lists
Chapter 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set
Press Set.
5.
After you press Set, the report starts printing.
PRINTING REPORT
Sender Name List
12/31/1999 13:38 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE,INC.
001
***********************
SENDER NAME
***
***
***********************
01:R.LOUIS
04:B.THOMAS
02:S.ROBERTS
05:F.DILLON
03:R.SEAL
06:B.DWYER
Chapter 14
Printing Reports and Lists 14-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reports
Reports contain information about past fax transactions. The Activity
Report or the Activity Management Report prints a list of the past 40
transactions, and other reports report information about transactions as
they occur.
Here is a summary of some of the abbreviations used in activity reports.
ST. TIME
USAGE T
Represents the time the last attempt was made to
transmit a document.
Represents the amount of time it took during the last
attempt to transmit. Note that the usage time does not
reflect the total usage time used to transmit all pages of
the document when a retry occurs. By printing an
ACTIVITY MANAGEMENT REPORT and matching the
transaction number of the TX REPORT with the transac-
tion number on the ACTIVITY MANAGEMENT
REPORT you can know exactly how many attempts
were made to send the document, how many pages
were sent each attempt as well as the usage time for
each attempt. The usage time is printed in the RESULT
column of the ACTIVITY MANAGEMENT REPORT
along with any error codes. Two types of ACTIVITY
MANAGEMENT REPORT are available, standard
(➞14-9, 16-9) or TX/RX separate. (➞14-10, 16-9)
PGS.
Represents the total number of pages that were success-
fully transmitted.
RESULT
OK means all pages were transmitted either during the
first attempt or after the first or second redial attempt.
The default, which is two redial attempts, can be
changed. (➞6-20, 16-11)
NG means that either some or no pages were transmit-
ted after two redial attempts. The default, which is two
redial attempts, can be changed. (➞6-20, 16-11)
14-8 Printing Reports and Lists
Chapter 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing tFhoelloAwcthtiisvpirtoyceMduarentoapgreinmt aelisnttofRtheepproevritous 40 transactions on
your fax.
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
1.
Report.
REPORT
1.ACTIVITY REPORT
Report
Set
Press Set.
2.
After you press Set, the fax prints an Activity Management Report
in the standard format with all transactions listed chronologically.
Activity Management Report
12/31/1999 14:36 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE,INC.
001
***************************
ACTIVITY REPORT
***
***
***************************
ST. TIME
CONNECTION TEL/ID
ADAM BOOK,CPA
SENDER NAME
S.ROBERTS
NO.
MODE
PGS.
1
RESULT
12/31 12:28
0007 TRANSMIT
ECM
ECM
OK
NG
NG
OK
00'16
00'20
*
*
*
732 2233
12/31 12:49
12/31 13:08
12/31 14:34
BELZER,INC.
5005 AUTO RX
0011 TRANSMIT
5010 RELAY RX
1
2
1
1
1
213 978 3314
213 978 3314 R.LOUIS
0
0
STOP
00'00
#0995
00'18
ADAM BOOK,CPA
732 2233
3333
SUBADDRESS
You can set the fax to print sending and receiving transactions
separately by setting the ACTIVITY REPORT item in the Report
Settings menu. (➞16-9)
Chapter 14
Printing Reports and Lists 14-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Samples are shown below.
Activity Management Report (TX/RX separate)
12/31/1999 15:03 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE,INC.
001
*****************************************
ACTIVITY MANAGEMENT REPORT TX
***
***
*****************************************
ST. TIME
CONNECTION TEL/ID
ADAM BOOK,CPA
732 2233
SENDER NAME
NO.
MODE
PGS.
1
RESULT
12/31 11:18
0004 TRANSMIT
0011 TRANSMIT
0013 B'CAST
ECM
ECM
ECM
OK
NG
OK
00'28
*
*
*
12/31 13:08
12/31 14:05
R.LOUIS
2
1
00'00
#0995
00'15
0
SEYMOUR GREEN
914 438 3619
1
*****************************************
ACTIVITY MANAGEMENT REPORT RX
***
***
*****************************************
ST. TIME
CONNECTION TEL/ID
BELZER,INC.
RX NAME
S.ROBERTS
NO.
MODE
PGS.
1
RESULT
12/31 12:49
5005 AUTO RX
ECM
NG
NG
00'20
STOP
00'00
*
*
IF MARKED WITH AN
ASTERISK, THE
DOCUMENT HAS
ALREADY BEEN
PRINTED OUT.
1
213 978 3314
1
0
12/31 14:33
5007 CONFID. RX
1
#0995
TRANSACTION NUMBER
SENDING MODE
TRANSACTION VIA ERROR CORRECTION MODE (ECM)
NUMBER OF PAGES TRANSMITTED BEFORE AN ERROR
ERROR CODES (SEE TABLE IN CHAPTER 15)
STOP WAS PRESSED DURING TRANSACTION
Note the following additional features you can set up with the ACTIV-
ITY REPORT item in the REPORT SETTINGS menu.
❏
❏
❏
The fax is set to print an Activity Management Report automatically
after 40 transactions. You can turn this feature off. (➞16-9)
You can set the fax to print an Activity Management Report at the
same time every day. (➞16-9)
If you set up department access codes, when this feature is turned on
transactions are listed by department in the Department Access Code
Report shown below.
14-10 Printing Reports and Lists
Chapter 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Department Access Code Report
12/31/1999 15:14 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE,INC.
001
**************************
ACTIVITY REPORT
***
***
**************************
DEPT. ACCESS CODE:1222
ST. TIME
CONNECTION TEL/ID
ADAM BOOK,CPA
SENDER NAME
S.ROBERTS
NO.
MODE
PGS.
1
RESULT
12/31 15:11
0015 TRANSMIT
ECM
ECM
OK
00'15
*
732 2233
DEPT. ACCESS CODE:3111
CONNECTION TEL/ID
SEYMOUR GREEN
ST. TIME
SENDER NAME
NO.
MODE
PGS.
1
RESULT
12/31 15:12
*
R.LOUIS
0016 TRANSMIT
OK
00'16
1
914 438 3619
Setting and Using Activity Reports
For details about setting up these activity reports to print (or turning
them off) refer to the Report Settings summary at the end of this User’s
Guide. (➞16-7)
Error Report (TX)
The fax is set to print a report if an error occurs during sending. This is
the default setting for the Report Settings. (➞16-8)
12/31/1999 11:48 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE,INC.
001
***************************
ERROR TX REPORT
***
***
***************************
TX FUNCTION WAS NOT COMPLETED
TX/RX NO
0006
CONNECTION TEL
CONNECTION ID
ST. TIME
761 1298
JOHN BARRISTER
12/31 11:48
USAGE
PGS. SENT
RESULT
T
00'00
0
NG
STOP
Chapter 14
Printing Reports and Lists 14-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transmission (TX) Report
You can change the Report Settings to print a transmission report for
every document you send. (➞16-8)
12/31/1999 13:34 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE,INC.
001
*********************
TX REPORT
***
***
*********************
TRANSMISSION OK
TX/RX NO
0012
CONNECTION TEL
CONNECTION ID
ST. TIME
761 1298
JOHN BARRISTER
12/31 13:30
USAGE
PGS. SENT
RESULT
T
00'16
1
OK
14-12 Printing Reports and Lists
Chapter 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transmission (TX) Report with first page
You can adjust the transmission report setting to print the first part of the
document as part of the report to remind you of the content of the
document. (➞16-8) This is only effective when you send documents by
Memory Sending.
12/31/1999 12:28 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE,INC.
001
*********************
TX REPORT
***
***
*********************
TRANSMISSION OK
TX/RX NO
0007
2222
DEPT. ACCESS CODE
CONNECTION TEL
CONNECTION ID
ST. TIME
THIS ITEM
APPEARS ONLY IF
THE DAC
732 2233
ADAM BOOKS,CPA
12/31 12:28
(DEPARTMENT
ACCESS CODE)
HAS BEEN SET.
USAGE
PGS. SENT
RESULT
T
00'16
1
OK
December 28, 1999
Dear Member,
By now you have all had a chance to become familiar with your new
Canon fax units and are ready to set up a reliable, economical
communications network that offers many exciting features.
We can save money by scanning documents in the memory and then
setting the delayed timer to send all the documents at the same
time later at night to take advantage of late night rates.
Many of us are separated by long distances and reside in
different time zones. We can set up the polling feature to poll
and receive documents from each other when we are not in the
office. For sensitive material about clients and confidential
bids, we can set up and use the confidential mailbox features. We
will also be able to keep down costs by limiting use of the fax
to operators who know the correct department codes and passwords.
Relay sending is another money saver. We can designate one relay
fax in your area, send one transmission from the home office on
the East coast and then have the document relayed to you locally.
We hope you will have these features set up in the very near
future so we can enjoy more efficient, secure, and economical
facsimile communications.
Chapter 14
Printing Reports and Lists 14-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multi-transaction Report
If the transmission was a sequential broadcast, then a Multi- transaction
Report is printed.
12/31/1999 14:05 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE,INC.
001
******************************
MULTI TX/RX REPORT
***
***
******************************
TX/RX NO
PGS.
0013
1
TX/RX INCOMPLETE
TRANSACTION OK
[
[
[
02]761 1298
01]732 2233
03]1 914 438 3619
JOHN BARRISTER
ADAM BOOKS,CPA
SEYMOUR GREEN
ERROR INFORMATION
-----
Error Report (RX)
You can set the fax to print a report every time an error occurs during
document receiving. Otherwise, only an error message is displayed.
(➞16-8)
12/31/1999 12:50 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE,INC.
001
*********************
RX REPORT
***
***
*********************
INCOMPLETE RECEPTION
TX/RX NO
5005
CONNECTION TEL
CONNECTION ID
ST. TIME
1
213 978 3314
BELZER,INC.
12/31 12:49
USAGE
PGS.
T
00'20
0
RESULT
NG
STOP
14-14 Printing Reports and Lists
Chapter 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reception (RX) Report
You can set the fax to print an activity report every time you receive a
document. (➞16-8)
12/31/1999 14:08 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE,INC.
001
*********************
RX REPORT
***
***
*********************
RECEPTION OK
TX/RX NO
5008
CONNECTION TEL
CONNECTION ID
ST. TIME
1
213 978 3314
BELZER,INC.
12/31 14:07
USAGE
PGS.
T
00'17
1
RESULT
OK
Confidential Receive Report
When the fax receives a confidential document, it displays a message
and prints a report.
RECEIVED IN MAILBOX
12/31/1999 13:34 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE,INC.
001
*****************************
CONFID. RX REPORT
***
***
*****************************
CONFID. MBOX
#
#01
CONFID. MBOX NAME
TX/RX NO
LOUIS
5007
CONNECTION TEL
SUBADDRESS
1
213 978 3314
1111
CONNECTION ID
ST. TIME
BELZER,INC.
12/31 13:33
USAGE
PGS.
T
00'18
1
RESULT
OK
Printing this report can be turned off with the User Data Settings.
(➞16-8)
Chapter 14
Printing Reports and Lists 14-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Box Report
The fax prints a Memory Box Report as soon as a document is received in
a memory box.
12/31/1999 13:29 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE,INC.
001
*****************************
MEMORY BOX REPORT
***
***
*****************************
BOX
#
#66
FILE NAME
TX/RX NO
R.LOUIS
5006
CONNECTION TEL
SUBADDRESS
CONNECTION ID
ST. TIME
1
213 978 3314
0000
BELZER,INC.
12/31 13:29
USAGE
PGS.
T
00'18
1
RESULT
OK
This feature can be turned off with the User Data Settings. (➞16-8)
Relay Broadcast Report
The Relay Broadcast Report is sent from a relay unit to the originator
after the documents from the originator have been relayed by the relay
unit. This feature is set with the TX REPORT item in the RELAY TX
GROUP menu. (➞9-7, 16-22)
12/31/1999 14:37 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE,INC.
→ ADAM BOOK,CPA
001/001
**********************************
RELAY BROADCAST REPORT
***
***
**********************************
TX/RX NO
5010
PGS.
1
TX/RX INCOMPLETE
TRANSACTION OK
[
[
[
02]761 1298
01]732 2233
03]1 914 438 3619
JOHN BARRISTER
ADAM BOOKS,CPA
SEYMOUR GREEN
ERROR INFORMATION
-----
14-16 Printing Reports and Lists
Chapter 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Lists
These reports list information about what is contained in the memory at
the current time.
Confidential Mailbox List
Follow this procedure to print a list of all confidential mailboxes regis-
tered in the fax. This list also shows you which confidential mailboxes
are currently holding documents.
This list does not list the passwords for the confidential mailboxes.
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
1.
Report.
REPORT
Report
1.ACTIVITY REPORT
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
2.
3.
REPORT
5.CONF MAILBX LIST
Set
Press Set to start printing the report.
PRINTING REPORT
12/31/1999 14:50 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE,INC.
001
***********************************
CONFID. MAIL BOX REPORT
***
***
***********************************
CONFID. MBOX
#
CONFID. MBOX NAME
PGS.
01
02
03
04
LOUIS
1
3
4
2
ROBERTS
THOMAS
DILLON
Chapter 14
Printing Reports and Lists 14-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Document Memory List
Follow this procedure to print a Document Memory List for all docu-
ments currently stored in the memory.
Report
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
1.
Report.
REPORT
1.ACTIVITY REPORT
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
2.
3.
REPORT
4.DOC. MEMORY LIST
Set
Press Set.
PRINTING REPORT
12/31/1999 13:01 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE,INC.
001
****************************
DOC. MEMORY LIST
***
***
****************************
TX/RX NO
0011
MODE
CONNECTION TEL/ID
PGS.
SET TIME
12/31 13:00
ST. TIME
23:30
SENDER NAME
TRANSMIT
[*002]HUNT INVESTMENTS
2
R.LOUIS
14-18 Printing Reports and Lists
Chapter 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Received memory box list
Follow this procedure to list all documents currently received and held
in memory boxes.
Report
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
1.
Report.
REPORT
1.ACTIVITY REPORT
Press the search buttons until you see the display below.
2.
3.
REPORT
6.RX MEM. BOX LIST
Set
Press Set.
PRINTING REPORT
12/31/1999 15:01 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE,INC.
001
************************************
RECEIVED MEMORY BOX LIST
***
***
************************************
BOX
#
FILE NAME
R.LOUIS
PGS.
1
66
Chapter 14
Printing Reports and Lists 14-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Clear Report
If a power failure occurs, the documents currently stored in the memory
can be saved for up to approximately 12 hours. If power is not restored
to the fax within 12 hours, the documents in the fax memory will be lost.
If this time limit has elapsed by the time power is restored to the fax unit,
as soon as power is restored a list of documents deleted from the
memory as a result of the power failure is printed automatically.
12/31/1999 11:52 FAX 833 4423
WORLD ESTATE,INC.
001
*******************************
MEMORY CLEAR REPORT
***
***
*******************************
MEMORY FILES DELETED
TX/RX NO
MODE
CONNECTION TEL/ID
PGS.
SET TIME
ST. TIME
SENDER NAME
0011
5011
TRANSMIT
CONFID. RX
[*002]HUNT INVESTMENTS
2
1
12/31 13:00
12/31 14:46
23:30
-----
R.LOUIS
14-20 Printing Reports and Lists
Chapter 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
This chapter shows you how to perform the routine tasks required to
keep the fax unit operating at peak performance.
At the end of this chapter you are shown how to troubleshoot minor
problems in response to error messages in reports or on the LCD display.
❏ Removing Document Feed Jams .......................................................... 15-2
❏ Removing Printer Feed Jams................................................................. 15-4
• Locating a Paper Jam ........................................................................ 15-5
❏ Storing Recording Paper ...................................................................... 15-15
• Recommended Paper ...................................................................... 15-15
• Storing the Paper Supply ............................................................... 15-16
❏ Changing the Toner Cartridge ............................................................ 15-17
❏ Storing Toner Cartridges...................................................................... 15-22
• Handling Cartridges ....................................................................... 15-22
• Storing Cartridges ........................................................................... 15-23
• Disposing of Used Toner Cartridges ............................................ 15-23
❏ Periodic Cleaning .................................................................................. 15-24
• Cleaning the Fax Unit ..................................................................... 15-24
• Cleaning the Transfer Guide Area ................................................ 15-25
• Cleaning the Scanning Area........................................................... 15-27
❏ Refilling the Stamp Ink Compartment (option) ............................... 15-33
❏ Error Code Table (listed by number) ................................................. 15-35
❏ List of LCD Display Messages (Alphabetic List) ............................. 15-38
❏ Questions and Answers ....................................................................... 15-42
• Documents Are Not Being Sent Correctly. .................................. 15-42
• Documents Are Not Being Received Correctly. .......................... 15-45
• Documents Are Not Being Copied. .............................................. 15-46
• Having Other Problems. ................................................................ 15-46
❏ Recording the User Reminder Sheets ................................................ 15-48
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions 15-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing Document Feed Jams
To prevent frequent jams during document scanning, always check the
pages before you feed them into the fax. (➞6-2)
If a document is curled or wrinkled, make a copy of the original and scan
the copy.
If a paper jam occurs during scanning, the Error lamp blinks red and a
message will appear in the display:
CHECK DOCUMENT
Stop
Press Stop.
1.
2.
Gently lift the ADF cover.
15-2 Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pull the document straight out to remove it.
3.
Always open the ADF cover before you attempt to remove a jammed
document.
Close the ADF cover and press down on it gently until you hear it
4.
lock in place.
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions 15-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing Printer Feed Jams
Observe these guidelines when you are inspecting the fax for printer
feed jams:
❏
❏
If the paper jam occurred as a result of a power failure, restore power
to the fax unit by re-connecting it to the power source before you
follow the procedures below.
Make sure you check all the areas described below because paper
jams can occur at more than one location.
❏
❏
Follow the exact order of the steps below.
When removing the paper cassettes, remove them gently.
If a paper jam occurs during printing, the Error lamp blinks red and a
message will appear in the display:
REC. PAPER JAM
Wash off any toner from your hands or clothing immediately with cold
water.
THE FIXING AREA BECOMES VERY HOT. DO NOT TOUCH ANY
PARTS IN THE FIXING AREA WHEN YOU ARE REMOVING A
PAPER JAM.
15-4 Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LocatingAapPapaepr jeamr Jcaanmoccur in any of the following locations shown below.
You should check each location for jammed paper and remove it.
3.IMAGING AREA
2.OUTPUT TRAYS
AREA
1.FACE-UP TRAY
AREA
4.MP TRAY AREA
5.PAPER CASSETTE 1 AREA
6.PAPER CASSETTE 2 AREA
(if installed)
Area
Page
1. Face-up tray area
15-6
2. Output trays area
15-6
3. Imaging area
15-8
4. MP tray area
15-11
15-12
15-13
5. Paper Cassette 1 area
6. Paper Cassette 2 area (if installed)
Paper jams can occur in more than one location at a time, so ensure all
locations indicated in the illustration are checked.
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions 15-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Face-up tray area
Gently pull out the jammed paper.
If the jammed paper cannot be easily removed, do not force it. This can
happen when the trailing edge of the paper is still within the paper feed
area. The pressure from the pressure roller must be released before
removing the paper. To do this, open the printer cover and follow the
instructions (➞15-9) to hold the green lever and flip the transfer guide
up. Then, try removing the jammed paper from this area. After
removing the paper, gently guide the transfer guide back to its original
position.
2. Output trays area
Open the face-up tray.
1.
15-6 Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you can see the edge of the paper
Gently remove the jammed paper.
If you cannot see the edge of the paper
Use both hands to pull the paper up.
2.
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions 15-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After the paper’s edge has rolled out, pull the paper forward
carefully.
3.
If the jammed paper cannot be easily removed, do not force it. This can
happen when the trailing edge of the paper is still within the paper feed
area. The pressure from the pressure roller must be released before
removing the paper. To do this, open the printer cover and follow the
instructions (➞15-9) to hold the green lever and flip the transfer guide
up. Then, try removing the jammed paper from this area. After
removing the paper, gently guide the transfer guide back to its original
position.
3. Imaging area
Lift the document feeder tray, the document output tray and the
upper output tray.
1.
15-8 Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Open the printer cover and remove the toner cartridge. Store the
cartridge in its original protective bag to avoid exposure to light.
2.
3.
While holding the green lever, flip the transfer guide up. Gently
ease the edge of the paper away from the guide. After the paper
rear-most edge has come out, slowly pull the paper forward and
out of the fax unit.
GREEN LEVER
1
2
TRANSFER
CHARGING ROLLER
TRANSFER
GUIDE
• The spring for the transfer guide is strong. Always guide the transfer
guide slowly back to its original position by holding the green lever.
Never let it jump back by releasing the lever.
• When removing the jammed paper, be careful not to touch the transfer
charging roller. If the roller becomes dirty, the print quality will
deteriorate.
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions 15-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you cannot reach the paper, open the MP tray and remove the
envelope feeder slot cover if attached.
4.
5.
1
2
ENVELOPE FEEDER
SLOT COVER
Pull out the jammed paper holding its leading edge while
opening the release guide as far as it will go.
RELEASE GUIDE
Replace the envelope feeder slot cover onto the MP tray after removing
the jam.
15-10 Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. MP tray area
If a paper jam occurs in the MP tray area follow the procedure for
1.
removing the paper jam in the imaging area on pages 15-8 to 15-
10.
If you cannot easily reach the paper to clear the jam, slowly pull
the jammed paper out from the front.
2.
Do not pull the jammed paper upwards when removing it from the fax
unit. This could damage the paper sensor.
If the paper does not come out easily, do not force it. Follow the
instructions from step 2 of the Paper Cassette 1 area description to
remove the jammed paper. (➞15-12)
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions 15-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Paper Cassette 1 area
Remove Paper Cassette 1. If Paper Cassette 2 is installed, be sure
to remove it first.
1.
If you can see the edge of the paper
Locate the jammed paper inside the fax unit and gently pull it out.
If the paper does not come out easily or you cannot grasp the edge of the
paper easily, do not force it. Go to step 2. Always release the transfer guide
inside the fax unit before removing the paper. (➞15-9) After removing the
paper, gently guide the transfer guide back to its original position.
If you cannot see the edge of the paper
Open the printer cover and remove the toner cartridge. (➞15-9)
Store the cartridge in its original protective bag to avoid exposure
to light.
2.
15-12 Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hold the green lever and flip the transfer guide up, then slowly
pull the paper out from below.
3.
1
GREEN LEVER
2
TRANSFER
GUIDE
• The spring for the transfer guide is strong. Always guide the transfer
guide slowly back to its original position by holding the green lever.
Never let it jump back by releasing the lever.
• When removing the jammed paper, be careful not to touch the transfer
charging roller. If the roller becomes dirty, the print quality will
deteriorate.
• After removing the jammed paper, make sure you insert the cassette all
the way into the fax unit until it locks into place.
6. Paper Cassette 2 area
Before removing Paper Cassette 2, check inside the printer cover. If you
see the edge of the paper, follow the procedure of removing the jammed
paper in the imaging area. (➞15-8 to 15-10) If you do not see the edge,
follow the procedure below:
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions 15-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remove Paper Cassette 2.
1.
2.
Locate the jammed paper inside Paper Cassette 2 and gently pull
it out.
• If the jammed paper is still within the paper feed area inside the fax
unit, do not force it. Always release the transfer guide inside the fax
unit before removing the paper. (➞15-9)
• When removing the jammed paper, be careful not to touch the transfer
charging roller. If the roller becomes dirty, the print quality will
deteriorate.
• After removing the jammed paper, make sure you insert the cassette all
the way into the fax unit until it locks into place.
15-14 Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing Recording Paper
Use only the recommended paper or paper of similar quality, and store it
carefully. When installing the recording paper, refer to page 2-31.
Recommended Paper
We recommend using Canon paper with this fax machine.
Quality
Use plain bond, typewriter quality without curls, folds,
or rough edges.
2
Weight
17-24 lb. (64-90 g/m )
Storage
64°F to 75°F (18°C to 24°C)
40%-60% relative humidity
❏
Before buying large quantities of other paper, test it with the fax to
make sure it is reliable.
❏
❏
Use only plain white paper. Do not use perforated or colored paper.
Paper that is either too smooth or rough may reduce print quality or
cause printer jams.
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions 15-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing the Paper Supply
Improper paper storage can affect the quality of the printing. Follow
these guidelines when you store paper.
❏
Store unused paper in its wrapping to protect the paper against
humidity.
❏
❏
Do not store paper on the floor where humidity is higher.
If the humidity of the surrounding area is higher than normal, store
the paper in a specially designed storage box.
❏
❏
❏
To prevent excessive paper curl, do not stack paper too high.
Do not expose the stored paper supply to direct sunlight.
If paper is moved to a location of very different temperature, store
the paper in the new location for at least one day before you use it.
15-16 Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the Toner Cartridge
Change
Cartridge
When the toner runs low in the toner cartridge, the Change
Cartridge indicator on the operation panel will light and you
will see this message:
REPLACE CARTRIDGE
The fax may be set to continue printing or to store the remainder of a
document being received into the memory. (➞16-18)
You may be able to extend the service life of the toner cartridge by
removing it and rotating it 5 or 6 times to re-distribute the toner inside
the cartridge. After you re-set the cartridge in the fax unit, if the mes-
sages goes off, you can continue printing but make sure you have a new
cartridge on hand to replace the old one when it finally runs out of toner.
If the message does not go off, then you will have to follow the proce-
dure below to replace the old cartridge.
Follow this procedure to replace the toner cartridge.
Lift the document feeder tray, the document output tray and the
upper output tray.
1.
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions 15-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Open the printer cover to remove the old cartridge and discard it.
Do not attempt to disassemble the cartridge or refill the cartridge.
2.
DO NOT INCINERATE THE CARTRIDGE. SCATTERED TONER
POWDER IS HIGHLY FLAMMABLE.
To dispose of the cartridge:
To protect the environment, Canon has started a special program
to help you dispose of your empty toner cartridges.
After you install a toner cartridge, keep the original packing
material. Inside the box is a shipping label. Fill out this label and
call UPS for pickup. UPS will pick up the empty toner cartridge at
Canon’s expense and return it to a recycling center.
For details about this program, contact your authorized Canon
dealer.
Remove a new toner cartridge from its protective bag.
3.
Save the protective bag. You may need it to transport the cartridge later.
15-18 Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rock the new cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner
evenly inside the cartridge.
4.
Place the cartridge on a flat, clean surface.
Snap the tab to detach it from the cartridge.
5.
6.
As you steady the cartridge with one hand, remove the seal by
gently pulling the plastic tab with your other hand.
7.
Use a firm, even pull to avoid breaking the seal.
PULL STRAIGHT OUT
• Do not pull the tab upwards or downwards; the tape may break.
• If the tab breaks off from the tape, pull the tape out by pulling on the
end of the tape where the tab was originally attached.
• Wash off any toner from your hands or clothing immediately with cold
water.
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions 15-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To avoid pinching your fingers between the toner cartridge and
the fax unit, grip the cartridge as shown below.
8.
9.
KEEP THE DRUM SLOT FREE OF
DUST AND OTHER FOREIGN
OBJECTS.
DO NOT TOUCH THE
PROTECTIVE SHUTTER ON
THE BOTTOM OF CARTRIDGE.
Load the cartridge in the direction indicated by the arrow. Gently
slide the cartridge into the printer until it is completely down
inside the fax unit and level.
Carefully close the printer cover.
10.
❏
❏
If the printer cover does not shut completely, do not force it
down. Remove the toner cartridge and insert it again.
To avoid exposing the light sensitive drum, never leave the
printer cover open.
15-20 Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❏
The fax unit will not operate if the cover is not closed com-
pletely. If the printer cover is open you will see a message:
CHECK PRINTER COVER
Open the printer cover again and make sure the toner car-
tridge is sitting level and close the printer cover again.
Lower the upper output tray, the document output tray, and the
document feeder tray.
11.
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions 15-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing Toner Cartridges
Follow these simple guidelines when you handle and store toner car-
tridges.
Handling Cartridges
❏
❏
❏
Do not remove the toner cartridge from its protective bag until you
are ready to install it.
Save the protective bag. You may need it later to re-pack the car-
tridge temporarily to protect it from exposure to light.
Never expose a toner cartridge to direct sunlight, and do not leave it
exposed to normal room light (about 1,000 lux) for longer than 5
minutes.
❏
❏
There are strong magnets inside a toner cartridge. To avoid possible
destruction of valuable data on disks or other media, keep the toner
cartridge away from computer screens, hard disks, floppy disks, or
any other kind of material sensitive to magnetic fields.
Never touch or try to open the protective shutter that protects the
light-sensitive drum inside the toner cartridge. If the drum is ex-
posed to light, this can cause printing quality deterioration.
❏
❏
Handle the toner cartridge with care. Do not subject it to shock or
vibrations.
Always set toner cartridges down with the arrow on the cartridge
facing up.
15-22 Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing Cartridges
❏
Store a toner cartridge in the original box and protective bag until
you are ready to install it.
❏
Store toner cartridges at a constant temperature within a range of
32°F to 95°F (0°C to 35°C). Do not store cartridges in locations subject
to extreme fluctuation of temperature and humidity.
❏
To prevent caking in the toner, never stand the cartridge on its end
and do not store it upside down. If the toner becomes caked as a
result of being stored in an odd position for too long, it may be
impossible to dissolve it completely even by shaking the cartridge.
❏
❏
❏
Do not store the cartridge in salty or corrosive air.
Never attempt to disassemble a toner cartridge or attempt to refill it.
Make sure that you use a stored toner cartridge before the expiration
date printed on the toner cartridge box.
Disposing of Used Toner Cartridges
NEVER INCINERATE USED CARTRIDGES. SCATTERED TONER
POWDER IS EXTREMELY FLAMMABLE.
To protect the environment, Canon has started a special program to help
you dispose of your empty toner cartridges. After you install a toner
cartridge, keep the original packing material and the shipping label.
After a cartridge has been used up, fill out this label and call UPS for
pickup. UPS will pick up the empty toner cartridge at Canon’s expense
and return it to a recycling center. For details about this program, contact
an authorized Canon dealer in your area.
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions 15-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Periodic Cleaning
Follow these simple procedures to keep the fax clean and operating
smoothly. Before you clean the fax, print all documents received in the
memory.
Cleaning the Fax Unit
Before you clean the fax, disconnect the power cord of the fax unit
1.
2.
from the power source.
Moisten a soft cloth with water and a small amount of diluted
mild detergent.
To prevent damage to the surface of the fax unit, never use thinner,
benzene, alcohol, acetone, or any other organic solvent to clean the fax.
15-24 Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning the Transfer Guide Area
Disconnect the power cord of the fax unit from the power source.
1.
2.
Lift the document feeder tray, the document output tray and the
upper output tray.
Open the printer cover and remove the toner cartridge.
Store the cartridge in its original protective bag to avoid exposure
to light.
3.
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions 15-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using a soft clean cloth, wipe any paper dust off the black plate of
the transfer guide.
4.
TRANSFER
GUIDE
While holding the green lever, flip the transfer guide up. Wipe the
5.
edge of the transfer guide with a soft, clean cloth, to remove toner
and paper dust from both sides of the transfer guide.
GREEN LEVER
TRANSFER
GUIDE
15-26 Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pull the transfer guide back to its full extent, then wipe the silver
metal strip with cloth. Then gently guide the transfer guide back
to its original position.
6.
1
2
TRANSFER CHARGING
ROLLER
• The spring for the transfer guide is strong. Always guide the transfer
guide slowly back to its original position by holding the green lever.
Never let it jump back by releasing the lever.
• To avoid deterioration in print quality, never touch the transfer
charging roller when you clean the metal strip.
Replace the toner cartridge in the fax unit.
7.
Close the printer cover, lower the upper output tray, the document
output tray and the document feeder tray, and connect the power
cord of the fax unit to the power source.
8.
CleaningPtehrieodSicacllaynchneicnk gtheAscraenaning glass, the white scanning strip, and
rollers. If the underside of the ADF cover or the scanning glass is dirty,
the documents you send will look dirty.
Disconnect the power cord of the fax unit from its power source.
1.
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions 15-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gently open the upper unit of the ADF cover, as shown in the
illustration below.
2.
BE SURE NOT TO OPEN THE ADF COVER FULLY TO THE EXTENT
THAT THE LOWER UNIT IS LIFTED AS SHOWN IN THE
C ILLUSTRATION ON THE RIGHT. THE LOWER UNIT MAY FALL
HEAVILY WHEN YOU UNLOCK THE ADF COVER ON STEP 3.
15-28 Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Release the upper unit of the ADF cover by pushing the hook
inside with your finger or using a pencil.
3.
4.
Open the upper unit of the ADF cover fully and clean the rollers.
ROLLERS
❏
❏
Use a dry cloth to wipe clean the underside of the ADF cover.
Use a dry cloth to wipe up paper dust around the rollers.
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions 15-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gently close the upper unit of the ADF cover until you hear it
lock.
5.
MAKE SURE THAT THE UPPER UNIT OF THE ADF COVER IS
LOCKED IN POSITION SECURELY BEFORE PROCEEDING TO
STEP 6.
Lift the document feeder tray, and gently open the ADF cover
until it stops, grasping the document feeder tray and the ADF
cover at the same time.
6.
15-30 Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While holding the ADF cover open with one hand, use one finger
of your other hand to gently push in the black plastic loop to
separate it from the stub on the fax machine.
7.
8.
Gently lift the ADF cover up to the full open position.
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions 15-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use a soft, dry cloth to wipe clean the scanning glass, the white
strip above, rollers and the area around the glass. Use a soft cloth
that will not scratch the scanning glass.
9.
WHITE STRIP
SCANNING GLASS
ROLLERS
STAMP (option)
❏
Use a dry cloth to wipe clean the underside of the ADF cover.
Use a dry cloth to wipe up paper dust around the rollers.
❏
If you have installed the optional stamp kit, be careful not to touch the
stamp ink compartment when cleaning the scanning area.
Lower the ADF cover until the plastic loop is even with the stub
on the fax machine.
10.
15-32 Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Place the end of the plastic loop over the end of the stub so it stays
in place.
11.
Close the ADF cover and press down on it slightly until you hear
it lock in place, and lower the document feeder tray.
12.
13.
Connect the power cord of the fax unit at the power source.
Refilling the Stamp Ink Compartment (option)
Follow this procedure to refill the stamp ink compartment if you are
using the optional stamp feature.
❏
Please contact your local authorized Canon dealer when you run out
of ink.
Disconnect the power cord of the fax unit from its power source.
1.
2.
Follow steps 6 to 8 on pages 15-30 and 15-31 to open the ADF
cover up to the full open position.
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions 15-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locate the stamp pad then apply only one drop of ink to the
stamp ink compartment.
3.
❏
❏
❏
To avoid a malfunction, do not add too much ink.
Use only Shachihata X Stamper Ink CS-20 Yellow.
Do not use the stamp feature for at least one hour. If you have
to send a document, turn off the stamp feature for the first
hour. (➞12-10)
TO AVOID INK SPILLAGE, APPLY ONLY ONE DROP OF INK TO
THE STAMP PAD.
Follow steps 10 to 12 on pages 15-32 and 15-33 to close the ADF
cover, lower the document feeder tray, and connect the power cord
of the fax unit to the power source.
4.
• Make sure that you do not drip ink on any other part of the fax.
• Make sure that you put the plastic loop back in place when you close
the ADF cover. (➞15-33)
15-34 Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error Code Table (listed by number)
Errors in reports are recorded as numbers because there is not enough
space to print a detailed description of the error in the report. When
errors are recorded in your reports, note the number and check it against
the table below to learn more about what caused the error.
CODE
PROBLEM
SOLUTION
#0001 A document may be jammed in the automatic
#0003 The document is longer than 39.4 inches (1
meter).
Remove the jammed document and try again.
document feeder (ADF) .
(➞15-2)
Make a reduced copy of the document with a
copy machine and then send the copy, or cut
the document and paste it up on smaller sheets
of paper. (➞B-2)
#0005 The other party’s fax did not respond within
35 seconds.
Send the document again. Contact the other
party and have them check their fax. You can try
to send the document manually. For an overseas
call, add pauses to the registered number.
The other party is not using a G3 fax.
#0008 You cannot do polling sending.
Check with the other party and have them send
or receive the document using a G3 machine.
Make sure the subaddress/passwords match
the settings on the other party’s fax unit. If the
other party's fax is Canon fax and can set a
polling ID, request that they set the polling ID
to 255 decimal or 1111 1111 binary.
The paper cassette on your fax is out of paper.
#0009
#0011
Re-fill the paper cassette and make sure the
stack is below the tabs. (➞2-31)
If the paper cassette still has paper in it, then the
Check all paper cassettes and make sure they
are installed correctly.
paper cassette may not be installed correctly.
Recording paper jammed.
Remove the jammed paper. (➞15-4)
If you are polling a fax to receive a document,
the other party has not set the document
correctly on the fax.
Contact the other party and request that the
document be set correctly for polling on the
other fax.
#0012 The other fax has run out of paper and its
memory is full.
Contact the other party and tell them to re-fill
their paper cassette.
#0018 The other fax does not answer, even after
several redialing attempts, or the other fax
was busy and unable to respond within 35
seconds.
Wait a few minutes and try again. If you still
cannot send the document, contact the other
party and confirm that the other fax has been
turned on. If the other fax is busy, try sending
your document at a later time. When you send
ducuments long distance, press Pause after
dialing. (➞6-10)
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions 15-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CODE
PROBLEM
SOLUTION
You cannot be polling receiving.
Make sure the subaddress/passwords match
the settings on the other party’s fax unit. If the
other party's fax is a Canon fax and can set a
polling ID, request that they set the polling ID
to 255 decimal or 1111 1111 binary.
#0021
#0022 The settings for the One-touch or Coded
Correct the One-touch or Coded Speed dial
Speed dialing buttons you are using to dial the registration settings. (➞4-6, 4-15)
other party have been deleted.
#0025 During registration of the number for One-
touch or Coded Speed Dialing, you registered
the number for confidential or relay sending
but you omitted the subaddress.
Open the optional settings for One-touch or
Coded Speed Dialing and make sure that you
have entered a subaddress and password (if
required) for the telephone number. (➞4-8, 4-18)
After setting up relay sending or confidential
sending, the settings for One-touch or Coded
Speed dialing may have been changed.
Open the settings for One-touch or Coded
Speed Dialing and make sure the settings have
not been changed. (➞4-6, 4-15)
#0033 You have attempted to send a confidential
document to a fax unit that does not support
the use of ITU-T subaddresses.
Send the document without confidential
settings, or send the document to a fax that
supports the use of ITU-T subaddresses.
#0034 You sent a confidential document to another
Contact the other party and confirm the
settings on the other party’s confidential
mailbox.
fax unit but it was rejected.
#0035 You have attempted to relay a document to a
fax unit that does not support the use of ITU-
T subaddresses.
Send the document by regular transmission.
#0036 You have attempted to relay a document to a
Contact the other party and confirm that their
relay settings match the relay settings on your
fax unit.
fax unit but it was rejected.
#0037 The memory in your fax is full and cannot
store a document for sending or receiving.
Before you try to clear the memory, you may
want to print a memory list for reference.
(➞8-5)
If there are documents in the memory that you
do not need, erase those documents from the
memory. (➞8-9)
#0059 The number you had dialed did not match
with the registered number on the other
party's fax. The number is not registered on
the other party's fax or the number registered
on the other party's fax is not correct.
Call the other party and ask the other party to
register the number or to correct the number.
Or, set PHONE NO. CHECK of the system
setting to OFF on your fax. (➞16-31)
15-36 Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CODE
PROBLEM
SOLUTION
Call the other party and confirm whether or
not their fax supports subaddress receiving. Try
sending again without a subaddress.
#0080 The other party’s fax does not support
receiving a document with a subaddress.
#0081 The other party’s fax does not support
receiving a document with an ITU-T pass-
word.
Call the other party and confirm whether or
not their fax supports ITU-T password
receiving. Try sending again without a
password.
The other party’s fax does not support
Call the other party and confirm whether or
not their fax can accept a polling request with a
subaddress. Try sending again without a
subaddress.
#0082
accepting a polling request with a subaddress.
You cannot poll the other party to receive a
document because a subaddress and/or
password does not match.
#0083
Call the other party and confirm that the
subaddress and/or password that you are
using are correct.
#0084 The other party cannot receive a document
with an ITU-T password.
Call the other party and confirm whether or
not the other party’s fax supports receiving a
polling request with an ITU-T password. Ask
the other party to try again without an ITU-T
password.
#0102 You cannot receive documents because a
subaddress and/or password does not match.
Call the other party and confirm whether or
not you are using the correct subaddress and/
or password.
#0995 Documents in the memory to be sent have
The current transmission has been cleared. You
may start again, start a new operation, or leave
the fax in standby.
been cleared.
CODE
SOLUTION
##0322 - ##0330 Contact your local authorized Canon dealer where you purchased your Canon product.
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions 15-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of LCD Display Messages (Alphabetic List)
Here is a list of messages that are displayed on the screen when a
problem occurs in the fax or the printer.
MESSAGE
WHAT IT MEANS
The box number you entered is already in use. For example, you cannot
use the same box number for a confidential mailbox and a polling box.
Try again with another box number.
#ALREADY IN USE
AUTO REDIAL
The other party’s line was busy on the previous dialing attempt and
your fax unit is dialing the number again. To cancel redialing, press Stop
when direct dialing or press Delete File, select transaction number then
press Set when memory sending.
BUSY/NO SIGNAL
The other party did not answer, even after redialing. Wait for a few
minutes and try again. When you send documents long distance, press
Pause after dialing. If you still cannot send the document, the other party
may have turned off their fax unit.
CHECK DOCUMENT
A document page may be jammed or may not be fed correctly in the
automatic document feeder (ADF). Remove the document and try again.
(➞15-2) If the document does not feed correctly, clean the rollers. (➞15-29)
CHECK PAPER SIZE (For
Paper-size-matching error of the MP tray. You have set different paper
sizes in the fax menus and in the printer menus, or you have not turned
off USE MP TRAY while you are using the MP tray for the printer
function and loading paper of sizes other than letter, legal or A4. Set the
correct paper size in both of the fax and printer menus, or turn off USE
MP TRAY in the fax menus.
®
the LASER CLASS 3170/
3175 with the PCL6 Printer
Board installed)
CHECK POLLING ID
CHECK PRINTER
Your attempt at polling receiving failed. The polling ID may be incorrect
or your subaddress/password does not match the subaddress/password
set on the polling box of the other party’s fax unit. Contact the other
party and make sure you are using the correct polling ID or subaddress/
password. (➞11-3)
Printer malfunction. Press Stop. Unplug the fax unit from its power
source, wait a few minutes, then plug in power cord again. If the fax is
connected to an uninterruptable power supply (UPS), unplug the power
cord, and then plug it to an AC outlet. If message remains in the LCD
display and the fax unit cannot return to standby, call for service.
CHECK PRINTER COVER
CHECK SUBADDR/PASSWD
Check the printer cover and make sure that it is completely closed. Make
sure a toner cartridge is installed under the printer cover.
You attempted sending or polling receiving with an incorrect
subaddress/password. Contact the other party and confirm that you are
using the correct subaddress/password.
COMMUNICATING
PLEASE WAIT
You tried to use direct sending while the fax was sending another
document. Wait until the transmission is finished, then try again.
15-38 Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT IT MEANS
MESSAGE
DOCUMENT TOO LONG
The document is longer than 39.4 inches (1 meter). Cut the document into
smaller sheets. Reduce them on a copy machine if necessary. Then paste
them on standard letter or A4-size sheets for scanning.
ENTER DAC
You have to enter department access code to send document.
HANG UP PHONE
The transaction has completed but the handset is not sitting completely
on its cradle. Make sure the handset is sitting completely on its cradle.
The memory is full. If the document has been received in the memory,
MEMORY FULL
print the document. (➞8-6)
If documents have been received in confidential mailboxes, print them.
(➞10-8)
If documents have been received in memory boxes, print them. (➞8-25)
Check the content of the memory and if there are documents in the
memory that you do not need, delete them from the memory. (➞8-9)
If you tried to send a document with “Ultra Fine,” “Super Fine,” or
“Text/Photo,” try sending by direct sending, or set to “Fine” or “Text”
and send by memory sending.
The memory is full. Wait until the current document transmission has
completed.
MEMORY FULL
PLEASE WAIT
NO ANSWER
The other party did not answer. Start the procedure again from the
beginning and try again. If the connection fails again, make sure the other
party is using a G3-compatible fax machine.
NO CONFID. TX
The other party’s fax unit may not support the use of confidential
mailboxes. Contact the other party and confirm whether or not they can
set up confidential mailboxes.
You may be using the wrong ITU-T subaddress/password. Contact the
other party and make sure you are using the correct subaddress/password.
The memory of the other party’s fax unit may be full. Contact the other
party and request that they clear the memory on their fax unit.
NO DOC. STORED
You have tried to check the contents of the memory but no documents are
currently stored in the memory.
The other party’s fax unit may not be able to function as a relay station, or
it may not be set up correctly to receive and relay documents. Contact the
other party and make sure it can function as a relay station.
NO ORIGINAL RELAY TX
If the fax unit can be set up as relay station, confirm that it is set up
correctly for relay transmissions. Make sure you have both registered the
same ITU-T subaddress/password.
If the memory of the other party’s fax unit is full, it will not be able to
receive and relay documents. Ask them to clear part or all of the memory
on their fax unit.
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions 15-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MESSAGE
WHAT IT MEANS
NO RX PAPER
The other party’s fax unit has run out of paper and cannot receive your
document. Contact the other party and ask them to re-supply recording
paper to their fax unit.
NO TEL#
You have pressed a One-touch Speed Dialing button, or pressed Coded
Dial followed by a 3-digit code, but no telephone number is registered. If
you have forgotten where the number is registered, use directory dial.
(➞4-35) You can also print a list of all numbers registered for speed
dialing. (➞14-2)
NOT AVAILABLE NOW
You pressed a One-touch Speed Dialing, or pressed Coded Dial followed
by a 3-digit code, that is not registered for the feature you are trying to
use.
The box number you specified does not exist. Try again with a different
number.
NOT FOUND,TRY AGAIN
OUTPUT TRAY FULL
The output tray is full of paper. Pick up the printed pages on the tray.
PASSWORD POLL REJECT
You set up a polling box for polling sending with an ITU-T password,
but the other party’s fax unit does not support use of an ITU-T password
for polling receiving.
PASSWORD TX REJECTED
PRT ALT. PAPER SIZE?
You attempted to send a document with an ITU-T password, but the
other party’s fax unit does not support use of an ITU-T password for
receiving.
The size of the available recording paper does not match the size of the
document waiting to be printed. If you do not mind printing on a
YES=( ) NO=(#)
*
different paper size, press . If you want to print the correct paper size,
*
press Stop and install the correct size paper. Then press Start/Scan.
Paper has jammed in the paper cassette or inside the printer. Clear the
REC. PAPER JAM
paper jam. (➞15-4)
RECEIVED IN MAILBOX
A confidential document has arrived in a mailbox of your fax unit, and the
message will remain displayed until you print the document. (➞10-8)
RECEIVED IN MEMORY
The fax unit has run out of recording paper, the toner supply of the toner
cartridge is exhausted, or the output tray is full of paper. Supply paper to
the paper cassettes, change the toner cartridge, or pick up the printed
pages on the tray. As soon as you accomplish this task, the document
prints automatically. (➞8-2)
RECEIVED IN MEM. BOX
REPLACE CARTRIDGE
You have received a document in a memory box. Print out the document
in the memory box. (➞8-25)
The toner cartridge has run out of toner. Replace the toner cartridge.
(➞15-17)
15-40 Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MESSAGE
WHAT IT MEANS
SELECTIVE POLL REJECT
You have set up a polling box for polling sending with an ITU-T
subaddress, but the other party’s fax unit does not support use of an
ITU-T subaddress for polling receiving.
START AGAIN
An error has occurred on the telephone line or in your fax unit. Start the
procedure from the beginning. If the problem persists, call for service.
You have pressed the Stop button to cancel the current transaction. The
STOP KEY PRESSED
fax unit should return to standby in a few moments.
SUBADDRESS TX REJECTD
You attempted to send a document with an ITU-T subaddress, but the
other party’s fax unit does not support receiving a document with an
ITU-T subaddress.
SUPPLY REC. PAPER
Your fax unit has run out of paper. Re-fill the paper cassettes. (➞2-31)
You have to enter user access code to send, copy or print reports.
USER ACCESS CODE
USER ACCESS LOCK
Sending or printing has been restricted. Set the TX SETTINGS or FAX'S
PRINTER SET of the restrictive codes to OFF. (➞13-14)
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions 15-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers
Documents Are Not Being Sent Correctly.
❏ Cannot send after dialing?
Is the document set in the automatic document feeder (ADF)
correctly?
Remove the document and set it correctly. (➞6-3,15-2)
Is the number dialing correctly?
Check the number registered for the speed dialing button and
make sure it is correct. You may want to print a list of all regis-
tered speed dialing buttons. (➞14-2) If you do not have time to
check and correct the registration immediately, use regular
dialing. (➞6-7)
Is the transmission speed too fast for the telephone lines in your
area?
The telephone lines in your area may be in poor condition. Select
a lower transmission speed. (➞4-13, 4-22, 16-30)
Is the other fax out of paper?
Call the other party and make sure their fax is supplied with
paper.
Are the rollers dirty?
Clean the rollers. (➞15-29)
❏ Does memory fill up immediately when you try to send?
Are the document mode settings on?
The Fine, Super Fine, Ultra Fine or Text/Photo settings can use
large amounts of memory when scanning certain types of
documents. Use direct sending. (➞6-15)
❏ Are documents streaked with lines after they print on the other
fax?
Is the scanning glass on your fax clean?
Copy a document on your fax and see if the copy is streaked or
dirty. If the print is streaked, clean the scanning glass. (➞15-32)
❏ Are your documents printing at a reduced size on the other fax?
Are the document feed guides set properly when you scan docu-
ments for sending?
Make sure the document feed guides are snug against the side of
the document you scan for sending. (➞6-3)
15-42 Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❏ Are the documents you send too light?
Is the Lighter indicator on your operation panel on?
Press the Contrast button until Standard or Darker is selected.
(➞6-5)
Is your document too light?
Press the Contrast button until Darker is selected then try send-
ing again. (➞6-5)
Is the scanning glass on your fax clean?
Copy a document on your fax and see if the copy is streaked or
dirty. If the copy is streaked or dirty, clean the scanning glass.
(➞15-32)
❏ Cannot perform relay sending?
Does the relay unit support ITU-T subaddress/password transac-
tions?
If the relay unit does not support ITU-T subaddress/password
transactions, you cannot perform relay sending.
Has the relay unit set up a relay group correctly?
The relay group must be set up correctly on the relay unit and
the relay unit must tell you the subaddress and password. If the
relay unit has set an ITU-T password, then you must send the
document with the correct password as well as the correct
subaddress. (➞9-10)
Does the ITU-T subaddress/password match those of the relay
unit?
Make sure you set the correct subaddress/password. (➞9-10)
Is the memory of the relay unit full?
Check with the relay unit and make sure there is enough
memory to receive your document. Ask the relay unit to clear
their memory then try again.
❏ Cannot perform confidential sending?
Does the other fax support ITU-T subaddress/password transac-
tions?
If the other fax does not support ITU-T subaddress/password
transactions, you cannot perform confidential sending.
Has the other party set up a confidential mailbox?
The other party must set up a confidential mailbox on the other
fax and tell you the subaddress and password. If the other party
has set an ITU-T password, then you must send the document
with the correct password as well as the correct subaddress.
(➞10-10)
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions 15-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Does the ITU-T subaddress/password match those of the other
party?
Make sure you set the correct subaddress/password. (➞10-10)
Is the memory of the other fax full?
Check with the other party and make sure there is enough
memory to receive your document. Ask the other party to clear
their memory then try again.
❏ Cannot relay a document from another fax?
Does the other fax unit support subaddress/password transactions?
If the other party’s fax does not support subaddress/password
transactions, you cannot relay documents.
Make sure you have both registered the same ITU-T subaddress/
password. (➞9-4)
Is your fax set up to relay documents?
Make sure your fax is set up properly to relay documents. The
relay feature must be turned on. (➞9-7)
Does the other party's fax support ITU-T subaddresses and pass-
words?
Contact the other party and confirm that they called you with
the correct subaddress/password.
Are the originator’s subaddress/password correct?
The originator must send you the document with the correct
ITU-T subaddress/password.
The ITU-T password setting is optional. However, if you set a
password on your relay TX group then the originator must send
a password. Otherwise, your fax will not receive the document
for relay broadcasting. (➞9-6)
Check the relay TX group and determine if it has been set to
check the identity of the originator before it receives the docu-
ment for a relay broadcast. (➞9-6)
❏ Other party cannot poll and receive your document?
Does the other party's fax support ITU-T subaddress/password
sending?
If the other party's fax does not support ITU-T subaddress/
password, you have to make a polling box #00 for the other
party and scan the document without subaddress/password.
(➞11-15) If the other party's fax is a Canon fax and can set a
polling ID, ask them to set the polling ID for 255 decimal or 1111
1111 binary.
15-44 Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Documents Are Not Being Received Correctly.
❏ Cannot receive documents automatically?
Is the Manual RX indicator on your operation panel on?
If this indicator is on, press the button below Manual RX to turn
it off. (➞7-2)
❏ Cannot receive manually?
Is there a document set in the automatic document feeder (ADF)?
You cannot receive with a document set in the automatic docu-
ment feeder (ADF). Remove the document and try again.
(➞15-2)
Did you press Start/Scan before you hung up the handset?
When you hear a high pitched tone, press Start/Scan before you
hang up the handset. Review the procedure for manual receiving
with the optional handset kit installed on the fax. (➞7-7)
❏ Are the documents you receive of poor quality?
Is your toner cartridge running low on toner?
Remove your toner cartridge and rotate it 5 or 6 times to evenly
distribute the remaining toner and try again. If this does not
solve the problem, you should change the toner cartridge.
(➞15-17)
Is the other fax functioning properly?
The sending fax usually determines image quality. Try copying a
document on your own fax. If the copy is clean then the other fax
has a problem. Call the other party and ask them to clean the
scanning glass on the other fax.
❏ Cannot receive a confidential document in your confidential
mailbox?
Does the other party’s fax support subaddress/password transac-
tions?
If the other party’s fax does not support subaddress/password
transactions, you cannot receive confidential documents.
Make sure the other party knows the correct subaddress/
password for your confidential mailbox.
❏ Cannot poll another fax and receive its document?
Are you polling without a subaddress/password?
If the other party’s fax is a Canon fax and can set a polling ID,
ask them to set the polling ID for 255 decimal or 1111 1111 binary.
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions 15-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Are you polling with a subaddress or password?
Contact the other party and confirm that their fax supports
receiving a polling request with a subaddress or password.
If the other party's fax supports subaddress/password polling,
confirm that you are using the correct subaddress and password.
If the other party's fax does not support subaddress/password
polling, call the other party without subaddress/password.
(➞11-3)
Documents Are Not Being Copied.
❏ Cannot copy?
Is the toner cartridge out of toner?
Change the toner cartridge. (➞15-17)
❏ Is the copied document reduced?
Are the document feed guides snug against the sides of the docu-
ment that you are copying?
Make sure the document feed guides are both against the sides
of the document on the document feeder tray before you start
copying. (➞5-3)
❏ Are copied documents cut at the margins?
Is the selector on the paper cassettes or the MP tray set for the
width of the paper loaded?
Adjust the selector to the width of the paper loaded. (➞2-32 to 2-
34, 2-46)
Having Other Problems.
❏ Is sending and receiving documents too slow?
When sending, is the document mode set for Ultra Fine, Super
Fine, Fine, or Text/Photo?
If the indicator for Ultra Fine, Super Fine, Fine, or Text/Photo is
on, press Resolution to select Standard, or press Document Type to
select Text. (➞6-5)
15-46 Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Is your fax set for ECM receiving or sending?
Because the fax is constantly checking for errors during trans-
mission, ECM receiving or sending requires more time. The fax
is set to conduct all transactions using ECM (error correction
mode). If transmission speed appears to be extremely slow, you
may be able to speed up transmission time by turning ECM off.
(➞16-10, 16-14)
❏ Are the documents received not printed out?
Are the paper cassettes set correctly into the fax?
Insert the paper cassettes all the way into the fax unit until it
locks into place. (➞2-37)
❏ Cannot get faxes from information services?
Is your fax connected to a rotary dial telephone line?
Even if your fax is connected to a rotary dial line, you can still
get faxes from information services that require tone dialing.
Press Tone to receive faxes from information services that require
touch-tone telephone lines for transmission. (➞12-3)
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions 15-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording the User Reminder Sheets
The user reminder sheets are essential for recording the passwords, box
numbers, subaddresses, and so on, so you do not forget them. We
recommend that you make a copy of these sheets, fill them out, and use
them for reference.
After you fill out these reminder sheets, store them in a safe place to
protect their confidentiality and so you can find them later for reference.
Password Reminder
Item
Description
Password (four-digit)
System Settings
Protects the user data System
Settings from unauthorized
access.
Sending Restrictions
Restricts document sending to
holders of the User Access
Code.
Printing Restrictions
Memory Reception
Restricts report printing and
document copying.
Protects your Memory Reception
button setup from unautho-
rized access.
Transfer
Protects your Transfer button
setup from unauthorized
access.
15-48 Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Department Access Code
Dept. Access Code
(four-digit)
Password
(four-digit)
Dept. Access Code
(four-digit)
Password
(four-digit)
Preset Polling
Box No.
(two-digit)
Password
(four-digit)
Box Name
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions 15-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Confidential Mailboxes
Box No.
Password
(four-digit)
Subaddress
RX Password
Box Name
(two-digit)
(Max. 20-digit) (Max. 20-digit)
Relay Broadcast Groups
Group No.
Password
(four-digit)
Subaddress
RX Password
Group Name
(two-digit)
(Max. 20-digit) (Max. 20-digit)
15-50 Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Boxes
Box No.
Password
(four-digit)
Subaddress
(Max. 20-digit)
TX Password
(Max. 20-digit)
RX Password
(Max. 20-digit)
Box Name
(two-digit)
Polling Boxes
Box No.
Password
(four-digit)
Subaddress
(Max. 20-digit)
TX Password
(Max. 20-digit)
Box Name
(two-digit)
Chapter 15
Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions 15-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15-52 Maintenance & Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 16
Summary of Important Settings
This chapter contains a comprehensive list of all the settings you can
perform with the DATA REGISTRATION menus.
The settings that determine how the fax unit operates are called user data
settings. These important settings can be switched on and off to custom-
ize operation of the fax unit.
❏ Opening the Data Registration Menu .................................................. 16-2
❏ Summary of User Data Settings............................................................ 16-3
❏ User Settings ............................................................................................ 16-4
❏ Report Settings ........................................................................................ 16-7
❏ TX (Send) Settings ................................................................................. 16-10
❏ RX (Receive) Settings............................................................................ 16-13
❏ Fax’s Printer Set..................................................................................... 16-16
❏ File Settings ............................................................................................ 16-20
❏ System Settings ..................................................................................... 16-27
❏ Dual Line Options................................................................................. 16-32
❏ Relationship between BATCH TX, QUICK ON-LINE TX, and
Timer Settings .................................................................................... 16-34
Chapter 16
Summary of Important Settings 16-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Opening the Data Registration Menu
Follow this procedure to display the user data settings.
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
1.
Data Registration.
REGISTRATION
Data
Registration
1.DATA REGISTRATION
Set
Press Set to display the next menu.
2.
3.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
Use the search buttons to display the item you want to set or
change.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
DATA REGISTRATION
7.SYSTEM SETTINGS
Set
Display the item you want to set or change and press Set. For
The user data menu selections are displayed one line at a time.
Use the search buttons to display these settings so you can check
the settings or change them.
4.
details, refer to the following section.
16-2 Summary of Important Settings
Chapter 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Summary of User Data Settings
Here is a summary of the user data menus.
1.USER SETTINGS
Use these settings to set up the operating environment of the fax unit.
These settings include important features like registering the names,
telephone number and the date and time that prints on documents you
send, setting alarms and scanning density, and so on. Do these settings as
soon as you set up your fax. After they are set, you should not need to
change them very often. (➞16-4)
2.REPORT SETTINGS
Use these settings to set the fax to print a report every time you send or
receive a document and set up printing a summary report for all your
sending and receiving transactions. Use these features to keep track of
your fax transactions. (➞16-7)
3.TX (Send) SETTINGS
Use these settings to customize how the fax sends documents. With these
settings you can turn ECM on and off, set mid-pause time, set up re-
dialing and other features. (➞16-10)
4.RX (Receive) SETTINGS
Use these settings to customize how the fax receives documents. These
settings are important because they determine how the fax operates
when it receives a document. (➞16-13)
5.FAX’S PRINTER SET
Use these settings to set how the fax unit prints documents you receive.
These features include selecting a cassette or the MP tray for paper
supply and reducing the size of the page. (➞16-16)
6.FILE SETTINGS
Use these settings to set up major features like confidential mailboxes
and polling. (➞16-20)
7.SYSTEM SETTINGS
Use these settings to set up security and tracking features with pass-
words and department passwords and codes. You can also set important
defaults such as the format in which the date and time will be displayed,
selecting the display language, and the sending and receiving start
speeds. (➞16-27)
Chapter 16
Summary of Important Settings 16-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. DUAL LINE OPTIONS
Use these settings to set up the operating environment of the additional
telephone line. This menu only appears after installing the optional
®
Dual-line Upgrade Kit for LASER CLASS 3170 Series. These settings
include registering the second telephone line number and line type, the
telephone line priority on Line 1 and Line 2. (➞16-32)
User Settings
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
1.
Data Registration.
Data
Registration
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
Set
Set
Press Set.
2.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
Press Set.
3.
4.
USER SETTINGS
1.DATE & TIME
Use the search buttons to display the item you want to set or
change.
*Default settings are in bold.
1. DATE & TIME
Register the current date and time using the 24-hour
system. (➞3-13) This setting is required in the United
States.
Note that the year setting is made in two digit numbers
though in the standby mode the year is displayed in four
digit numbers. Also note that it is necessary to enter 00, 01,
02, ..., etc., to set the year to 2000 or later.
16-4 Summary of Important Settings
Chapter 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. UNIT TELEPHONE # Register your fax number. (➞3-14) This setting is required
in the United States.
3. UNIT NAME
Register your name or company name. (➞3-15) In the
United States, you are required to enter your name or
company name.
4. SENDER’S NAME
Register up to 19 alternate sender names. Before you send
a document, press the TTI Selector button and select a name
to replace the name you registered for 3.UNIT NAME.
(➞3-18)
5. TX TERMINAL ID
Print your ID (transmitting terminal ID) on each page you
transmit. (➞3-12) In the United States, this setting must be ON.
ON
After you turn the terminal ID ON, you can do the follow-
ing settings.
1.TTI POSITION
OUTSIDE IMAGE Terminal ID prints outside the
image border.
INSIDE IMAGE
Terminal ID prints inside the
image border.
2.TELEPHONE # MARK You can prefix your number
with the abbreviations FAX or
TEL in your sender ID.
FAX
Prefixes the number with the
abbreviation FAX.
TEL
Prefixes the number with the
abbreviation TEL.
OFF
No terminal ID is printed on the pages you send.
6. DENSITY CONTROL Adjust the scanning density from 1-5 for DK (2 is default),
2-6 for STD (4 is default), 3-7 for LT (6 is default).
Chapter 16
Summary of Important Settings 16-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. PROGRAM KEY
Use the program button to streamline the procedures for
printing activity reports or doing the scanner settings. (➞12-5)
PRINT REPORT
Press the Program button whenever you need a transmis-
sion report for a document you are sending.
REPORT
If you select this setting, you do not have to open all three of
the One-touch Speed Dialing panels to start printing a report.
Whenever you need to print a report, press the Program
button.
SCANNING MODE
STAMP
Set the scanner buttons (Resolution, Contrast, Document
Type) for special settings, like sending a photograph for
example. Then you can adjust all the settings just by
pressing the Program button.
If you have installed the optional stamp feature, this
option is available. If you select STAMP you can turn the
stamp feature on or off without opening all three of the
One-touch Speed Dialing panels to press the Stamp button.
8. OFFHOOK ALARM
Turn the off hook alarm off or on, which alerts you if the
optional handset is not in the handset cradle.
ON
Offhook alarm sounds if optional handset or extension
telephone is left off the hook.
OFF
No offhook alarm.
9. VOLUME CONTROL Adjust the volume of the fax unit.
1. KEYPAD VOLUME 1 (0 to 3)
2. ALARM VOLUME 1 (0 to 3)
10.TEL LINE TYPE
Set the telephone line type. (➞3-10)
TOUCH TONE
The telephone line is set for touch-tone dialing.
ROTARY PULSE
The telephone line is set for rotary pulse dialing. If you
need to dial into an information service that requires tone
dialing, use the Tone button on the operation panel.
(➞12-3)
16-6 Summary of Important Settings
Chapter 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Report Settings
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
1.
Data Registration.
Data
Registration
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
Set
Press Set.
2.
3.
4.
5.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
Press the search buttons to display 2.REPORT SETTINGS.
DATA REGISTRATION
2.REPORT SETTINGS
Set
Press Set.
REPORT SETTINGS
1.TX REPORT
Use the search buttons to display the item you want to set or
change.
Chapter 16
Summary of Important Settings 16-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*Default settings are in bold.
1.TX REPORT
Print a transmission report. (➞14-11)
PRINT ERROR ONLY Print a report only if an error occurs.
OUTPUT YES
A report prints for every transmission.
REPORT WITH TX IMAGE Only available for PRINT ERROR ONLY or OUTPUT YES.
ON
A prompt asks you to confirm whether to print the first
page of the document to remind you of what it contains.
OFF
No prompt appears and no first page is printed.
Print no report, even if an error occurs.
Print a reception activity report. (➞14-14)
OUTPUT NO
2.RX REPORT
OUTPUT NO
No report prints for document receptions.
PRINT ERROR ONLY A report prints for reception errors only.
OUTPUT YES
A report prints for every reception.
3.CONFID. RX REPORT Print a reception activity report every time you receive a
document in a confidential mailbox. (➞10-8, 14-15)
OUTPUT YES
A report prints every time a document is received in a
confidential mailbox.
OUTPUT NO
No report prints when a document is received in a
confidential mailbox.
4.MEMORY BOX REPORT Print a reception activity report every time you receive a
document in a memory box. (➞8-25, 14-16)
OUTPUT YES
A report prints every time a document is received in a
memory box.
OUTPUT NO
No report prints when a document is received in a
memory box.
16-8 Summary of Important Settings
Chapter 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.ACTIVITY REPORT
1. AUTO PRINT
Print an activity management report. (➞14-9)
Print an activity report after every 40 transactions.
ON An activity report prints after the 40th transaction
is completed.
OFF No activity report prints after the 40th transaction
is completed.
2.DAILY REPORT TIME OFF A time is not set to print a transaction report every
day.
ON Allows you to set a time for an activity to be
printed every day. Set the report time for the daily
report. Use 24-hour settings.
3.TX/RX SEPARATE Print an activity report with receptions and transmissions
listed separately.
OFF Transmissions and receptions are listed together in
chronological order.
ON Transmissions and receptions are arranged in
chronological order in separate lists.
6.PRT REPORT WHERE Select a paper supply source for the activity report.
OFF
Report prints from the first available paper supply source.
ON
The number and type of cassettes available depends on
the paper cassettes currently installed. Paper Cassette 2 is
®
optional for the LASER CLASS 3170/3170MS and
®
standard for the LASER CLASS 3175.
CASSETTE 1
MP TRAY
®
LASER CLASS 3170
®
®
LASER CLASS 3175 or LASER CLASS 3170/3170MS
with optional cassette
CASSETTE 1
CASSETTE 2
MP TRAY
Chapter 16
Summary of Important Settings 16-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TX (Send) Settings
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Data Registration.
Data
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
Registration
Set
Press Set.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
Press the search buttons to display 3.TX SETTINGS.
DATA REGISTRATION
3.TX SETTINGS
Set
Press Set.
TX SETTINGS
1.ECM TX
Use the search buttons to display the item you want to set or
change.
*Default settings are in bold.
1.ECM TX
Turn ECM (error correction mode) transmission off and
on. This switch does not affect the button setups for One-
touch or Coded Speed dialing. (➞4-6, 4-15)
ON
All transmissions are conducted with ECM if the other
party’s fax supports ECM.
OFF
ECM is turned off.
2.MID PAUSE SET
Set the length of the pause entered between number when
you press the Pause button (01 to 15SEC). (➞4-3)
02SEC
16-10 Summary of Important Settings
Chapter 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.AUTO REDIAL
Select whether to perform automatic redial when the other
Customize the redial operation.
line is busy or no answer. (➞6-20)
ON
1. REDIAL TIMES
From 01 to 10 times.
(02TIMES)
Even if the fax machine is set to redial several times, it will
redial only once if there is no tone or there is a ring back
tone during the first attempt.
2. REDIAL INTERVAL
From 02 to 99 minutes.
(02MIN.)
OFF
After the first attempt at dialing fails, re-dialing is not
attempted.
4.BATCH TX
If there is more than one document waiting in the memory
to be sent to the same destination, after the timer goes off
to send the first document, then all documents are sent
together in the same transmission. With this feature the fax
unit makes one phone call instead of faxing each docu-
ment with a separate phone call. This feature saves time
and money. (➞16-34)
ON
OFF
5.QUICK ON-LINE TX
ON
OFF
Turn quick memory sending off and on. When ON is
selected, the fax unit starts sending the document while it
is still being scanned. (➞6-13)
6.TIME OUT
Set the interval between dialing (entering phone numbers)
when sending to more than one destination. (➞6-22)
ON
Fax scans the document in 5 or 10 seconds after you enter
the phone number.
OFF
Press Start/Scan to begin transmission. Otherwise, the fax
unit returns to standby.
Chapter 16
Summary of Important Settings 16-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.TX STAMP
Turn stamping off or on and how documents are to be
STAMP ACTION
stamped. (➞12-8)
ON
DIRECT & MEMORY TX Stamps only documents sent
direct and from memory.
DIRECT TX
Stamps documents sent with
direct sending only.
OFF
The stamp feature is turned off and disabled.
Note: The stamp feature is available as an option. If the stamp option is not provided on your
fax machine, this item will not appear in the menu and PIN CODE will appear as item 7.
8.PIN CODE
Turns on the PIN code feature for dialing through a PBX
Turn off the PIN code feature.
that requires PIN codes. (➞13-21)
OFF
ON
NECESS. PIN CODE
The Force PIN Code feature
requires entering PIN code for
every transaction.
OFF
ON
PIN CODE BEF/AFT
Set the PIN code to appear as a
prefix or suffix of the telephone
number.
BEFORE TEL NO. The PIN code appears as a
AFTER TEL NO. The PIN code appears as a
prefix.
suffix.
16-12 Summary of Important Settings
Chapter 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RX (Receive) Settings
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
1.
Data Registration.
Data
Registration
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
Set
Press Set.
2.
3.
4.
5.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
Press the search buttons to display 4.RX SETTINGS.
DATA REGISTRATION
4.RX SETTINGS
Set
Press Set.
RX SETTINGS
1.ECM RX
Use the search buttons to display the item you want to set or
change.
Chapter 16
Summary of Important Settings 16-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*Default settings are in bold.
1.ECM RX
Turn the ECM (error correction mode) receiving off and
on. This switch does not affect the button setups for One-
touch or Coded Speed Dialing. (➞4-6, 4-15)
ON
All receptions are conducted with ECM if the other party's
fax supports ECM.
OFF
ECM is turned off.
2.MAN/AUTO SWITCH Set the fax machine to switch to document receive mode
after ringing for a specified length of time in the manual
receive mode.
OFF
The fax will keep ringing until someone answers the call
manually with the optional handset or a connected
extension telephone.
ON
F/T RING TIME Set the length of time to elapse before
the fax machine switches to document
receiving. Default is 15SEC. Setting
range: 01 to 99SEC
3.REMOTE RX
Receive from a remote telephone with preset setting.
(➞7-9)
ON
Remote receiving is turned on.
REMOTE RX ID You can dial a number code on the
remote extension to start receiving a
document. Default is 25. Setting range:
00 to 99
OFF
Remote receiving is turned off.
16-14 Summary of Important Settings
Chapter 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.MEMORY RX
Select how incoming documents are to be received in the
memory if the fax runs out of toner or paper, or the output
trays are full of printed pages. (➞8-2)
ON
Remainder of the fax is stored in the memory and can be
printed out as soon as you re-fill the paper cassette,
change the toner cartridge, clear the paper jam, or pick up
the printed pages from the output trays.
MEMORY RX ALARM The memory alarm alerts you
when a document has been
received in the memory.
OFF
No alarm sounds when the fax
runs out of toner or recording
paper during document
reception.
ON
An audible alarm sounds
when the document is stored
temporarily in the memory.
OFF
Memory receiving is turned off. If the fax runs out of toner
or recording paper during a document reception, the
remainder of the document is not saved in the memory.
The other party must re-send the document.
5.RX PAGE FOOTER
Print a footer in the lower right corner of every received
page. The footer contains the date, day, time received,
transaction number, and page number. (➞3-13)
OFF
No RX FOOTER prints at the bottom of the page.
ON
Turns on printing of an RX FOOTER at the bottom of
every page you receive.
Chapter 16
Summary of Important Settings 16-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fax’s Printer Set
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
1.
Data Registration.
Data
Registration
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
Set
Press Set.
2.
3.
4.
5.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
Press the search buttons to display 5.FAX’S PRINTER SET.
DATA REGISTRATION
5.FAX’S PRINTER SET
Set
Press Set.
FAX’S PRINTER SET
1.USE MP TRAY
Use the search buttons to display the item you want to set or
change.
16-16 Summary of Important Settings
Chapter 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*Default settings are in bold.
1.USE MP TRAY
Select whether to use the MP tray.
OFF
The MP tray cannot be used.
ON
The MP tray can be used as a paper supply for fax, copy,
report, and printer functions.
SET MP TRAY SIZE
Select the paper size you are
loading on the MP tray.
The sizes can be set to A4,
letter, or legal.
2.# OF RX COPIES
Select the number of copies (from 01 to 99) of received
documents you want printed. Default is 01 copy.
3.SELECT CASSETTE Select how you want over-size documents to be divided
1.CASSETTE SW A
when the paper in the paper cassette is too small.
Selects how legal-size documents are divided. This switch
is effective only when the paper cassettes are set to legal-
size and out of legal-size paper.
ON
Divide legal-size documents
into two pages.
OFF
Receive legal-size documents
in memory.
2.CASSETTE SW B
Selects how letter-size documents are received on larger
paper. This switch is effective only when the letter-size
paper runs out.
ON
Prints the letter-size document
on the larger paper (with white
space).
OFF
Prints the letter-size document
in the memory.
4.RX REDUCTION
Receive images at a reduced size.
OFF
Turns off image reduction.
Turns on image reduction.
1.RX REDUCTION
ON
AUTO SELECTION The fax unit automatically
reduces the image to the size of
the selected paper.
FIXED REDUCTION You set the reduction rate.
(75%, 90%, 95%, 97%)
Chapter 16
Summary of Important Settings 16-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.SELECT REDUCE DIR Select the direction of reduc-
tion for the percentage of fixed
reduction selected above.
VERTICAL ONLY Reduction performed in the
vertical direction only.
HORIZ & VERTICAL Reduction performed in the
horizontal and vertical
direction.
5.SELECT DENSITY
Adjust the print density of documents you receive.
LT (Light), STD (Standard), DK (Dark)
6.TONER SUPPLY LOW Set the fax to continue printing even after toner runs low
and the Change Cartridge indicator lights and the
REPLACE CARTRIDGE message appears.
RX TO MEMORY
Stop printing and receive the remainder of the document
in the memory.
KEEP PRINTING
Ignore the warning and keep printing until the document
is completely printed. This setting is convenient when a
new toner cartridge is not at hand. However, even if the
toner cartridge is out of toner, the fax will not receive the
document in the memory. After installing the new toner
cartridge, be sure to set to RX TO MEMORY.
16-18 Summary of Important Settings
Chapter 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.SELECT OUTPT TRAY Select one output tray for each function (FAX, COPY,
REPORT and PRINTER) to classify the output documents.
OFF
All the printed documents are delivered to the lower
output tray. When the full paper sensor detects the tray is
full, the paper delivery automatically switches to the
upper output tray. If the face-up tray is open, the paper is
delivered to the face-up tray.
ON
Select either the upper output tray or the lower output
tray for each function.
1. FAX
UPPER OUTPUT TRAY Received documents by fax are
delivered to the upper output tray.
LOWER OUTPUT TRAY Received documents by fax are
delivered to the lower output tray.
2. COPY
UPPER OUTPUT TRAY Copied pages are delivered to the
upper output tray.
LOWER OUTPUT TRAY Copied pages are delivered to the
lower output tray.
3. REPORT UPPER OUTPUT TRAY Printed reports are delivered to the
upper output tray.
LOWER OUTPUT TRAY Printed reports are delivered to the
lower output tray.
4. PRINTER UPPER OUTPUT TRAY Data input from a PC are printed
and delivered to the upper output
tray.
LOWER OUTPUT TRAY Data input from a PC are printed
and delivered to the lower output
tray.
Chapter 16
Summary of Important Settings 16-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
File Settings
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
1.
Data Registration.
Data
Registration
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
Set
Press Set.
2.
3.
4.
5.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
Press the search buttons to display 6.FILE SETTINGS.
DATA REGISTRATION
6.FILE SETTINGS
Set
Press Set.
FILE SETTINGS
1.CONFID. MAILBOX
Use the search buttons to display the item you want to set or
change.
16-20 Summary of Important Settings
Chapter 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*Default settings are in bold.
1.CONFID. MAILBOX
1.SETUP FILE
Set up confidential mailbox. (➞10-2)
Set up a confidential mailbox.
SET BOX #
Create a two-digit confidential mailbox number.
Give the mailbox a name up to 24 characters long.
1.FILE NAME
2.PASSWORD
Assign a password to protect the mailbox from being changed or deleted.
Enter a 20-digit (max.) ITU-T subaddress for reception.
Enter a 20-digit (max.) ITU-T password for reception.
Sets the number of copies printed from every document.
3.SUBADDRESS
4.RX PASSWORD
5.# OF RX COPIES
2.CHANGE DATA
Change all the mailbox settings done with the settings
above.
SET BOX #
Enter the number of the mailbox you want to change.
PASSWORD
Enter the password protecting the mailbox settings.
You can now change any of the settings listed in the table
above (1.SETUP FILE).
3.DELETE FILE
SET BOX #
Delete a mailbox.
Enter the number of the mailbox you want to delete.
PASSWORD
Enter the password protecting the mailbox you want to
delete.
2.RELAY TX GROUP
1.SETUP FILE
Set up relay box so your fax machine can relay document
transmissions to other fax machines in your area. (➞9-3)
Set up the relay box.
SET RLY TX GROUP# Set a two-digit relay group number (00-99).
1.GROUP DIAL NAME
2.PASSWORD
3.SUBADDRESS
4.RX PASSWORD
5.SELECT ORIG UNIT
Give the relay group a name (length: 24 characters).
Assign a four-digit password to protect the relay box settings.
Enter a 20-digit (max.) ITU-T subaddress.
Enter a 20-digit (max.) ITU-T password.
Set your fax to check the incoming relay command to make sure the
originator is registered.
ON
Receives and obeys incoming relay commands for registered
originators only. Use the One-touch or Coded Speed Dialing buttons to
register originators.
TEL=
OFF
6.PRINT RX DOC.
ON
Receives and obeys all incoming relay commands.
Turns printing on/off for documents received for relay.
Prints a copy of every document relayed.
# OF RX COPIES Set the number of document copies to print.
OFF
No copy is printed.
7.SELECT LOCATIONS Use the One-touch or Coded Speed Dialing buttons to select the fax
TEL=
numbers to receive the document relayed from your fax machine.
Chapter 16
Summary of Important Settings 16-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.TX REPORT
Send a TX report from your fax machine (the relay unit) to the
originator of the transmission.
TRANSMIT
NOT TRANSMIT
9.TX START TIME
Transmits a document relay report to the originator.
No report is transmitted.
Set the fax machine to hold the document from the originator and then
relay it at a specified time. Use 24-hour setting. Up to 5 time settings are
possible.
10.RELAY B’CAST
OFF
Turn relay broadcasting off temporarily without canceling or changing
all of the relay box settings.
ON
In order for relay broadcasting to occur, this setting must be on.
2.CHANGE DATA
Change or add the settings on the relay box.
SET RLY GROUP TX# Enter the number of the relay box you want to change.
PASSWORD
Enter the password protecting the relay box settings.
You can now change any of the settings listed in the table
above (1.SETUP FILE).
3.DELETE FILE
Delete a relay box and all settings.
SET RLY TX GROUP# Enter the number of the relay box you want to delete.
PASSWORD
Enter the password of the relay box you want to delete.
3.MEMORY BOX
Set up a general memory box to handle ITU-T subaddress
and password transactions. (➞8-11)
1.SETUP FILE
SET BOX #
Create a general memory box and do all the general
memory box settings.
Give the general memory box a box number.
1.FILE NAME
2.PASSWORD
Give the memory box a name up to 24 characters long.
Assign a four-digit password to protect the memory box
settings.
3.SUBADDRESS
Enter a 20-digit (max.) ITU-T standard subaddress. You
must enter a subaddress in order to use the memory box features.
Enter a 20-digit (max.) ITU-T password.
4.TX PASSWORD
5.RX PASSWORD
Enter a 20-digit (max.) ITU-T password.
16-22 Summary of Important Settings
Chapter 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.RECEIVE
NO
Turn memory box receiving off.
YES
Turn memory box receiving on.
1.SELECT ORIG UNIT
Turn on checking to make sure the originator is registered
on your fax.
OFF
ON
Receive all documents, regardless of origin.
Receive documents from registered sources only.
Use the One-touch or Coded Speed Dialing buttons to
register fax numbers from which you want the memory
box to receive documents.
TEL=
2.PRINT RX DOC.
Turn on printing of documents received in the memory
box.
OFF
ON
Documents received in the memory box are not printed.
Documents received in the memory box are printed.
Set the print method.
1.PRINT METHOD
AUTO
MAN.
Print documents automatically as they are received.
Print documents manually.
2.# OF RX COPIES
Set the number of document copies to print.
Transmit documents from the memory box.
A document cannot be transmitted from the memory box.
A document can be transmitted from the memory box.
Select fax telephone numbers to which to send documents
from the memory box. Use One-touch or Coded Speed
Dialing buttons to register the destinations.
Transmit documents received in the memory box or scanned
into the memory box.
7.TRANSMIT
NO
YES
1.SELECT LOCATIONS
TEL=
2.TX DOCUMENT
1.RECEIVED DOCUMENT Transmit or do not transmit documents received in the
memory box.
TRANSMIT
Documents received in the memory box are to be transmit-
ted.
TX REPORT
Send a TX report to the originator for every document
received and transmitted from the memory box.
A transmission report is sent.
TRANSMIT
NOT TRANSMIT
A transmission report is not sent.
Documents received in the memory box are not to be
transmitted.
NOT TRANSMIT
2.SCAN DOCUMENT
Transmit or do not transmit documents scanned into the
memory box.
TRANSMIT
NOT TRANSMIT
3.TX START TIME
Scanned documents can be transmitted.
Scanned documents cannot be transmitted.
Set a time for transmission of documents from the memory
box.
EVERYDAY
Set the time using the 24-hour system. Up to 5 times can be
sent.
SELECT DAYS
Select a day. Up to 5 times can be set for each day.
Chapter 16
Summary of Important Settings 16-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.POLLING TX
For the memory box, turn polling sending on and off.
Memory box cannot be used as a polling box.
Memory box can be used as a polling box.
Set how the document in the memory box is to be handled
after being polled and sent.
NO
YES
1.ERASE AFTER TX
ON
OFF
Document is erased after polling/sending.
Document remains in the memory box after polling/
sending.
2.TX DOCUMENT
Transmit documents received in the memory box or scanned
into the memory box for polling.
1.RECEIVED DOCUMENT Set documents received in the memory box for sending
after polling.
TRANSMIT
NOT TRANSMIT
2.SCAN DOCUMENT
TRANSMIT
Documents received in the memory box from other faxes
can be transmitted.
Documents received in the memory box from other faxes
cannot be transmitted.
Set documents scanned into the memory box for sending
after polling.
Documents scanned into the memory box can be transmit-
ted.
NOT TRANSMIT
Documents scanned into the memory box cannot be
transmitted.
2.CHANGE DATA
Change settings for the memory box or add settings you
did not do when you created the memory box.
SET BOX #
Enter the number of the box you want to change.
PASSWORD
Enter the password protecting the memory box settings.
You can now change any of the settings listed in the table
above.
3.DELETE FILE
SET BOX #
Delete the general memory box.
Enter the box number of the memory box you want to
delete.
PASSWORD
Enter the password protecting the memory box that you
want to delete.
16-24 Summary of Important Settings
Chapter 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.PRESET POLLING
1.SETUP FILE
Set up preset polling/receiving setting. (➞11-5)
Set up a setting to poll at preset time.
SET BOX #
1.FILE NAME
2.PASSWORD
Create a two-digit preset polling box.
Enter the name of the file (24 characters).
Enter a four-digit password to protect the polling settings.
3.SELECT LOCATIONS
Select the numbers of the fax units you want to poll. Use the One-
touch or Coded Speed Dialing buttons to enter the numbers of the
fax machine that you want to poll.
TEL=
4.START TIME
EVERY DAY
Set the time(s) that you want to start polling.
Set up to 5 times for every day.
SELECT DAYS
Set up to 5 times for each day selected.
2.CHANGE DATA
SET BOX #
Change the settings for preset polling/receiving.
Enter the number of the box you want to change.
PASSWORD
Enter the password protecting the preset polling settings.
You can now change any of the settings listed in the table
above (1.SETUP FILE).
3.DELETE FILE
SET BOX #
Delete the setting to poll at preset time.
Set the box number for the box you want to delete.
Enter the password of the file you want to delete.
PASSWORD
5.POLLING BOX
1.SETUP FILE
Set up a polling box to store a document in your fax
machine until your fax machine is polled to send the
document. (➞11-15)
Set up a polling box to hold a document until it is polled
by and sent to another fax machine.
SET BOX #
Set a box number for the polling box.
Enter a file name (24 characters).
1.FILE NAME
2.PASSWORD
Enter a password to protect the polling box settings.
Enter a 20-digit (max.) standard ITU-T subaddress.
Enter a 20-digit (max.) standard ITU-T password.
Tell the fax machine how to handle the document after it is polled
and sent.
3.SUBADDRESS
4.TX PASSWORD
5.ERASE AFTER TX
ON
OFF
Document is erased from the memory after it is polled and sent.
Document is not erased and remains in the memory after it is
polled and sent.
2.CHANGE DATA
SET BOX #
Change the settings on the polling box. You can now change
any of the settings listed in the table above (1.SETUP FILE).
Set a box number you want to change.
Chapter 16
Summary of Important Settings 16-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASSWORD
Enter the password of the polling box you want to change.
You can now change any of the settings listed in the table
above (1.SETUP FILE).
3.DELETE FILE
SET BOX #
Delete the polling box file.
Set the box number for the box you want to delete.
PASSWORD
Enter the password of the polling box file you want to delete.
6.TRANSFER
Set the fax unit to transfer the documents it receives to
other faxes. (➞7-14)
1.SETUP FILE
Create a file to receive and transfer documents.
1.FILE NAME
2.SELECT LOCATIONS
Enter a file name (24 characters).
Select the numbers of the fax machines where you want
documents transferred. Use the One-touch or Coded Speed
Dialing buttons to enter the numbers of the fax machines where
you want documents transferred.
TEL=
3.PASSWORD
4.SELECT ORIG UNIT
Enter a four-digit password to protect the transfer file settings.
Select the telephone numbers of the fax machines you want have
received and transferred.
OFF
ON
All fax transmissions are received and transferred.
The fax machine receives and transfers transmissions only from fax
units that you designate by fax telephone number.
Use the One-touch or Coded Speed Dialing buttons to designate
originator fax machines for receive and transfer.
Set a time period wherein documents are to be received and transferred.
Set a specified time to start transfer operation.
Set up to 5 times every day.
TEL =
5.TIME SETUP
1.START TIME
EVERY DAY
SELECT DAYS
Select one or several days for document transfer. You can set 5
times for any day(s) you select.
2.END TIME
EVERY DAY
SELECT DAYS
Set a specified time to end transfer operation.
Set up to 5 times every day.
Select one or several days for document transfer. You can set 5
times for any day(s) you select.
6.PRINT RX DOC.
Set the fax machine that transfers the document to print a copy of
the transferred document.
OFF
ON
Received and transferred documents are not printed.
A copy of every document received and transferred is printed.
Set the number of document copies to print.
# OF RX COPIES
2.CHANGE DATA
PASSWORD
Change the transfer settings.
Enter the four-digit password protecting the transfer
settings. You can now change any of the settings listed in
the table above (1.SETUP FILE).
3.DELETE FILE
PASSWORD
Delete the transfer settings file.
Enter the four-digit password of the transfer file you want
to delete.
16-26 Summary of Important Settings
Chapter 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Settings
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
1.
Data Registration.
Data
Registration
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
Set
Press Set.
2.
3.
4.
5.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
Press the search buttons to display 7.SYSTEM SETTINGS.
DATA REGISTRATION
7.SYSTEM SETTINGS
Set
Press Set.
SYSTEM SETTINGS
1.PASSWORD
Use the search buttons to display the item you want to set or
change.
Chapter 16
Summary of Important Settings 16-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*Default settings are in bold.
PASSWORD
Enter the system password protecting the System Settings.
(You will not have to do this if the System Settings are not
yet password protected.) (➞13-2)
1. PASSWORD
Enter a four-digit password to protect the System Settings.
2. RESTRICTIVE CODES Set restrictions for sending and printing with department
access codes and user access codes. (➞13-6)
1.TX SETTINGS
Restrict sending with department and user access codes.
OFF
Turn off restrictions on sending. This turns the
feature off without canceling the department
access codes and passwords.
ON
DAC SETUP
ON
Set a DAC (department access
code).
Turn on department access
codes.
ENTER DAC
01:
Press the search buttons to
select a number (01 to 19), then
enter a four-digit department
access code.
DAC PASSWORD
Enter a four-digit password for
the department access pass-
word.
OFF
Turn off restrictions by depart-
ment access codes and pass-
words but turn on restrictions
by user access code.
USER ACCESS CODE
A four-digit number you set to
restrict sending.
2.FAX’S PRINTER SET Restricts document printing and copying with a four-digit
access code.
OFF
ON
USER ACCESS CODE A four-digit number you set to
restrict printing and copying.
16-28 Summary of Important Settings
Chapter 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.TEL SETTING
Allows you to restrict use of the telephone for voice
communication.
OFF
ON
3. MEMORY LOCK RX Turn forced memory receiving on and off. (➞13-17)
OFF
ON
1.MEM LOCK PASSWORD Enter a four-digit password.
2.REPORT
Set reports to print (or not
print) when the forced
memory receiving feature is
on.
OUTPUT NO
Reports are not printed when
the forced memory receiving
feature is on.
OUTPUT YES
Reports are printed when the
forced memory receiving
feature is on.
3.TIME SETUP
Set a time to turn on forced
memory receiving.
OFF
ON
1.START TIME
Turn on memory receiving at a
specified time.
EVERY DAY
Set up to 5 times for every day.
SELECT DAYS Set up to 5 times for each
selected day of the week.
2.END TIME
Turn off memory receiving at
specified time.
EVERY DAY
SELECT DAYS Set up to 5 times for each
Set up to 5 times for every day.
selected day of the week.
4. RX RESTRICTION
Turn off junk mail. (➞13-16)
OFF
Anyone can dial your fax and send a document.
ON
Another party can dial your fax and send a document only
if their number is registered on your fax for a One-touch
or Coded Speed Dialing button.
Chapter 16
Summary of Important Settings 16-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. DATE SETUP
Set the format for the DATE & TIME settings menu and
how the date is displayed in the LCD in the standby
mode.
MM/DD/YYYY
DD/MM YYYY
YYYY MM/DD
6. DISPLAY LANGUAGE Select a language for prompts, messages, menus and
printed reports. The number of languages available may
be different depending on where you purchased your fax
machine.
ENGLISH, FRENCH, SPANISH
7. TX START SPEED
8. RX START SPEED
9. RX PASSWORD
Set the transmission speed for all documents you send.
Available settings: 33600, 14400, 9600, 7200, 4800, 2400
bps
Set the transmission speed for all documents you receive.
Available settings: 33600, 14400, 9600, 7200, 4800, 2400
bps
Set an RX password to match the ITU-T password of all
incoming document transmissions.
Enter a 20-digit (max.) ITU-T password. To receive a
document, this RX password must match the ITU-T
password of the incoming document.
After the RX password has been set, all incoming docu-
ments must have a matching ITU-T password.
-if not-
The document will be received regardless of this setting if
the incoming document has a matching subaddress and
password for a memory box.
16-30 Summary of Important Settings
Chapter 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10.ENERGY SAVER
Set the fax machine to reduce power consumption when
not in use. (➞3-21)
OFF
Fax machine does not power down even when it is idle.
ON
The fax machine reduces power consumption after it has
remained idle for a specified length of time.
ENERGY SVR TIME
Set the idle time to elapse and
trigger reduced power con-
sumption. (03 to 30MIN.)
Default is 03MIN.
If you have installed the Dual-line Upgrade kit or the PCL6 Printer
Board, the energy saver feature will not work and 10.ENERGY SAVER
will not be displayed in the menu. 10.PHONE NO. CHECK will be
displayed instead.
11.PHONE NO. CHECK Allows you to prevent sending a document to an un-
wanted destination. The number you dial is checked with
connected number and if they match, then the document
is sent.
OFF
The number is not checked.
ON
The fax uses the last six digits of the number you dial to
match with the last six digits of the other party’s number
registered on the remote fax. If the numbers match the
document is sent. Otherwise, the document is not sent.
Chapter 16
Summary of Important Settings 16-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Line Options
Open all three of the One-touch Speed Dialing panels. Then press
1.
Data Registration.
Data
Registration
REGISTRATION
1.DATA REGISTRATION
Set
Press Set.
2.
3.
4.
5.
DATA REGISTRATION
1.USER SETTINGS
Press the search buttons to display 8.DUAL LINE OPTIONS.
DATA REGISTRATION
8.DUAL LINE OPTIONS
Set
Press Set.
DUAL LINE OPTIONS
1.2nd LINE TEL #
Use the search buttons to display the item you want to set or
change.
16-32 Summary of Important Settings
Chapter 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*Default settings are in bold.
1.2nd LINE TEL #
Register your second fax number. (➞2-57) This setting is
required in the United States.
2.2nd LINE TYPE
Set the second telephone line type. (➞2-58)
TOUCH TONE
The telephone line is set for touch-tone dialing.
ROTARY PULSE
The telephone line is set for rotary pulse dialing. If you
need to dial into an information service that requires tone
dialing, use the Tone button on the operation panel.
(➞12-3)
3. TX LINE PRIORITY
Set the telephone line priority on Line 1 and Line 2.
(➞2-59)
LINE1 TX PRIORITY When both lines are open, transmission is sent on Line 1.
If Line 1 is busy and Line 2 is open, transmission is sent on
Line 2.
LINE2 TX PRIORITY When both lines are open, transmission is sent on Line 2.
If Line 2 is busy and Line 1 is open, transmission is sent on
Line 1.
LINE1 TX PROHIBIT Even if both lines are open, transmission is sent on Line 2.
Line 1 is only available for receiving.
LINE2 TX PROHIBIT Even if both lines are open, transmission is sent on Line 1.
Line 2 is only available for receiving.
Chapter 16
Summary of Important Settings 16-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relationship between BATCH TX, QUICK ON-
LINE TX, and Timer Settings
TIMER SET WITH SPEED DIALING BUTTONS
QUICK ON-
BATCH TX
ON
LINE TX
YES
NO
ON
Documents go into memory and
are grouped. Group is sent at the
specified time.
If the line is available, documents
are not grouped and are sent
immediately.
If the line is busy, documents go
into memory, are grouped, then
are sent when the line becomes
available.
ON
OFF
ON
Documents go into memory and
are grouped. The group is sent at
the specified time.
Documents go into memory, are
grouped and then are sent when
the line becomes available.
OFF
Documents go into memory, but
are not grouped. Each document
is sent at the specified time.
If the line is available, documents
are not grouped and are sent
immediately. If the line is busy,
documents go into memory, are
not grouped, and are sent when
the line becomes available.
OFF
OFF
Documents go into memory, but
are not grouped. Each document
is sent at the specified time.
Documents go into memory, are
not grouped and are sent when
the line becomes available.
16-34 Summary of Important Settings
Chapter 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A
Specifications
General
Sheet size:
Max. width 11 in. (279 mm)
Min. width 5.8 in. (148 mm)
Automatic Document Feeder
(ADF) Capacity:
50 letter- or A4-size pages
20 legal-, B4- or 11 × 17 in.-size pages
Effective scanning image size:
Recording paper size:
Paper capacity:
Width (letter, legal)
10 in. (254 mm)
Width (letter, legal) 8.5 in. (216 mm)
(A4) 8.3 in. (210 mm)
MP (multi-purpose) tray:
approximately 100 sheets (letter,
2
legal, A4) (80 g/m or 21 lbs.)
Paper Cassette 1
approximately 500 sheets (letter,
2
legal, A4) (80 g/m or 21 lbs.)
Paper Cassette 2
approximately 500 sheets (letter,
legal, A4, executive*, B5*)
(Standard with the LASER
®
CLASS 3175 and optional with
®
the LASER CLASS 3170/3170MS)
Compatibility:
Modem speed:
G3
33.6/31.2/28.8/26.4/24/21.6/19.2/
16.8/14.4/12/9.6/7.2/4.8/2.4 Kbps
Appendix A
Specifications A-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
®
Memory:
LASER CLASS 3170/3170MS
3 MB (192 pages** approx.)
Upgrade Option
plus 4 MB (additional 256 pages**
approx.) = total 448
pages** approx.
plus 4 MB × 2
(additional 512 pages**
approx.) = total 704
pages** approx.
®
LASER CLASS 3175
7 MB (448 pages** approx.)
Upgrade Option
plus 4 MB (additional 256 pages**
approx.) = total 704
pages** approx.
LCD (Liquid Crystal Display):
Data compression system:
Transmission time:
20 × 2
MH, MR, MMR, JBIG***
G3 Mode
V.34+JBIG
Approx. 3 sec.****/pg.**
ECM-MMR
Approx. 6 sec./pg.**
MR Standard mode
Approx. 12 sec./pg.**
MH Standard mode
Approx. 15 sec./pg.**
G3 Mode
Scanning line density:
Standard:
8 dots/mm × 3.85 lines/mm
Fine:
8 dots/mm × 7.7 lines/mm
Super Fine:
8 dots/mm × 15.4 lines/mm
Ultra Fine:
16 dots/mm × 15.4 lines/mm
(interpolated)
Toner cartridge:
Canon FX6 Toner Cartridge
A-2 Specifications
Appendix A
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Fax printing speed:
Scanning method:
Approx. 17 pp./min. (letter)
Solid state electronic scanning by
contact image sensor
Recording (printing) method:
Print resolution:
Laser beam electronic circuit
600 dpi × 600 dpi
Applicable lines:
Subscribers telephone circuit (PSTN)
Dial Features
One-touch Speed Dialing (Registra-
tion for 72 numbers)
Coded Speed Dialing (Registration
for 128 numbers)
Group Dialing
On-hook dialing
Manual dialing with 10-button
keypad
Automatic re-dialing
Manual re-dialing
Program dialing
Dial search
Appendix A
Specifications A-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Networking Features
Transmitting:
Sequential broadcast
Batch transmission
Confidential transmission
Relay broadcasting
Password/subaddress sending
Polling transmission
Delayed transmission
Receiving:
Memory lock reception
Polling reception
Timer polling
Confidential mailbox
Relay broadcasting
Transfer
Received image reduction
Collating
Copier Features
Scanning resolution:
16 dots/mm × 15.4 lines/mm
(Memory Copy/Interpolated)
Printing resolution:
Copy speed:
600 × 600 dpi
Multi copy speed Approx. 17 cpm
(letter)
Multiple copy:
Up to 99 pages
A-4 Specifications
Appendix A
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Telephone Features
Optional telephone handset
Extension phone hookup
Remote reception by extension phone
Tone button
Pause button
Power
Power source:
120 V/60 Hz
12 hours
Battery backup:
Power consumption:
®
LASER CLASS 3170/3175
Standby
Operation
approx. 20 W at 77°F (25°C)
approx. 285 W, maximum approx. 600 W
Energy saver standby approx. 15 W
®
LASER CLASS 3170MS
Standby
Operation
approx. 26 W at 77°F (25°C)
approx. 400 W, maximum approx. 600 W
Operating Environment
Temperature:
50°F to 90.5°F (10°C to 32.5°C)
20 – 80% RH
Humidity:
Weight
®
LASER CLASS 3170
Approx. 57 lb. (26 kg)
Approx. 73 lb. (33 kg)
®
LASER CLASS 3175
®
LASER CLASS 3170MS
Approx. 58.6 lb. (26.6 kg)
Appendix A
Specifications A-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dimensions
®
LASER CLASS 3170/3170MS
19.8 in. w × 20 in. d × 18.5 in. h
(501 mm w × 508 mm d × 467 mm h)
(without handset)
22.5 in. w × 20 in. d × 18.5 in. h
(571 mm w × 508 mm d × 467 mm h)
(with handset)
®
LASER CLASS 3175
19.8 in. w × 20 in. d × 23.3 in. h
(501 mm w × 508 mm d × 588 mm h)
(without handset)
22.5 in. w × 20 in. d × 23.3 in. h
(571 mm w × 508 mm d × 588 mm h)
(with handset)
*
You can load executive- or B5-size paper in Paper Cassette 2 only when
you use it for the printer function. When you use it as a paper supply
for fax, you can load letter-, legal- or A4-size paper only.
** Based on CCITT/ITU-T No. 1 Chart (Standard Mode).
*** JBIG is a new ITU-T standard image data compression method. JBIG's
compression method allows data to be compressed more efficiently
than MMR, a conventional compression method. JBIG is especially
effective when transmitting halftone image documents. Because the
smaller data size requires less transmission time, JBIG saves you time
and money.
**** Approximately 3 seconds per page fax transmission time based on
CCITT/ITU-T No.1 Chart, (JBIG, Standard Mode) at 33.6Kbps modem
speed.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
A-6 Specifications
Appendix A
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B
Documents You Can Scan
Follow these guidelines if you need exact information about the dimen-
sions of documents you can scan.
Document Media to Avoid
Avoid trying to scan wrinkled or creased paper, carbon or carbon back
paper, curled paper, coated paper, torn paper, onion skin or other very thin
paper.
Specifications for Paper Documents You Can Scan
Quality
Use plain bond, typewriter quality without curl, folds, or
rough edges.
2
2
Weight
16-22 lb. (60 g/m to 82.5 g/m )
0.003 in. to 0.005 in. (0.08 to 0.13 mm)
64°F to 75°F (18°C to 24°C)
50% to 60% RH
Thickness
Storage
Document Thickness
The thickness of documents that you feed into the fax should be within the
range 0.002-0.005 in. (0.06-0.13 mm). If you have to feed a thick document,
first make a copy of the document on a copy machine and then send the
copy.
Appendix B
Documents You Can Scan B-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Document Size
Make sure the documents you feed into the fax are within the dimensions
shown below. For documents that are larger or smaller than these recom-
mended limits, reduce them or enlarge them on a copy machine and then
send the copy.
Maximum Document Size
Minimum Document Size
11" (279 mm)
5.8" (148 mm)
5"
(128 mm)
39.4"
(1 meter)
Scanning Area on the Document
The shaded areas in the illustration below show the parts of the document
page that are not scanned by the fax. Before you send a document, make
sure the document margins are wider than the margins shown below.
max. 0.16"
(4 mm)
max. 0.16"
(4 mm)
Ledger
Letter/Legal
max. 0.16"
(4 mm)*
max. 0.16"
(4 mm)*
max. 0.62"
(15.7 mm)
max. 0.64"
(16.2 mm)
max. 0.16"
(4 mm)
max. 0.18"
(4.5 mm)
* max. 0.22" (5.5 mm) at the standard scanning mode
B-2 Documents You Can Scan
Appendix B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing Area
Note that the fax unit cannot print completely from the edge of one border
to another. The size of the margin differs slightly with the paper size.
max. 0.16" (4 mm)
max. letter 0.53" (13.5 mm)
max. legal 0.54" (13.9 mm)
max. 0.18" (4.5 mm)
max. 0.26" (6.5 mm)
Appendix B
Documents You Can Scan B-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B-4 Documents You Can Scan
Appendix B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
A
Activity report
Journal of transactions, both sent and received.
ADF
Stands for automatic document feeder.
Automatic dialing
Dialing fax or telephone numbers by pressing one or four buttons. To use
automatic dialing, you must register the numbers in the fax unit’s
memory. See also One-touch Speed Dialing, Coded Speed Dialing, and Group
Dialing.
Automatic redialing
When the other fax is busy or does not answer, the fax waits 2 minutes
and then automatically re-dials the same number. If there is still no
answer, it makes 1 more attempt after waiting for 2 minutes. After the
last unsuccessful attempt, the fax prints an Error TX report.
Automatic reduction of received image
At the top of the received document, the date, time, company name, and
fax number can be printed. Because this extra information at the top of
the received document requires additional space, the number of pages of
the received document may increase. Automatic reduction of the re-
ceived image avoids this by reducing the size of the printed image.
B
Batch sending
When several documents are scanned into the memory to be sent to the
same destination at a specified time, the documents are sent together in
the same transmission one after the other.
bps
Stands for bits per second.
Glossary
G-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Broadcasting
Transmitting a document to more than one location.
C
CCITT/ITU-T
Formally known as CCITT, Consultative Committee for International
Telegraph and Telephone. CCITT has been replaced by the International
Telecommunications Unit-Telecommunications Sector (ITU-T), a commit-
tee created to set international standards for telecommunications.
Coded Speed Dialing
Allows you to automatically dial a facsimile number by pressing only
four buttons, Coded Dial and a three-digit code. You can register up to 128
facsimile numbers for Coded Speed Dialing. When you register the
facsimile number, you can also enter the receiving party’s name, set the
speed for the transmission, and other useful features.
Confidential mailbox
Two-digit numbers between 00 and 99. If the number is a single digit,
precede it with a zero. The fax can have up to 50 confidential mailboxes
for individual users.
Confidential mailbox password
Confidential mailbox passwords are four-digit decimal numbers between
0000 to 9999. To print a confidential document received in the memory,
you must enter your confidential mailbox password. Remember your
password. You will need it to print confidential documents received in
the memory. Later if you want to change your password, you must first
enter the current password before you are allowed to complete the
procedure.
Confidential receiving
To receive a confidential document you must first create a mailbox and
register your confidential mailbox password. You use the password to
print out confidential documents that you receive in the memory. Confi-
dential mailbox passwords are four-digit decimal numbers between 0000
to 9999. When you receive a confidential document in your mailbox, the
fax prints a Confidential RX Report.
Confidential sending
To use confidential sending, there are two ways. One is to first register the
procedure with One-touch Speed Dialing or Coded Speed Dialing. After
you register the procedure, all you have to do is feed the document into
the fax and press the buttons for the speed dialing. The other is to press
Confidential Mailbox button and dial.
G-2
Glossary
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D
Default
The fax is programmed in the factory with settings that we recommend.
These are known as factory default settings. You can customize your fax
by programming settings other than the factory default settings. For
details, see Chapter 16 of this Facsimile User’s Guide.
Delayed transmission
With delayed transmission (also called timer sending), you can set a time
for the document to be sent. You do not have to be in the office when the
document is sent at the specified time. With delayed transmission you
can send the same document to more than one destination at a preset
time. If you frequently send the same document to several destinations,
you can save time by using Group Dialing.
Density control
You can darken or lighten documents that you send or receive with
buttons at the top of the operation panel.
Destination label
Attachable label used to label speed dialing buttons on the facsimile
machine. Write the name of the other party on the label and then paste
the label above the button where his or her fax number is registered.
Dialing methods
Dialing numbers at the press of one or a few buttons. To use automatic
dialing, you must register the fax numbers in the memory of the machine.
• Regular dialing
• One-touch Speed Dialing
• Coded Speed Dialing
• Group Dialing
• Directory Dialing
Direct sending
Use direct sending if the memory is full but you still want to send a
document. Direct sending scans and sends one page at a time. The
document is not scanned into the memory, so it takes a little more time to
get your original document back.
Document
The single sheet or stack of papers containing the data you want to send
through or receive from a fax machine.
Glossary
G-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Document density
The document density settings alter the lightness or darkness of the
documents sent or received. See density control.
Document guides
Guide the document into the fax for scanning, copying, or sending.
Document memory list
The memory list shows what documents are currently stored in the fax
memory. Each memory list shows:
• Transaction number for each document.
• How each document was stored.
• Name and number the fax was sent to if they are registered for One-
touch or Coded Speed Dialing.
• Number of pages in the document.
• Date and time each document was stored in the memory and when it
will be sent.
• Sender’s name (TTI).
Document feeder tray
The document feeder tray can hold 50 sheets of letter- or A4-size paper,
or 20 legal-, 11 × 17 in.- or B4-size paper. You load a document once, and
the fax then feeds each sheet of the document one by one.
Document output tray
Holds documents ejected from the fax unit after they have been scanned
into memory, copied, or sent by direct sending.
Dual access
Enables you to scan a transmission, even if the fax is copying, sending or
receiving a document. You do not have to wait until the fax finishes the
current send/receive transmission. While the facsimile sends a document
from the memory, you can load other documents into the memory, copy
documents, print out reports, or register information.
Dual-line Upgrade Kit II
The optional Dual-line Upgrade Kit II allows you to connect two telephone
lines to the fax unit. Both lines can be used simultaneously for facsimile
transactions, either line can be given priority for transactions, or either line
can be temporarily disabled.
G-4
Glossary
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E
ECM
Stands for error correction mode. Reduces system and line errors when
sending or receiving from another fax with ECM capability. When there
is noise on the telephone line, a distortion or blank area can occur in the
document received by the other party. ECM divides one page into a
number of blocks and checks for lost data block by block. When some
data is lost in a certain block, ECM repeats transmission from the begin-
ning of that block after confirming that all data within the block can be
transmitted successfully. In this way, ECM guarantees that a good image
can be received at the receiving end. ECM is very effective in countries
where the telephone lines are in poor condition. There may be occasions
when you want to turn ECM off. For instance, when you feel the transac-
tion speed is extremely slow, you can turn ECM off.
Error lamp
Blinks red when a paper jam occurs or the fax is running out of toner or
paper.
F
Fine
Use this setting for documents with very small characters and lines. It is
twice the Standard resolution.
G
G3
Group 3 fax machines defined by CCITT/ITU-T. Uses encoding schemes
to transmit image data while reducing the amount of data that needs to
be transmitted, thus reducing transmission time. G3 fax machines can
transmit one page in less than one minute. Encoding schemes for G3 fax
machines are Modified Huffman (MH), Modified Read (MR), Modified
Modified Read (MMR), and JBIG.
Glossary
G-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Group dialing
Group Dialing allows you to dial up to 199 previously registered One-
touch Speed Dialing or Coded Speed Dialing numbers together as a
group. This means you only need to press a One-touch speed dial button
or the Coded Dial button followed by a three-digit code to dial a large
group of numbers automatically. You register each group of facsimile
numbers for a One-touch or Coded Speed Dialing button, so make sure a
button is available before trying to register Group Dialing. Once a group
is defined, you can add or delete numbers to/from the group.
Group number
List of all facsimiles to receive a relayed document. These are two-digit
codes between 00-99. The group number is registered on the facsimile
with the relay feature.
I
In Use/Memory lamp
Blinks green when the telephone line is in use.
Lights green when there are documents stored in memory.
J
Jack
The telephone line receptacles on your wall and on the side of your fax
unit used to connect your fax machine to the telephone line and handset
or extension phone.
L
Long distance dialing
When dialing or registering long-distance numbers, you sometimes have
to insert a pause either within or after the telephone number. The
destination and length of the pause differ depending on the system.
Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or your local telephone
company for further information if you experience problems with long
distance dialing.
G-6
Glossary
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
Manual receiving
Use this setting if you have installed the optional handset kit and there is
only one line connected to your office which you use for both phone and
fax communication, and you want to monitor all incoming calls yourself.
When you hear the ringer, pick up the handset and answer the phone. If
you hear a slow beep, this means someone is trying to send you a
facsimile transmission. Press Start/Scan and hang up the handset to start
receiving the document. You cannot receive documents if there is another
document fed into the fax.
Manual redialing
When you use regular dialing, you can redial a number manually simply
by pressing Redial on the operation panel. The last number called is the
number re-dialed.
Manual sending
Use manual sending when you have installed the optional handset kit or
connected an extension phone and you have to talk to the other party
before you send the document. You may have to do this to send trans-
missions to older fax units. Put the document in the fax and then dial the
number. After the call connects, if you hear a high-pitched tone, press
Start/Scan to send the facsimile and then hang up. If the other party or
the other fax does not answer, hang up the handset. If the other party
answers, tell him that you are going to send a facsimile transmission and
that he should press start button on his own machine. Press Start/Scan on
your own fax, then hang up the handset.
Memory box
The memory box provides features that allow you to set up an ITU-T
subaddress and password and allows you to use advanced features such
as confidential sending and relay sending with fax units of any manufac-
ture as long as they too support ITU-T standard subaddress/password
transactions.
Memory broadcast
Allows you to send one scanned document to a maximum of 210 destina-
tions with One-touch Dialing, Coded Speed Dialing, and regular dialing.
Just dial the numbers sequentially when you send a document. If you
must do this frequently, register the numbers for Group Dialing.
Memory file
A document stored in the memory is also called a memory file.
Glossary
G-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory list
See document memory list.
Memory lock
Usually a document is printed as soon as it is received, but the memory
lock feature forces all documents to be received in memory until you
enter a password to print them. This feature prevents printed documents
from piling up on the paper output tray when the office is unattended.
After you return to the office, you can print all documents stored in the
memory.
Memory reception password
Protects all documents received and stored in the memory when the
memory reception feature is turned on. The memory reception password
is a four-digit number (0000-9999) that you should safeguard to prevent
access to your documents stored in the fax memory. This password
unlocks the memory to print all documents received with memory lock
turned on. See memory lock.
Memory sending
Scanning the document into the memory before the facsimile dials the
number and sends it. Scanning is fast and you only have to wait until the
original document is scanned, not until it is sent. You can get the original
back much faster and spend less time standing around the fax.
MP (multi-purpose) tray
Folds out from the fax and holds a variety of print media, including cut
sheet standard paper, envelopes, adhesive labels and transparencies.
Multitransaction
Also called, multiple transmission or sequential broadcast, this term refers to
scanning a document once and sending it to more than one location. You
can send a single document to a maximum of 210 destinations.
N
Noise
A general term applied to a number of problems that adversely affect the
operation of telephone lines used for modem and fax communication.
Normal mode
Using the fax with its default settings.
G-8
Glossary
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Numeric buttons
The numeric buttons are the round buttons on the operation panel
marked the same as a standard telephone keypad. Press to perform
regular dialing. The numeric buttons are also used to enter numbers and
letters when registering numbers and names.
O
One-touch Speed Dialing
Each One-touch Speed Dialing button holds a facsimile telephone
number. After the numbers are registered, all you have to do is press one
button to dial. Up to 72 numbers can be registered for One-touch Speed
Dialing.
P
Pause
By pressing Pause, you can enter a pause between digits of a telephone
number when you register the number for One-touch or Coded Speed
Dialing or during regular dialing. A pause may be required for a connec-
tion to an outside line, or some countries may require a pause for over-
seas fax transmission.
Pause time
When registering long-distance numbers, you sometimes have to insert a
pause either within or after the number. The destination of the pause and
pause time depend on the system. Pauses entered within a number are 2
seconds long, and a pause at the end of a number is 10 seconds. A pause is
inserted in a number or at the end of a number by pressing the Pause
button. The Pause button is factory preset to enter a 2 second pause within
a number, although this may differ according to your location. Pauses
entered after a number are always fixed at 10 seconds. If you adjust the
pause time, this only changes the length of the pauses inserted within
numbers and does not affect pauses entered at the end of numbers.
PBX
Stands for private branch exchange. A PBX controls the flow of telephone
traffic through the institution itself, including automatic call back and
dialing and paging systems. See switchboard.
Glossary
G-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PIN code
PIN means Personal Identification Number. Some Private Branch Exchange
(PBX) systems require that a PIN code be entered when dialing a number to
make a call or send a document by fax machine. PIN codes prevent unau-
thorized personnel from making calls. To protect privileged access to the
telephone lines, only authorized users are entrusted with the PIN codes for
daily operations. Depending on the requirements of the PBX system, the
PIN code may be entered either before the number as a prefix, or after the
number as a suffix. If your PBX requires a PIN (Personal Identification
Number) to connect to an outside line, the fax machine can be set up with
the user data settings to prompt you for a PIN code every time you dial.
Polling transmission
Polling means one facsimile unit requests another to send a document.
This is useful when the sending party, the party with the original docu-
ment, is not in the office, but the document must be sent out. The
receiving party dials the fax holding the original and requests that it be
sent. In other words, the receiver always polls the sender. Before using
the polling feature, you have to set up polling boxes.
Printable area
The area of the document that can actually be reproduced and printed on
the recording paper by the receiving fax. The printing area is smaller
than the paper.
Printer Board I
The optional Printer Board I enables your fax to operate as a printer.
®
Printer Board I is a standard feature for the LASER CLASS 3170MS.
Pulse
See rotary pulse.
R
Reduction mode
The fax unit’s automatic feature that slightly reduces the received image
to allow room at the top of the page for the sender’s ID information. You
can also reduce the size of large incoming documents using the RX
REDUCTION option.
Registering
A process by which you place fax or telephone numbers and names in
the fax unit’s memory for automatic dialing so that you can save time
dialing frequently called destinations.
G-10
Glossary
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Regular dialing
Dialing a number with the numeric buttons. Use regular dialing to dial a
number that is not registered for any of the automatic dialing methods.
Press Hook then use the numeric buttons to dial the number you want to
call.
Relay broadcast
See relay sending.
Relay sending
Also called relay broadcast. You can send a document once to a fax in a
distant location and then have that fax relay your document to several
other destinations in the same area.
Remote receiving ID
The number you dial on an extension to start receiving a fax. The default
remote receiving ID is 25, so just dial 25 and then hang up the handset of
the extension telephone.
Remote reception
Allows you to receive a fax transmission with an extension telephone. To
start receiving a fax, dial the remote receiving ID (25).
Reports
This is a list of reports printed by the facsimile:
• Activity Management Report (TX or RX) You can set the fax to print a
report every time you send or receive a document. You can also set the
fax to print part of the document on the report to remind you of the
content of the document. To turn printing these activity reports on and
off, use the user settings.
• Activity Report Provides a record of the last 40 sending and receiving
transactions. You can print out activity management reports manually
whenever you want to review the last 40 transactions, set the fax up to
print them automatically after every 40 transactions, print the report at
the same time every day, or print the report showing the sending trans-
actions of individuals or departments in your company, using depart-
ment codes registered on the fax, as well as a list of receptions.
• Confidential RX Report After you receive a confidential document in
a mailbox, the fax prints out a confidential message notice. No special
settings are required. Each notice shows the date and time you received
the confidential document, the name and telephone number of the party
sending the confidential document, whether the document was success-
fully received, and other useful information.
Glossary
G-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Error TX Report If the fax fails to send a document because the other
party does not answer, even after automatic redialing, or if an error oc-
curs, then your fax will immediately print an error transmission report.
The report includes the facsimile number of the other party so you can
try sending again and can print part of the first page of the document so
you can identify it.
• Memory Clear Report When documents are stored in the memory if
power to the fax is cut off for more than 12 hours, the documents stored
in the memory will be erased. After power is restored, a Memory Clear
List will print to show you what documents have been erased. If power
is restored within 12 hours, the documents are not erased and no report
prints.
• Multi TX/RX Report When you send a document to more than one
destination, the fax prints a report to show you the name and numbers
of the other parties, whether the transactions were completed or not,
and errors if any. The fax automatically prints multi-transaction reports
for sending documents to more than one destination, delayed sending
documents to more than one destination, sending documents through a
relay fax to more than one destination, and sending confidential docu-
ments to more than one destination if the mailboxes are the same on
every fax unit.
• Relay Broadcast Report After sending a document through a relay
fax, you may receive a relay broadcast report from the fax machine that
relayed the document. This shows whether or not the document was
successfully relayed to all the final destinations. To receive a report, the
other machine must be set to print a relay broadcast report.
Resolution
The density of dots for an output device like a fax, scanner, or printer.
Expressed in terms of dots per inch (dpi). Low resolution causes font
characters and graphics to have a jagged appearance. Higher resolution
means smoother curves and angles as well as a better match to tradi-
tional typeface designs. Resolution values are represented by horizontal
data and vertical data, for example, 600 × 600dpi.
Restricted reception
The ability of the fax unit to restrict incoming documents. With this
feature turned on, the fax unit will receive documents only from speed
dialing numbers registered in your fax unit.
Rotary pulse
A rotary-pulse or pulse dial telephone is dialed by manually rotating a dial
to send pulses to the telephone switching system. When you pulse dial,
you will hear clicks. With tone dialing, you will hear tones.
G-12
Glossary
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RX password
The ITU-T password set on your fax to match the ITU-T password of all
incoming documents. If your RX password matches the ITU-T password
of the incoming transmission, the document is received. If the passwords
do not match, the document is not received. The maximum length of the
password is 20 digits and may consist of numbers, spaces, asterisk ( ),
*
and pound mark (#).
S
Scanning area
The scanning area is narrower than the original document size on the
entire border around the document. Documents you send should have
some margin on the sides and the top and bottom. Anything over this
margin cannot be scanned for sending.
Sender’s name
Name or company name, your fax number, date and time the document
sent to the receiving party are printed on each page you send. The
sender’s name, which is your own name can be printed on the docu-
ments that you send. You can register up to 19 sender names that can be
selected with the TTI selector before sending. Your name and facsimile
number are printed at the top of documents that you send.
Sending speed
The rate at which documents are sent over the phone line. See also bps.
Sequential broadcast
Allows you to send one scanned document to up to 210 destinations by
using One-touch Speed Dialing, Coded Speed Dialing, and regular
dialing. You just dial several numbers to send the document. If you do
this frequently, you should register the numbers for Group Dialing.
Smoothing
Even if the image you receive from the other party’s fax is of poor
quality, your fax unit will smooth the image to produce a better quality
image.
Stamp
The optional stamp feature marks documents that have been scanned for
transmission with a yellow circle stamped on the lower left side of the
document.
Glossary
G-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Standard
Use this setting to send normal, typewritten or printed documents
containing only text and no drawings, photographs, or illustrations.
Standby
On and ready to use. All operations start from the standby mode where
the date and time are displayed.
Super Fine
This button increases the clarity of documents you send. The lamp shows
you the current setting. It is four times the Standard resolution.
Switchboard
Also called a PBX (private branch exchange) internal switching system.
You have to dial an outside line number along with the regular facsimile
telephone number. The outside line number must also be registered.
Depending on the system, you may also have to insert a pause after the
outside line number. The pause button is factory preset to enter a 2-
second pause. However, you can change the pause time to suit your PBX
or telephone system. Before adjusting the pause time, check with your
local authorized Canon dealer or your local telephone company about
the correct pause time to use for your telephone system.
T
Timed sending
See delayed transmission.
Tone/pulse setting
This setting allows you to set the fax to touch tone (T) or pulse (P)
dialing, depending on the type of phone line you have installed.
Tone
You can switch temporarily from pulse to tone dialing by pressing Tone
before dialing. Data services may require that you use tone dialing, so if
you have a conventional pulse dial telephone and need to use tone dial
to access the data service, press Tone to tone dial on your pulse telephone
line.
Toner cartridge
Your fax machine uses a patented FX6 cartridge which contains both the
photosensitive drum and toner in one compact unit. For details about
disposing of used toner cartridges, contact your local dealer or autho-
rized Canon representative.
G-14
Glossary
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Touch-tone
A touch-tone or tone dial telephone is dialed by pressing buttons that
sends tones of varying pitch to the telephone switching system.
Transaction number
When a document is scanned into or received in the memory, it is
assigned a transaction number (TX/RX). You can select documents in the
memory for sending, printing, or deleting by specifying the transaction
number.
Transfer
A special feature you can set up on the fax to have all documents re-
ceived on the main fax unit transferred to another fax unit. For example,
you could have the main fax unit in the office transfer all documents to
your fax at home. You can set the day and time for this feature to turn on
and off. Please remember, however, that documents received in a confi-
dential mailbox or a memory box cannot be transferred. See transfer
password.
Transfer password
Protects the transfer settings from unauthorized access. You must enter
the transfer password, a four-digit code (0000-9999), in order to view or
change the transfer settings.
Transmission time
A fax transmission consists of three stages: the pre-message handshake,
the message transmission, and the post-message handshake. The trans-
mission time described in this user's guide is not the total time required
for the entire transmission. It is only the time for the message
transmission. The transmission time described in this user's guide is the
fastest time achieved when faxes communicate in the same mode.
TTI
Stands for transmit terminal identification. Also called sender information.
The TTI is the name of the person or organization and the facsimile
number of the fax that sends a document. In addition to a unit name that
you register for the fax, you can create up to 19 sender names that can be
selected and used in place of the unit name when you send a facsimile
transmission.
TTI Selector
With this feature you can select the name to be printed at the top of the
message you send. Usually you register your company name as the TTI,
but you can also use personal names.
Glossary
G-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TX password
The ITU-T password set on your fax that accompanies the document you
send and must match the RX password on the fax where it is received. If
your TX password matches the RX password of the other party’s fax, the
document is received. If the passwords do not match, the document is
not received. The maximum length of the password is 20 digits and may
consist of numbers, spaces, asterisk ( ), and pound mark (#).
*
U
UHQ
Stands for ultra high quality image. Allows you to send documents that
are very close to the quality of the original.
Ultra Fine
This button increases the clarity of documents you send. The lamp shows
you the current setting. It is eight times the Standard resolution.
Urgent document
Use direct sending to send an urgent document ahead of documents in
the memory waiting to be sent. Just feed the urgent document into the
facsimile and dial, and press Direct TX. As soon as the facsimile finishes
sending the current document from the memory, it will send the urgent
document. See also direct sending.
G-16
Glossary
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
closed network
A
creating, 13-16
Coded Speed Dial List
sample, 14-3, 14-4
Coded Speed Dialing
defined, 4-5
Activity Management Report
sample, 14-9
setting, 16-9
Activity Management Report (TX/RX)
separate
entering a name, 4-17
entering number, 4-16
sample, 14-10
registering for Group Dialing, 4-25
setting timer, 4-18
setting, 16-9
Activity Report (RX)
setting transmission speed, 4-22
setting up, 4-15
sample, 14-15
setting, 16-8
turning ECM on/off, 4-23
using, 4-31
Activity Report (TX)
sample, 14-12
confidential documents
canceling mailbox, 10-7
creating mailbox, 10-2
described, 10-1
setting, 16-8
Activity Report (TX) with image
sample, 14-13
setting, 16-8
receiving, 10-8
Activity Reports
printing, 14-9
sending, 10-10
sending with speed dialing, 10-10
confidential mailbox
changing mailbox settings, 10-6
setting, 10-2, 16-21
Confidential Mailbox List
sample, 14-17
automatic redialing
described, 6-19
setting, 6-20
B
Confidential Receive Report
sample, 14-15
batch sending
function, 4-9, 4-18, 4-27, 16-34
setting, 16-8
Contrast
C
setting for copying, 5-5
setting for sending, 6-5
copying
cancelling
receiving, 7-11
checking document, 5-2, B-1
contrast, 5-5
receiving optional Dual-line, 7-12
sending, 6-8
document, 5-2
sending optional Dual-line, 6-9
CHECK PRINTER COVER
displayed at power on, 2-42
cleaning
document settings, 5-4
document type, 5-5
procedure, 5-6
resolution, 5-5
fax unit, 15-24
setting document, 5-3
scanning area, 15-27
with restrictions on, 13-12
Index
I-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
setting, 16-30
D
document
data registration
entering a name, 3-7
menu, 16-2
check before loading for sending, 6-2, B-1
copying, 5-2
defined, 2-3
sender information, 3-12
date
deleting with Delete File button, 8-9
deleting with Memory Reference button,
8-10
format, 16-30
registering, 3-13
erasing from memory, 8-9
jam, 15-2
setting, 16-4
date and time
receiving large size, 16-17
removing document feed jams, 15-2
scanning for polling sending, 11-20
SELECT CASSETTE, 16-17
setting for copying, 5-3
setting for sending, 6-3
Document Distribution System
options, 1-6
registering, 3-13
DATE SETUP
format setting, 16-30
defaults
defined, 2-3
listed, 12-12
delayed sending
setting, 6-24
document feeder tray
attaching, 2-27
setting timer, 6-24
density
load limit, 5-4, 6-4
scanning density, 16-5
print density, 16-18
Department Access Code
setting, 13-6
setting document for copying, 5-3
setting document for sending, 6-3
document output tray
attaching, 2-26
using, 13-11
Document Type
Department Access Code Report
setting for copying, 5-5
setting for sending, 6-5
Dual-line
sample, 14-11
dialing
Coded Speed Dialing, 4-15, 4-31
directory dialing, 4-35
entering pauses, 4-2
Group Dialing, 4-24, 4-33
long distance, 6-10
One-touch Speed Dialing, 4-6, 4-29
PIN codes, 13-24
regular dialing, 6-7
speed dialing, 4-5, 4-29
speed dialing methods, 4-5
tone dialing on pulse line, 12-3
direct sending
automatic switching, 7-2, 7-7
viewing simultaneous
transactions, 6-14, 7-3
Dual-line Upgrade Kit II
options, 1-5
E
ECM
turning on/off for Coded Speed
Dialing, 4-23
described, 6-15
turning on/off for One-touch
Speed Dialing, 4-14
ENERGY SAVER
setting, 16-30
procedure, 6-15
directory dialing
using, 4-35
I-2
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Energy Saver button
using, 3-23
described, 16-3
listed, 16-20
energy saver mode
Energy Saver button, 3-23
returning to full power, 3-23
turning on, 3-21
using, 3-21
MEMORY BOX, 16-22
POLLING BOX, 16-25
PRESET POLLING, 16-25
RELAY TX GROUP, 16-21
TRANSFER, 16-26
entry mode
changing, 3-7
name, 3-7
G
number, 3-9
text, 3-9
Group Dial List
error messages
sample, 14-4
listed alphabetically, 15-38
listed by number, 15-35
Error Report (RX)
sample, 14-14
Group Dialing
defined, 4-5
registering for Coded Speed Dialing
button, 4-25, 4-26
Error Report (TX)
sample, 14-11
registering for One-touch Speed Dialing
button, 4-25, 4-26
extension phone
connecting, 2-40
receiving with, 7-8
setting timer, 4-27
setting up, 4-24
using, 4-33
F
H
fax memory
handset (option)
options, 1-5
connecting, 2-38
fax unit
required for manual receiving, 7-7
using, 12-2
assembling, 2-23
front view, 2-17
using for sending, 6-17
using with restrictions on, 13-13
view, 2-18
lifting, 2-10
parts, 2-17
rear view, 2-18
FAX’S PRINTER SET
# OF RX COPIES, 16-17
described, 16-3
I
INSTALL CARTRIDGE
displayed at power on, 2-42
ITU-T password
listed, 16-16
RX REDUCTION, 16-17
SELECT CASSETTE, 16-17
SELECT DENSITY, 16-18
SELECT OUTPT TRAY, 16-19
TONER SUPPLY LOW, 16-18
USE MP TRAY, 16-17
FILE SETTINGS
memory box, 8-11
sending document, 6-27
ITU-T subaddress
memory box, 8-11
sending document, 6-27
CONFID. MAILBOX, 16-21
Index
I-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
setting, 16-22
setup summary, 8-16
Memory Box Report
sample, 14-16
J
jam
document feed, 15-2
Memory Clear Report
sample, 14-20
printer feed, 15-4
memory list
L
printing, 8-5
memory lock
language
described, 13-17
MEMORY LOCK RX, 16-29
setting password, 13-17
setting time, 13-17
summary settings, 13-19
turning on, 13-20
MEMORY LOCK RX
setting, 13-17, 16-29
memory sending
described, 6-12
switching, 16-30
location
choosing, 2-4
ideal temperature, 2-4
space around fax unit, 2-6
long distance
setting for Coded Speed Dialing, 4-22
setting for One-touch Speed Dialing, 4-12
M
procedure, 6-12
menu
manual receiving
button summary, 3-9
disabled with optional Dual-line, 7-2, 7-7
manual/auto switching, 7-5, 16-14
procedure, 7-7
defined, 2-3
opening, 3-6
returning to previous level, 3-6
manual sending
using, 3-5
described, 6-17
mode
procedure, 6-17
changing entry mode, 3-7
MP tray
memory
creating memory box, 8-11
deleting document, 8-9, 8-10
erasing document, 8-9
adjusting paper size, 2-46
loading, 2-43
setting, 16-17
locking to receive all documents, 13-17
power failure, 8-27
Multi-transaction Report
sample, 14-14
printing document in memory, 8-6
printing memory list, 8-5
re-sending to different destination, 8-7
sending with memory full, 6-15
memory box
N
numeric keypad buttons
entering text/numbers, 3-7
summary, 3-9
canceling, 8-23
changing settings, 8-22
creating, 8-11, 8-12, 8-14
ITU-T subaddress/password, 8-11
preparation for setting up, 8-12
printing document from, 8-25
sending document, 8-24
O
One-touch Speed Dial List 1
sample, 14-3
I-4
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
One-touch Speed Dial List 2
sample, 14-4
PHONE NO. CHECK
setting, 16-31
One-touch Speed Dialing
defined, 4-5
PIN codes
described, 13-21
registering for Group Dialing, 4-25
setting for long distance, 4-12
setting time, 4-9
dialing after number, 13-24
dialing before number, 13-25
forced, 13-28
setting transmission speed, 4-13
setting up, 4-6
setting, 13-21
setting for speed dialing, 13-26
with speed dialing, 13-27
polling
turning ECM on/off, 4-14
using, 4-29
operation panel
before polling receiving, 11-2
before polling to send, 11-15
canceling polling box setup, 11-23
canceling preset polling, 11-13
changing polling box setup, 11-21
changing preset settings, 11-12
creating polling box, 11-15
described, 11-2
buttons, 3-2, 3-4
using, 3-5
options
Document
Distribution System , 1-6
Dual-line Upgrade Kit II, 1-5
fax memory, 1-5
listed, 1-5
preset, 11-5
Printer Board I, 1-6
printer options, 1-6
OUTPUT TRAY FULL
message, 8-2
scanning document for sending, 11-20
sending, 11-15
timer, 11-5
to receive, 11-3
to receive at set time, 11-5
POLLING BOX
P
setting, 16-25
power
paper
backup battery, 8-27
connection, 2-7, 2-41
failure and memory, 8-27
required, 2-7
loading MP tray, 2-43
loading Paper Cassettes 1 and 2, 2-31
storing, 15-15, 15-16
Paper Cassettes 1 and 2
adjusting for paper size, 2-32
inserting in fax unit, 2-37
loading, 2-31
turning on power, 2-41
PRESET POLLING
setting, 16-25
printer
Paper delivery
options, 1-6
selecting face-up tray, 2-53
selecting upper and lower
output trays, 2-50, 16-19
paper jams
Printer Board I
option, 1-6
printer cover
closing, 2-25
avoiding, 2-9
printing
removing, 15-4
Activity Reports, 14-9
document in memory, 8-6
document in memory box, 8-25
documents locked in memory, 13-20
pauses
adjusting length, 4-3
entering for dialing, 4-2
MID PAUSE SET, 16-10
Index
I-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
memory list, 8-5
paper supply source for reports, 16-9
removing jams, 15-4
reports with restrictions on, 13-13
sender names, 14-6
TONER SUPPLY LOW, 16-18
User Data List, 14-5
Program button
line busy, 6-19
setting up, 6-20
setup summary, 6-21
registering
correcting, 3-17
date and time, 3-14
making corrections, 3-17
sender information, 3-13
sender names, 3-18
setting up, 12-5
pulse dial
unit name, 3-15
setting, 3-10
unit telephone number, 3-14
regular dialing
long distance, 6-10
R
using, 6-7
regular transmission
setting for Coded Speed Dialing, 4-20
setting for One-touch Speed Dialing, 4-11
Relay Broadcast Report
sample, 14-16
receive report
See “RX REPORT”, 14-15, 16-8
RECEIVED IN MEMORY
message, 8-2
Received Memory Box List
sample, 14-19
RELAY TX GROUP
setting, 16-21
receiving
relaying documents
all documents in memory, 13-17
auto switch time, 7-5
automatically, 7-2
canceling, 7-11
changing relay settings, 9-7
deleting relay group, 9-9
described, 9-2
sending to relay unit, 9-10
sending with speed dialing, 9-12
setting your fax as relay unit, 9-4
summary of settings, 9-5
using Relay Broadcast button, 9-12
remote receiving
confidential documents, 10-8
manually, 7-7
memory receiving, 16-15
MEMORY RX, 16-15
messages, 7-2
password, 16-30
changing ID, 7-9
polling, 11-3
with extension phone, 7-8
REPLACE CARTRIDGE
displayed at power on, 2-42
REPORT SETTINGS
activity report, 16-9
remote, 7-8
REMOTE RECEIVING, 16-14
RX REDUCTION, 16-17
setting receive mode, 7-2
start speed, 16-30
transferring documents, 7-13
recording paper
confidential RX report, 16-8
described, 16-3
listed, 16-7
loading paper, 2-31
storing, 15-15
memory box report, 16-8
print report where, 16-9
RX report, 16-8
redial
AUTO REDIAL, 16-11
TX report, 16-8
redialing
automatic, 6-19
canceling, 6-20
I-6
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
reports
ECM RX, 16-14
listed, 16-13
Activity Management Report
sample, 14-9
MAN/AUTO SWITCH, 16-14
MEMORY RX, 16-15
REMOTE RX, 16-14
RX PAGE FOOTER, 16-15
RX START SPEED
setting, 16-30
Activity Report (RX) sample, 14-15
Activity Report (TX) sample, 14-12
Activity Report (TX) with image
sample, 14-13
Activity Report (TX/RX separate)
sample, 14-10
Activity Reports, 14-9
S
Coded Speed Dial List 1 sample, 14-3
Coded Speed Dial List 2 sample, 14-4
Confidential Mailbox List sample, 14-17
Confidential Receive Report
sample, 14-15
safety
electrical storms, 2-8
handling power cord, 2-7
power cord, 2-7
Department Access Code Report
sample, 14-11
space around fax unit, 2-6
search
Error Report (RX) sample, 14-14
Error Report (TX) sample, 14-11
Group Dial List sample, 14-4
Memory Box Report sample, 14-16
Memory Clear Report sample, 14-20
Multi-transaction Report sample, 14-14
One-touch Speed Dial List 1 sample, 14-3
One-touch Speed Dialing List 2
sample, 14-4
name/number from directory, 4-35
search buttons
defined, 2-3
security
closed network, 13-16
copying, 13-12
operating fax with restrictions on, 13-11
printing reports, 13-13
restricting fax operation, 13-6
sending document with restriction, 13-11
setting restrictions on use of fax, 13-6
system password, 13-2
turning restrictions off/on, 13-14
using handset (option)
with restrictions on, 13-13
send report
paper supply source, 16-9
Received Memory Box List sample, 14-19
Relay Broadcast Report sample, 14-16
Sender Name List sample, 14-7
sender names, 14-6
speed dialing lists, 14-2
User Data List, 14-5
User’s Data List sample, 14-5
See “TX REPORT”, 14-12, 16-8
send settings
Resolution
setting for copying, 5-5
setting for sending, 6-5
RESTRICTIVE CODES
setting, 16-28
AUTO REDIAL, 16-11
BATCH TX, 16-11
ECM TX, 16-10
listed, 16-10
RX footer
MID PAUSE SET, 16-10
PIN CODE, 16-12
illustrated, 3-13
setting, 16-15
QUICK ON-LINE TX, 16-11
TIME OUT, 16-11
RX PASSWORD
setting, 16-30
TX STAMP (option), 16-12
sender information
RX SETTINGS
described, 16-3
defined, 3-12
Index
I-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
registering, 3-13
setting timer, 6-24
RX footer, 3-13
start speed, 16-30
RX PAGE FOOTER, 16-15
with ITU-T password, 6-27
with ITU-T subaddress, 6-27
sequential broadcasting
sending to more than one location, 6-22
setting up
setting, 3-13
unit name, 3-15, 16-5
unit telephone number, 3-14, 16-5
Sender Name List
sample, 14-7
assembling fax unit, 2-23
attaching trays, 2-26
sender names
changing, 3-20
connecting extension phone, 2-40
connecting handset (option), 2-38
connecting telephone line, 2-39
error messages at power on, 2-42
installing toner cartridge, 2-23
loading MP tray, 2-43
loading paper, 2-31
deleting, 3-20
printing list, 14-6
registering, 3-18
selecting before sending, 6-6
sender’s name
setting, 16-5
sending
loading Paper Cassettes 1 and 2, 2-31
power on, 2-41
adjusting scanning settings, 6-4
BATCH TX, 16-11, 16-34
canceling, 6-8
removing shipping material, 2-19
shipping material
confidential document with speed
dialing, 10-10
removing, 2-19
speed dialing
confidential documents, 10-10
Coded Speed Dialing, 4-5, 4-31
Group Dialing, 4-5, 4-33
ITU-T subaddress/password, 6-27
lists, 14-2
contrast, 6-5
direct sending, 6-15
document from memory box, 8-24
document to relay unit, 9-10
document type, 6-5
methods, 4-5
One-touch Speed Dialing, 4-5, 4-29
sending confidential documents, 10-10
sending relaying documents, 9-12
using, 4-29, 4-31, 4-33, 4-35
with PIN code, 13-27
stamp (option)
document with restrictions on, 13-11
manual sending, 6-17
memory box, 8-25
memory full, 6-15
memory sending, 6-12
more than one location, 6-22
polling, 11-15
described, 12-8
re-filling ink pad, 15-33
preparing document, 6-2
QUICK ON-LINE TX, 16-11
re-sending document in memory, 6-19
re-sending to different destination, 8-8
regular dialing, 6-7
setting, 16-12
setting up, 12-8
Super Fine
setting, 6-5
SUPPLY REC. PAPER
displayed at power on, 2-42
system password
relaying document with speed
dialing, 9-12
resolution, 6-5
setting, 13-2, 16-28
selecting sender name, 6-6
sequential broadcasting, 6-22
setting document on fax, 6-3
SYSTEM SETTINGS
DATE SETUP, 16-30
described, 16-3
I-8
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DISPLAY LANGUAGE, 16-30
ENERGY SAVER, 16-31
listed, 16-27
transaction number
assigned to every transaction, 6-13
defined, 2-3
MEMORY LOCK RX, 16-29
PASSWORD (system password), 16-28
PHONE NO. CHECK, 16-31
RESTRICTIVE CODES, 16-28
RX PASSWORD, 16-30
RX RESTRICTION, 16-29
RX START SPEED, 16-30
TX START SPEED, 16-30
system setting password
canceling, 13-4
LCD display, 6-13
receiving, 7-3
transaction history, 8-3
TRANSFER
setting, 16-26
transferring document reception
canceling, 7-20
changing settings, 7-18
setting up, 7-14
summary table of settings, 7-15
changing, 13-4
turning off, 7-18
turning on, 7-17
turning on/off, 7-17
transmission report
See “TX REPORT”, 14-12, 16-8
transmission speed
setting for Coded Speed Dialing, 4-22
setting for One-touch Speed Dialing, 4-13
troubleshooting
T
telephone line
connecting, 2-39
jack required, 2-5
selecting type, 16-6
switching, 3-10
questions and answers, 15-42
TX SETTINGS
temperature
fax unit location, 2-4
described, 16-3
time
see “send settings”, 16-10
TX START SPEED
registering, 3-14
setting, 16-4
setting, 16-30
timer
set for polling, 11-5
setting for Coded Speed Dialing, 4-18
setting for Group Dialing, 4-27
setting for One-touch Speed Dialing, 4-9
setting for sending, 6-24
tone dial
U
Ultra Fine
setting, 6-5
unit name
setting, 3-10
registering, 3-15
unit telephone number
registering, 3-14
unpacking
toner cartridge
handling, 15-22
installing new, 2-23
protecting, 2-9
box contents, 2-11, 2-13
upper output tray
attaching, 2-26
User Data List
printing, 14-5
removing seal, 2-24
replacing, 15-17
storing, 15-23
transaction history
displaying, 8-3
user data settings
summary, 16-3
Index
I-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USER SETTINGS
DATE & TIME, 16-4
DENSITY CONTROL, 16-5
described, 16-3
listed, 16-4
OFFHOOK ALARM, 16-6
PROGRAM KEY, 16-6
SENDER’S NAME, 16-5
TEL LINE TYPE, 16-6
TX TERMINAL ID, 16-5
UNIT NAME, 16-5
UNIT TELEPHONE #, 16-5
VOLUME CONTROL, 16-6
User’s Data List
sample, 14-5
I-10
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This publication uses 50% recycled paper.
CANON INC.
30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
CANON U.S.A., INC.
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A.
CANON CANADA INC.
6390 Dixie Road Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1P7, Canada
CANON EUROPA N.V.
Bovenkerkerweg 59-61 P.O. Box 2262, 1180 EG Amstelveen, The Netherlands
CANON FRANCE S.A.
17, quai du President Paul Doumer, 92414 Courbevoie, Cedex, France
CANON (U.K.) LTD.
Woodhatch, Reigate, Surrey, RH2 8BF, United Kingdom
CANON DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
P.O. Box 100364, Europark Fichtenhain A10 47807 Krefeld, Germany
CANON LATIN AMERICA, INC.
6505 Blue Lagoon Drive Suite 325 Miami, Florida 33126, U.S.A.
CANON AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
1 Thomas Holt Drive, North Ryde, Sydney, N.S.W. 2113, Australia
CANON SINGAPORE PTE. LTD.
79 Anson Road #09-01/06, Singapore 079906
CANON HONG KONG CO., LTD.
9/F., The Hong Kong Club Building, 3A Chater Road, Central, Hong Kong
120V
HT1-2169-000-V.1.1
032001NF0.4
© CANON INC. 2001
PRINTED IN JAPAN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|